Home

ineo+ 6500

1. 3 e a03xt1c002ca 1 2 From tray 4 From tray 5 SI From tray 4 and 5 to the main body Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION m CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 PAPER FEED SECTION PF 601 HT 504 4 4 Configuration Pick up roller Paper feed roller Separation Paper empty sensor roller A PS3 2 PS11 Paper feed assist fans Paper size VR 1 VR1 and VR 2 Main scan direction lt co 5 wn a o Paper size sensors Rt1 PS5 Lt1 Remaining paper VR 1 PS6 Rt2 PS13 and Lt2 PS14 VR2 and VR 2 VR4 Sub scan direction Paper lift plate Paper up down assist mechanism a03xt2c001ca 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 42 Drive 4 2 1 Tray lift drive PF 601 HT 504
2. 15ant1c005na 1 2 3 4 Conveyance from the folding section to the saddle stitching section Movement by the bundle arm Movement by the clip Conveyance to the trimmer section only for saddle stitching mode 5 6 7 8 Paper exit Stack movement of the paper exit Front side view Left side view Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION B COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION SD 501 41 Composition Subtray paper full Horizontal convey Horizontal Entrance Sub tray sensor PS12 ance gate conveyance conveyance lt z 77 a Entranc te 15ant2c001nb 4 HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 2 Drive 4 2 1 Entrance conveyance drive Lo D CO
3. fd501t02031c 1 PI maximum size sensors Up PS47 and 4 Paper size VR Up VR31 and Lw VR32 Lw PS48 b Paper regulation plate 2 L size sensors Up PS35 and Lw PS41 6 PI paper set sensors Up PS44 3 S size sensors Up PS36 and Lw PS42 PS45 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 PI SECTION 9 3 2 Up down control For the up down of the tray when the paper lift motors Up M8 1 and Lw M9 7 rotate in the normal and reverse directions the lift arms Up 11 and Lw 9 start up to bring up and down the PI lift plates Up 12 and 10 The lower limit position is detected by the PI lift plate home sensors Up PS34 2 and Lw PS40 8 The upper limit position is detected by the PI upper limit sensors Up PS32 4 and Lw PS38 6 at the posi tion to which the actuators Up 3 and Lw 5 are pushed up by the PI lift plate When the PI paper set sensors Up PS44 and Lw PS45 are ON with the main body start button ON and M9 turn ON to bring up the PI lift plate When PS32 and PS38 turn ON M8 and M9 stop While in the copy print operation when PS32 and PS38 turn OFF from ON 8 and 9 turn ON again to bring up the plate until PS32 and PS38 turn ON When PS44 and PS45 turn OFF with no paper left M8 and M9 make a reverse rotation to move down t
4. 15ant2c077na 1 2 3 4 Stapling arm Staple bending arm Clincher plate Clincher solenoids Rt SD9 and Lt SD10 5 6 7 8 Staple Left side view Eccentric cam Stapler motors Rt M29 Lt M39 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 7 2 6 Bundle arm rotation drive 50 501 lt 5 7 a 15ant2c033na 1 Bundle arm 5 Guide shaft 2 Slide guide 6 Fulcrum shaft 3 Left side view 7 Bundle arm rotation home sensor PS31 4 Bundle arm rotation motor M22 55 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 2 7 Bundle arm movement drive SD 501 lt Lu z a 15 2 034 1 Bundle arm 4 Bundle arm motor M10 2 Guide shaft 5 Bundle arm home sensor PS32 3 Folding sensor 2 PS44 6 Fulcrum shaft 56 Theory of Operat
5. fd501t01001c A 1 Pl section 4 Folding conveyance section 2 gt Conveyance section 5 Main tray section 3 Punch section 6 Sub tray section FD 501 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH A Straight mode Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 WIN fd501t01002c 1 Paper through from the PI 2 Paper through from the main body paper exit Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH B Sub tray mode fd501to1003c 1 Paper through from the PI 2 Paper through from the main body paper exit FD 501 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH C Punch mode L and S sizes Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 2 fd501t01004c 1 2 3 4 Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit In the case of a L size In the case of a S size 5 he next option Paper exit to the sub tray Paper exit to the main tray paper through to Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH D Z fold mode fe
6. lt oc 5 wn a 15ant2c046na 1 2 SI 4 Front side direction Spring Guide shaft Shock absorbing guide 5 6 7 8 Slide guide Guide plate Ring Bundle arm 73 SD 501 lt LLI a amp S 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 74 C Bundle arm control The bundle arm motor M10 rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal 1 turns ON and moves the bundle arm to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size The bundle arm rotation motor M22 rotates in the forward direction to rotate the bundle arm to the stapling section 3 after a specified period of time since the folding sensor 2 PS44 detects the trailing edge of paper of the last set It stops the bundle arm in an upright position 4 when the bundle arm rotation home sensor PS31 turns OFF Then M22 rotates again 5 to drive the bundle arm until it is contacted with the guide plate on the stapling sec tion 6 The timing for M22 to restart the rotation 5 is different between in the multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode Multi center folding mode When the saddle stitching press home sensor PS27 detects the saddle stitch ing hold Up has been moved to the its upper position e Saddle stitching mode
7. a a 5 Is502t01002c 1 2 Stacker tray non sort sort mode Coupling mode 3 Sub tray mode LS 501 502 LS 501 502 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH Blank page Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION B COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION LS 501 502 A 41 Composition Coupling conveyance Entrance convey lock solenoid SD11 p ance lock solenoid LS 501 only SD5 Front door lock solenoid SD4 Is502t02001c 4 2 Drive lt 5 wn QO ass a O L Q 3 2 Is502to2002c 1 Entrance conveyance lock solenoid SD5 3 Coupling jam release lever 2 Entrance jam release lever 4 Coupling conveyance lock solenoid SD1 1 4 COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Door open close mechanism While the LS is in operation the front door is locked by the front door lock solenoid SD4 thus making it impos sible to open and close it However while in the coupling conveyance coupling mode or while exiting paper into the sub tray sub tray mode the front door can
8. a052t1c003ca 1 2 Reverse paper exit Conveyance to the reverse stacker 3 4 Swing back Paper feeding Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH 3 2 Double sided mode A Double sided mode front side scan DF 609 2 a052t1004ca 1 Reverse conveyance back side 3 Paper feeding 2 Position shift in front side scanning swing back B Double sided mode back side scan 2 2 a052t1c005ca 1 Paper exiting 2 gt Conveyance to the back side scanning posi tion DF 609 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH Blank page Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION m CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 PAPER FEED SECTION o uL fe 4 1 Configuration o lt c ul 5 a05212c001ca E 7 1 Pick up roller 4 Separation roller 2 Paper feed roller 5 Registration roller e B No paper sensor 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 Drive o e a 4 MK I gt a052t2c002ca 1 Registration clutch MC301 4 Separation roller with torque limiter 2 Registration roller 5 Paper feed roller with one way clutch
9. fd501to1005c 1 Paper through from the PI 5 Paper exit to the main tray paper through 2 Paper through from the main body paper exit o the next option 3 tst folding 6 Paper exit to the sub tray 4 2nd folding FD 501 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 70 E Letter fold out mode Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 l ole AG I 2 fd501to1006c 1 2 3 4 Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit 1st folding 2nd folding 5 6 o the next option Paper exit to the sub tray Paper exit to the main tray paper through Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 F Letter fold in double parallel fold mode 3 PAPER PATH 6 amp 2 5 4 6 3 li fd501to1007c 1 2 3 4 Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit 1st folding 2nd folding Paper exit to the main tray paper through o the next option Paper exit to the sub tray 11 fe FD 501 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 72 G Gate fold mode Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 nanan 8 2 PE NG
10. ORE 19501102002 1 Main tray paper exit motor M17 8 Entrance conveyance motor 1 2 Intermediate conveyance motor 4 Punch conveyance motor M2 76 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTIO 422 Gate drive FD 501 lt ul 2 a e a 14 11 10 fd501t02003c 1 Entrance gate 10 Vertical conveyance roller 4 2 Entrance gate solenoid SD1 11 L size gate solenoid SD4 3 Vertical conveyance roller 1 12 L size gate 4 Roller solenoid 1 SD5 13 S size gate solenoid 03 5 Roller solenoid 2 506 14 size gate 6 Vertical conveyance roller 2 15 Sub tray gate solenoid 509 7 Vertical conveyance roller 3 16 Sub tray gate 8 Roller solenoid 3 507 17 Sub tray paper exit roller 9 Roller solenoid 4 SD8 18 Paper exit solenoid SD12 77 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 2 3 Alignment drive 1 FD 501 B I4 3 fd501t02004c 2 1 Alignment motor M12 8 Alignment plate Rr 2 Belt 4 Alignment plate Fr lt Lu z a 78 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Conveyance pat
11. 8 9 10 te EN on enn 2 sm s SEIS 5 KRO amp 6 Im E 77 o 2 1 15502102017 1 Entrance sensor 54 6 2 Paper 7 Stacker tray 3 Movable type front stopper B Grip belt 4 20mm 9 Shift unit 5 Stationary type front stopper 10 Grip 23 LS 501 502 lt Lu z a 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION 1 Stacker tray non sort mode Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 Entrance sensor PS4 Shift unit motor M5 a Front stopper Latch ON signal solenoid 809 ch OFF sona 2 3 5 6 8 4 Is502102018c 1 Main body paper exit sensor 53 ON 2 The shift unit starts to move 3 1st sheet of paper 4 Movable type front stopper ON 2 Stacker tray sort mode 5 2nd sheet of paper 6 3rd sheet of paper Last sheet of paper 8 gt Movable type front stopper OFF 1 Entrance sensor PS4 Shift unit motor 5 Front stopper Latch ON signal solenoid 509 eh OF s r 2 3 5 6 8 10 9 Is502to2019c 4 7 1 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 ON 2 The shift unit starts to move 3 ist sheet of paper 4 Movable type front stopper ON 51 Last sheet of paper 24 6 Shif
12. m fd501to1008c 1 2 3 4 Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit 1st folding 2nd folding 6 7 3rd folding o the next option Paper exit to the sub tray Paper exit to the main tray paper through Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 H Folding mode 3 PAPER PATH fd501to1009c 1 2 3 Paper through from the PI Paper through from the main body paper exit Folding 4 5 Paper exit to the main tray paper through o the next option Paper exit to the sub tray 13 FD 501 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 74 Blank page Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION B COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION FD 501 A 41 Composition Entrance gate Sub tray gate 5 lt o 7 a o Alignment plate Fr Rr fd501to2001c 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 42 Drive 4 2 1 Conveyance drive 25 Ko Q 9 5 25 E a 2 D E 4 NG 5 I
13. 5 7 a 3 15jmt2c004na 1 Flat stapling stopper 4 Flat stapling stopper release solenoids 507 and 508 2 Spring 5 Saddle stitching stopper motor M18 3 Saddle stitching stopper 6 Saddle stitching stopper home sensor PS23 33 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Stopper control 1 Folding mode Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body 1 the saqdle stitching stopper motor M18 rotates 2 to move down the saddle stitching stopper to the stopping position in accordance with the paper size After completing the alignment operation of the last paper 3 M18 rotates 4 to move down the saddle stitching e stopper to the folding position After completing the folding operation when the folding paper exit sensor PS25 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle M18 rotates 5 to move up the saddle stitching stopper to the alignment position in accordance with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy 3 Alignment motor Up M5 Alignment motor Lw M16 Saddle stitching stopper home sensor 523 EEE Saddle stitching UP n 2 stopper motor M18 DOWN Folding paper exit sensor PS25 I 1 2 4 5 15jmt2c005na 8 a 1 FNS start signal turned ON
14. Reverse z VU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 15ant2c093na B 6 1 Main body start signal B Insertion completed and conveyance started 2 Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size 9 Conveyance completed Pr 3 Bundle arm started to rotate 10 Paper clip caught paper E 4 Bundle arm stopped in an upright position 11 Bundle arm shelter operation 5 Bundle arm restarted to rotate 12 Shelter completed 6 Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate 13 Bundle arm moved for the subsequent set 7 Bundle arm inserted under the fold line 14 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode 75 SD 501 lt e LLI 2 a amp S 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 76 7 3 7 Bundle arm assist control A Mechanism The bundle arm assist mechanism is the mechanism to assist the paper conveyance of the bundle arm rotation drive to be conducted without fault It pushes up the fore edge side of the paper 6 with the bundle arm assist plate 4 to tilt it to the front The bundle arm assist motor M26 2 drives the bundle arm plate 4 via the belt The bundle arm assist upper limit sensor PS39 1 detects the upper home position and the bundle arm assist home sensor PS38 3 detects the lower home position The bundle arm assist plate 4 waits at the position 5 mm below the fore edge side of the paper dur
15. 5 7 a 45 FD 501 lt Lu z a 8 SUB SECTION 46 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 2006 8 2 Drive fd501t02025c 1 Paper exit solenoid 5012 3 Sub tray paper exit roller 2 Sub tray paper exit roller Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 SUB TRAY SECTION 8 33 Operation 8 3 1 Sub tray full detection control When the paper that has been exited in the sub tray gets to a specified thickness the sub tray paper full sensor PS17 2 turns OFF and the sub tray paper full information is sent to the main body Upon receipt of this infor mation the main body displays the message on the operation LCD When the folded paper on the sub tray is unfolded and the sub tray paper full sensor PS46 1 turns ON the sub tray paper full information is also sent to the main body FD 501 F4 lt 6 z 7 fd501to2026c 0 1 Sub tray folding paper full sensor PS46 2 Sub tray paper full sensor PS17 8 8 2 Line speed switching Paper conveyed by the intermediate conveyance motor M3 is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub tray FD entrance sensor PS1 Sub tray paper exit sensor PS10 Intermediate 2 conveyance
16. ee nae CR b don wl ae 15 F4 lt 6 z E 7 CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 RU 503 504 OUTLINE lt Lu z a Blank page i Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE iD 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 2 Conveyance unit with paper cooling and decurler functions B Functions 1 Functions Accelerated conveyance To accelerate for the finisher standard line speed mode Decurler conveyance mode Reduces paper curl and conveys at an accelerating rate with posttreatment lin ear velocity 2 Operation capacity 65PPM A4 B5 8 x 11 16K C Papertype Paper size SRA3 B4 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 55 A5 55 B6S A6S 18x19 12x18 11x 17 812 x 14 8 2 x 11 8 2 x 115 5 5 x 8 8 8 x 18 8 4 x 18 8 4 x 131 8 x 18 8K 16K 16KS Tab paper A4 8 x 11 Custom paper Max 330 x 487mm Min 100 x 148 mm Paper type Plain paper high quality paper color paper coated paper tab paper five tab type same as the main body Paper weight Accelerated con 64 to 300g m veyance mode Decurler convey 64 to 209g m ance mode D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main bogy
17. 3 fs503t02019c 1 Eccentric cam 6 Pin for staple cut clinch 2 Inside 7 Outside 3 Pressure arm B Stapling arm 4 Cam groove for pressure arm 9 Cam groove for stapling arm 5 Staple cut clinch arm 29 FS 503 lt LLI a amp S 7 STAPLER SECTIO 30 A Paper pressure When the eccen provided on the 4 and presses t At the same time pin 10 at the tip sure claw 11 with the lever to press the paper The following figure left shows a cam on the outside and the figure right shows a cam on the inside Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 ric cam rotates 90 from the home position the cam groove 1 on the inside drives the pin 3 pressure arm 2 in the arrow marked direction The pressure arm 2 drives the pressure plate he clinch side hard against the staple side 5 to press the paper 6 the pin 8 provided in the groove 7 on the outside of the cam drives the stapling arm 9 The of the stapling arm moves along the groove 12 of the pressure claw 11 and drives the pres fs503to2020c 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cam groove Pressure arm Pin Pressure plate Staple side Paper 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cam groove for stapling arm Pin Stapling arm Pin Pressure claw Groove Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Stapling control 7 STAPLER SECTION When the
18. htm rhe 15 6 2 3 Intermediate roller paper exit arm drive rh eher ee 16 6 24 Alignment drive pietra n repe P e erdt a ess poete e 17 0 9 Operation DUET 18 6 3 1 Stacker conveyance speed Control sexa bue PER saq NG 18 6 3 2 Inmtennediate roller suy aus ys s e each Rx n ERR Rs RR Ron eR 18 53 3 Stack assist cese ua ex rr ERO Rh ww KR ERS RA RR Rad e ees 21 s usr ull bike ca idonee ob RR ecc dee e 21 5 9 5 Ls e l Oia ERGO POR WEE re SOR EAE ree Kade e ine 22 SEE EE ERE REE EEE EEE ace Eg ee cdd bando e Serie 24 p uc ET Ne Dr 25 Al c TET s 25 T2 as d Re RR RR KERI Gd RR ankeret HAL 26 T21 S e movementrotellori usa esee kae Rr RR ohm Rd RR 26 o MM 27 EE ODE PERO Ee pee d A RRA EE cad Rd Roa RE 28 TSN S taplermoverment GOOD Laus see seme d ew o e a Ra DR RU RR CR keke d less reda 28 Tia See CORTO s ee dogs Cet ee eder ae wan 29 8 MAIN TRAY SEGTION eco aie d idu De Pr neige ut e bene d ennt 34 SU AA Gio ead e Sua d 34 Pr mm 35 B2 Tray up down DING BRA GS ara EE EME Hew REE ened RE 35 B22 Main tay paper e
19. 7 o a 15 ag Entrance sensor PS4 Conveyance motor 1000 mm s 2 490 mm s 15502102008 1 Main body paper exit sensor 53 ON 3 2nd sheet of paper 2 1stsheet of paper 4 3rd sheet of paper 73 LS 501 502 lt e LLI 2 a amp 2 5 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 14 5 3 3 Paper cooling mechanism Paper conveyed to the LS is likely to curl up due to fusing heat Heat storage accumulated in paper stacked during continuous printing may cause tacking sheets of paper sticking hard each other by toner when toner that has been fused is re fused and adheres So fresh air is blown on the paper from under the entrance guide plate and above the path guide of the upper surface of the paper stack section thus cooling down the paper to correct curling and prevent tacking 15502102028 1 Paper cooling fan motor Rr 5 4 Paper cooling fan motor 1 FM2 2 Paper cooling fan motor Mi FM3 5 Paper cooling fan motor 2 FM6 3 Paper cooling fan motor Fr FM1 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION A 64 Composition Paper press sole noid 3 SD8 LS 501 502 Decurler roller Paper empty sensor PS6 Paper press arm Grip belt Paper empty Front stopper detection actuator Jo
20. 2 o lt 5 z amp 5 4 3 15ant2c002nb 1 Entrance roller 4 Front side view 2 Entrance conveyance motor M1 5 gt Conveyance roller 8 Overlap assist roller 4 2 2 Horizontal conveyance drive 1 15ant2c003na 1 Front side view 4 Horizontal conveyance motor M2 2 Exit roller 5 Subtray exit roller 3 gt Conveyance roller 74 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTIO 423 Gate drive subtray pressure release drive 4 COMPOSITION OPERATION 15ant2c004na 1 Subtray exit roller 4 Horizontal conveyance gate 2 Roller release solenoid 4 SD4 5 Entrance gate solenoid SD1 3 Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid 503 6 Entrance gate 75 SD 501 lt wi z a 4 HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 76 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Conveyance path switching operation A
21. Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Q Check whether the power cord is damaged Check whether the sheath is damaged If the power plug cord or sheath is damaged replace with a new power cord or cord set with plug and connec tor on each end specified by KMBT Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or elec tric shock Do not bundle or tie the power cord Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Q 5 5 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord NWARNING Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand The risk of electric shock exists When unplugging the power cord grasp the plug not the cable The cable may be broken leading to a risk of fire and electric shock G Wiring NWARNING Never use multi plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet If used the risk of fire exists When an extension cord is required use a specified one Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited so using a too long extension cord may result in fire Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken u
22. LO gt 3 6 a04kt1c003ca 1 Decurler gate 1 Decurler gate 2 2 Intermediate roller 1 B Intermediate roller 2 3 Entrance roller 2 9 Decurler belt 1 4 Entrance roller 1 10 Decurler roller 1 5 Intermediate roller 3 11 Decurler roller 2 6 Paper exit roller RU 503 504 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Decurler conveyance mode straightening the downward curling a04kt1c004ca 1 2 3 4 5 6 Decurler gate 1 Intermediate roller 1 Decurler belt 2 Decurler roller 3 Entrance roller 2 Entrance roller 1 7 8 9 10 11 Intermediate roller 3 Paper exit roller Decurler roller 2 Decurler gate 2 Intermediate roller 2 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION B CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION RU 503 504 4 1 Configuration Decurler roller 2 Decurler gate 1 Decurler roller 1 Peer raste Decuderbelt Decurler gate 2 Decurler belt 2 5 lt o E 7 a o Decurler roller 3 Decurler roller 4 Paper fan 2 8 M2 M3 M4 a04kt2c001ca RU 503 504 lt e LLI a amp x 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 Drive
23. SER ER Raus us E RUP Ra A Su 65 KO Sape vo sse cn dox PA eiui eser qoe xa khi AA 68 TOG ca bebe een ERR LR balas gu beak eds 70 BUNCE Sr SSSI conl israel 76 TB ca kaka tS ien e S deck Ki ote sas biba ba 79 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION n a Dee EAE 83 MES nee E o TITLE 83 s Ba ie u c eer m 84 8 2 1 Bundle press stage AR weed HERES 84 8 2 2 Bundle press movement dile eee hh ha REA RR RR 85 823 BUNCE regialellon EUT a 85 o 8 24 Bundle press eee he en 86 5629 Lc lcm 87 DO ES 88 8 3 1 Bundle press siege up down GODlOl ee Kasa dk 88 5 3 2 Bundle press movement controla ak u aa kr sada era RERO Ea aes 92 5 3 9 B nde press cand naaa ee ee ERG derre Kake eee 95 8 3 4 Bundle registration contol iua es eser rade ask E RAGG Ga dk aad eva NEVER des x Es OH 97 99 B TRIMMER SEC HON Lud d gni das ae sot SE pea kar b tei de d bena 107 PIED 107 UL 108 924 TimMer press DING Loc usa a
24. lt LLI z a amp x 700 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 21 FUSING SECTION 21 FUSING SECTION 21 1 Configuration bizhub PRO C6500 Fusing belt Fusing lamp Up L2 L3 L4 Fusing roller 1 A Fusing paper exit BA roller Up Fusing roller 2 Fusing roller Lw Fusing heater lamp 4 L5 a03ut2c077ca lt oc e 5 wn o a o 101 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI a amp 21 FUSING SECTION 21 2 Drive Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 a03ut2c078ca 102 1 2 3 4 Fusing motor M29 Cam fusing roller Lw for applying pressure Same gear Fusing exit roller Lw 5 6 7 8 Fusing roller 1 Fusing belt Fusing roller 2 Fusing roller Lw Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 21 FUSING SECTION 21 3 Operation 21 3 1 Fusing roller drive control A Fusing process speed table There are three types of fusing process speed 1 1 speed 300mm s 2 3 speed 207mm s 1 2 speed 150mm s The fusing process speed is selected according to the paper weight thickness and whether the glossy mode or not as shown in the table below bizhub PRO C6500 Paper weight Paper type 1 A B G D E Normal Glossy Normal Glossy Normal Glossy Normal Glossy Normal Glossy 64to Highspeed
25. x 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 11 2 2 Second transfer pressure release drive o o D O tc D5 d N a a03ut2c026ca LLI 5 3 1 Second transfer pressure release motor 3 Second transfer roller Lw E M34 amp 2 Pressure arm 4 Transfer belt 5 gt 50 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION 11 3 Operation 11 3 1 First transfer roller pressure release mechanism During first transfer the transfer belt 9 is pressed against and released from the drums Y 8 M 10 C 11 and K 12 The three first transfer rollers Y 18 M 17 and C 14 are included in the color first transfer roller assy 16 and driven simultaneously The color first transfer roller assy drives the first transfer pressure release motor M19 15 the first trans bizhub PRO C6500 fer roller C pressure release cam 7 The first transfer roller K 13 drives the M19 via the first transfer roller K pressure release arm 4 and the first transfer roller K pressure release cam 6 The two cams rotate synchronously The difference in shape between the two cams enables to move the color first transfer roller assy between the three positions according to the print mode In full color mode the both color first transfer roller assy and the first transfer roller K are press
26. 10 1 HI 2 9 gt 8 7 4 15kjt2c005na 1 Center of the punch blade 2 Paper size sensor PS305 3 Side edge reference position 4 Paper 5 Center of the paper 6 Paper transfer direction Note 7 8 9 10 11 Punch unit moving direction Rear side Front side Punch blade Punch unit n the model PK 512 the paper size sensor PS305 is positioned on the front side and its opera tion is contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides 77 PK 512 513 lt 5 7 a PK 512 513 lt LLI a amp o 4 PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 12 4 3 3 Punch control A Registration loop control The FNS conveyance motor M1 turns OFF temporarily to stop conveyance of paper when the specified time has passed since paper exit sensor PS13 detected the leading edge of the paper Thus the paper is pressed against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend When the specified time has passed M1 turns ON to restart conveying the paper The above operation is not performed when conveying a large paper 220 mm and longer in the sub scan direc tion and in the non punching mode When punching the paper conveyed from PI the loop is formed on the Pl s side For details refer to PI 502 SHB
27. 5 7 a a03ut2c054ca 1 Lift gear 5 Drive coupling 2 Pick up roller 6 Paper feed roller 3 Separation roller Paper feed clutch BP MC6 4 Paper feed motor M41 8 Paper lift motor BP M35 75 bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI a z 7 a 16 BYPASS FEED TRAY SECTION 76 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 2006 16 3 Operation 16 3 1 Plate up down control A C 1 Plate up operation The paper lift motor BP M35 drives the lift gear to lift the lift plate Plate down operation The paper lift motor BP M35 drives the lift gear to lower the lift plate Operation timing Plate up operation When the tray is set paper lift motor BP M35 rotates in forward and the lift plate goes up The lift plate elevation makes the top sheet turns on the upper limit sensor BP PS25 This deactivates the M35 to stop the plate When the PS25 are turned off by paper feeding the M35 starts to rotate again to lift the lift plate Then the PS25 is turned on again by the top sheet the and makes the M35 stop to stop lifting the lift plate Plate down operation The paper empty sensor BP 547 turns off when the bypass feed tray runs out of paper This makes the M35 rotate in reverse to lower the lift plate The lift plate goes down when the paper is removed from the tray When the paper supply door of LU is opened the
28. Pick up roller Separation roller Lift plate COMPOSITION OPERATION Tray 3 a03ut2c045ca 65 15 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 15 2 Drive 17 191118 27 1211201 bizhub PRO C6500 23 24 26 22 25 lt e LLI a amp S H 6 2111119 10 8 7 5 a03ut2c046ca 1 Pre registration roller 3 15 Lift wire 2 Pre registration clutch 3 MC12 16 Paper lift motor 1 M38 3 Drive coupling 3 17 Pick up roller 1 4 Paper feed motor M41 18 Paper feed roller 1 5 Separation roller 3 19 Paper feed clutch 1 MC7 6 Paper feed roller 3 20 Pre registration roller 1 if Paper feed clutch 3 MC11 21 Pre registration clutch 1 MC8 8 Pick up roller 22 Paper feed roller 2 9 Separation roller 2 23 Paper feed clutch 2 MC9 10 Paper lift motor 3 40 24 Drive coupling 2 11 Pick up roller 2 25 Pre registration roller 2 12 Paper lift motor 2 M39 26 Pre registration clutch 2 MC10 13 Separation roller 1 27 Drive coupling 1 14 Lift plate 66 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 15 3 Operation 15 3 1 A Plate up operation The lift plate 7 lies
29. lt 5 7 a CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 43 8 9 3 1 Image creation control nnn 43 952 Erase lamp ELI CONTON RR teed ewe RR RUE CR b e SUR d asp 45 9 9 5 8 image stabilization CODO eausa has serune noies bk dd 45 TO CHARGING SECTION ma sss barbe Rak bee wa aqa ERR suqpa kame ead 46 TOA au yuy SES 46 TO os eder Gp Tal dah aged Ea dod dia a ached 47 10 9 1 Charging CORO yu ps bot Daweh ed RO 47 TT INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION ne ees cee ras peewee ee nb nm hee ATEN 48 TA 48 EE EE AA AA 49 11 2 1 Transfer bell conveyarice pressure dive casas senes e ak kn 49 11 2 2 Second transier pressure release eser prs E d aa RO s 50 e 1428 Operation Si reset de 51 11 9 1 First transfer roller pressure release 51 14 92 Firstiranster Contos Oo ERO ES ed ga dede cic k by 52 11 89 Secondtransier MECHANISM uiu ee A E EROR RO e E x 53 z 11 9 4 Seconditranster control mus Ha tunet ve blues tea tto eee nU e onere dedere ya 53 11 3
30. 1 Alignment plate Fr 3 Paper 2 Alignment plate Rr Stacker entrance sensor PS5 Alignment motor Fr M22 Alignment motor 5 1 2103 4 I5 6 15503102034 1 Start signal ON 4 Alignment operation for each sheet of paper 2 Home position search 5 Move the paper to the shift position in the rear 3 Movement to the size position 6 Move the paper to the shift position in the front 23 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 Staple mode In the staple mode the alignment operation is made by the alignment plates Fr and Rr for each sheet of paper that has been sent to the stacker After the last sheet of paper of the copy is conveyed to the stacker section the alignment operation for the staple is made for stapling FS 503 B Vertical alignment In the staple mode for the vertical alignment of paper the paper is pushed against the flat stapling stopper by he paddle that is driven by the paddle motor M2 The vertical alignment is assisted by the swing roller that is interlocked with the paddle by M2 21 Stacker entrance sensor PS5 mm Paddle motor M2 Stapler motors Fr M31 Rr M30 1 3 fs503t02035c 1 Start sinal ON 3 Stapling 2 Stapling of the 1st sheet of paper lt Lu z a 6 3 6 Stacker paper exit A Non staple control
31. 11 A2 DINES ADEM 12 49 eeccio MU 13 4 3 1 Punch registration control available only when PK is 13 5 432 ES trabsfet controlc see RS LAN dala hade EROR Eua Gama ha delt 14 Pr 4 3 8 Gate dive control ions pei ibo eae EORR EORR nn bada wahasqakunaqa 15 AO Bypass ater CODIGO uua pe ses cem raw ER Edad ep x qa ee 16 8 Bro SN CONTO AA ERN RT RUPEE EE EAR Y 18 235 Papereur yy dive eee rt tras a arb de EE Geek ad 20 48 7 Paper xit opening solenoid control ciii eese e mnn e xx RR RERO RR 21 43 8 Paperextopening rk arena d saa EX ERROR svar GARE RARE 22 4389 Sub tey paper edt eese s rk ad n cep ERR Or d ER AR E A RR 24 5 MAIN TRAY SEG TION odit on eRe ERU Gr eaa dE Rex du e nad Shale mach UA 25 Sd srepegan ranne RW E Rd Pe RR aq riae RR red IAEA TE 25 EEE gt eal iu iui eed ex codd KAL aq NE ET 26 DO NN ea E 27 Oot EEG TTD el sae keaton EE 27 6 STACKER SECTION 2 2506 Sats MN awu uM suu ere 29 Eu EE aus hasa sg RE 29 DING masa KAREN BAK KGG 30 09 Operation EEE 31 651 Alignment Up control RR RE ada qa ke 31 529 2 Alignment LW control uu uuu
32. 2 7 SCANNER SECTION 3 When 5 is set DF mode Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 9 12 14 7 8 10 11 a03ut2c022ca Od WBN 28 Home position PS1 Platen APS position White correction First time White correction Second time AE ACS scan for the first page 409 mm s Exposure scan for the first page 270 mm s Timing of the original replacement 9 10 11 12 13 14 AE ACS scan for the second page 409 mm s Exposure scan for the second page 270 mm s Timing of the original replacement AE ACS scan for the last page 409 mm s Exposure scan for the last page 270 mm s Home position search Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 SCANNER SECTION 7 3 2 Original size detection control A Detection method The detection method differs between in the platen mode and in the DF mode 1 DF mode e Refer to DF 609 bizhub PRO C6500 2 Platen mode Main scanning direction CCD sensor e Sub scanning direction Turning on off of the APS sensors 1 PS3 and 2 PS4 Original size CCD sensor PS3 PS4 Length of detection mm ON OFF ON OFF Smallest 102 OFF OFF B5S 182 ON OFF B5 257 OFF OFF B4 257 Ol ON 45 210 Ol OFF A4 297 OFF OFF 297 81 x 115 215 9 Ol OFF 81 x 11 279 4 OFF OFF a 85 14 215 9 O
33. 4 5 gt 1 Oe EN a03wt1c002ca 1 2 3 Separation roller Pre registration roller Paper feed roller 4 Pick up roller 5 Paper lift plate Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION m CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 PAPER FEED SECTION LU 202 HT 503 4 4 Configuration Centering sensor PS1 Separation roller Pick up roller Pre registration roller Paper feed roller S lt E pz o a Paper empty sensor 5108 Paper size detection mechanism Sub scan direction Paper size detection mechanism Main scan direction Remaining paper detection mechanism a03wt2c001ca LU 202 HT 503 lt c LLI a amp x 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 Drive 4 2 1 Paper feed drive 2 a03wt2c002ca 1 Paper feed motor M1 6 Separation roller 2 Paper feed clutch MC101 7 Frontside 3 Pick up roller 8 Torque limitter 4 Paper feed roller 9 Pre registration roller 5 One way mechanism 10 Pre
34. 5 7 a 2 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 Control Z The original from the conveyance section is conveyed to the path of the reverse stacker 1 that is set by paper exit gate and the reverse gate 2 When the reverse sensor PS305 detects the rear end of the original 2 and turns off M303 reduces its speed 9 After the specified time the original stops proceeding 3 with its rear end nipped by the reverse roller rotates in reverse and the original is conveyed to the reverse paper exit path 4 5 After the specified time has elapsed from when the paper exit sensor PS306 has turned ON M303 slows down 5 and the original is ejected in reverse at low speed to the paper exit stacker 6 After the specified time from when PS306 has turned off M303 is turned off 6 DF 609 2 3 4 5 Conveyance motor 302 Forward Reverse sensor PS305 Forward Reverse paper exit motor M303 Reverse lt ec LLI a a S Paper exit sensor PS306 1 05212 020 1 Conveyance to the reverse stacker 4 Reverse paper exit with reverse rotation at high speed 2 Slowing down M303 5 Slowing down to align original 3 Stops with rear end nipped 6 Reverse paper exit completed 28 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 200
35. a03ut1c001ca N Oa 10 11 ain body Dehumidifier fan heater HT 503 Large capacity paper feed tray LU 202 Large capacity paper feed tray PF 601 Dehumidifier fan heater HT 504 Built in type image controller 408 Server type image controller IC 303 Hard disk HD 506 Output tray OT 502 Conveyance cooling unit RU 503 Conveyance cooling unit RU 504 Saddle stitching staple finisher FS 607 Punch kit PK 512 513 Cover inserter PI 502 Saddle stitching unit SD 501 Large capacity stacker LS 501 Punch and folding unit FD 501 staple finisher FS 503 Original cover 506 Auto double sided original feeder DF 609 Key counter bizhub PRO C6500 bizhub PRO C6500 OUTLINE 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Configuration for optional device connection Note Any combination other than those listed below is not available No Paper feeding option Combinations for finishing AC power to be connected to 1 PF 601 RU 504 4 FS 503 External RU 504 2 PF 601 RU 503 4 FD 501 External FD 501 3 PF 601 RU 503 4 SD 501 External SD 501 4 PF 601 RU 503 4 LS 501 External LS 501 5 PF 601 RU 504 FD 501 FS 503 5 6 PF 601 RU 504 LS 501 FS 503 External RU 504 LS 501 7 601 RU 503 LS 501 SD 501 Externa
36. 1 Punch registration motor M13 2 Paper 3 Punch rear claw Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 PUNCH SECTIO 5 2 2 Punch drive f 17 CAN gt x 3 2 lt 6 fd501to2011c E 1 Rotation when punching 3 holes as seen from the front 6 Eccentric cam 2 Rotation when punching 2 holes as seen from the front 7 Front direction 8 3 Punch motor M10 B 3 hole punch edge 4 2 hole punch edge 9 Eccentric cam 5 One way gear 2 hole punch One way gear 3 hole punch 5 3 Operation A Punch control Punching is made by holding down the trailing edge of paper with the punch rear claw that is driven by the punch registration motor M13 while driving the eccentric cam by the punch motor M10 After alignment operations the roller solenoids 1 to 4 are turned ON to let paper be placed in the unfixed con dition The paper however is held by the curvature of the conveyance section And then the punch registration motor M13 rotates a specified number of steps and the punch rear claw holds the trailing edge of paper to move it to the punching position After a specified period o
37. abre cm 6 422 PICKUPIONVE ai a Al Pa a ee dens eat bona aoe o S sr HD tne 7 A O u basia aa iu u kab kakak 8 431 Paperfoeed contol ssssssssaqcasqaaqaqaqaqaqawasqqaq 8 43 2 Paper ermpty detectiornoontro u XX pasas cea Rad rad ER Ra RR ERE RE ERE 14 433 Remaining paper detection control esse naaa aaah ka KA rans n ERG RR kus a s ERS 15 434 Paper size detection CONYO ea agg od ko Rb a A KU RON RR qas 17 4 3 5 Centering detection control enn 18 B UP DOWN SECTION 24 Vx ith pd mcer eR ORARE RA E RR ERS 20 ER ETE S a asd caer dd yy peo oe dioe eR dU uy du maed cape C edd won beam decere 20 s Lea aae bae Pete vea Idas ard galla d to spd a pO p aci ooa ek Gaim sdb Oe aes 21 59 Operaio dor wed NAHE da qc Y ER Raw ema E Ru bie ds SERRE uu 22 531 Plate up down Comal cius ass d BRAKE DRE KUWAN Q 22 6 OTHERS FEE EO Se E ERO Sad S CUN Tee 23 61 Dehumidiier heater control uuu eser E VEG dd E a SR ERA 23 Feks a iu ss recedet bn cond KALA Gi halak ata stede bla 24 Te ee AA 25 AT ss 25 Te Ne re Ve 26 721 Dehumidfe
38. FS 607 lt LLI z a amp S 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 32 63 2 Alignment Lw control In the saddle stitching folding tri folding mode the alignment plate Up and the alignment plate Lw move back and forth to align the paper in the main scan direction The alignment motor Lw M16 performs the alignment operation by rotating in the forward and reverse direc ion to move the alignment plate back and forth 15jmf5c024na 1 Alignment plate home sensor Lw 524 3 Alignment plate Lw 2 Alignment motor Lw M16 A Alignment Lw operation The alignment motor LW M16 rotates to open close the alignment plate the alignment belt The alignment home sensor Lw 524 detects the home position of the alignment plate B Alignment Lw control In the saddle stitching folding tri folding mode transmitting the FNS signal from the main body the alignment motor Lw M16 rotates to close the alignment plate Lw 1 and then it stops the alignment plate at the standby position that is a little wider than the paper width 2 M16 performs the alignment operation by rotating in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate Lw back and forth after a specified period of time since the stacker entrance sensor PS5 detects the railing edge of the paper The alignment operation is performed for every paper 3
39. Machine service life Same as the main body C Machine data Power source 24 5VDC supplied from the main body 200 to 240VAC Maximum power consump DC 6W or less AC 580W or less tion Dimensions Dehumidifier fan heater unit 197 W x 82 D x 293 H mm Power supply unit 121 W x 80 D x 160 H mm Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit Approx 1 5kg 1 unit Power supply unit Approx O 9kg 1 North America model Supplied from the main body Europe model Supplied from external D Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 C Humidity 10 to 8096RH with no condensation Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM RIS ES o fat 2 a03xt1c001ca 1 Paper feed section 3 HT 504 Optional 2 gt Conveyance section PF 601 HT 504 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006
40. RU 503 504 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS E Machine data Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Power source RU 503 24 5V DC supplied from the main body RU 504 AC100 to 240V 5V DC supplied from the main body Maximum power consump or less tion Dimensions Including main body 175 W x 723 D x 1 H mm Weight RU 503 Approx 33 kg RU 504 Approx 35 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM D bd p Conveyance section Power source section RU 504 only a04ktic001ca RU 503 504 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH A Accelerated conveyance mode Normal mode a04kt1c002ca 1 Decurler gate 1 5 Intermediate roller 3 2 Intermediate roller 1 6 Paper exit roller 3 Entrance roller 2 Decurler gate 2 4 Entrance roller 1 B Intermediate roller 2 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH B Decurler conveyance mode straightening the upward curling D
41. Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION SD 501 lt 5 7 a 5 2 Drive 5 2 1 Right angle conveyance drive alignment drive 15ant2c009na 1 Alignment claws Right angle conveyance roller 4 2 Torque limiter B Right angle conveyance roller 3 3 Roller release solenoid 1 505 9 Right angle conveyance roller 2 4 Front side direction 10 Right angle conveyance motor M6 5 Top side view 11 Right angle conveyance roller 1 6 Roller release solenoid 2 SD6 79 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 2 2 Overlap drive Lo D lt e e z LIL rede 8 8 MIL D 51 4 3 15ant2c010nb 1 Overlap stopper 5 Front side view 2 Overlap motor M13 6 Right angle conveyance gate 3 Right side view 7 Right angle conveyance gate solenoid 502 4 Overlap home sensor PS17 A 8 Overlap assist roller 20 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 3 Operation 5 3 1 Paper overlap control A Overlap mechanism When the folding operation is conducted for more than one sheet of paper they are overlapped in the right angl
42. he folding guide 2 to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide 2 to push out the paper in the clear pu ance between the 2nd folding rollers 1 1 and 2 S As a result the paper gets caught in the rollers to be 9 olded Q IL lt LLI z 7 a 5 19501102020 1 2nd folding roller 1 3 2nd folding roller 2 2 Folding guide 4 Direction of paper exit 38 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION B Gate fold assist control In the case of the Gate fold the 2nd folding roller solenoid SD18 turns ON a specified period of time after the 1st folding motor M14 starts folding When SD18 starts up the 2nd roller is pressed firmly This is a measure taken to avoid a multiple fold that is apt to occur at the folding section of paper when the 2nd folding is made FD 501 lt 5 7 a fd501to2021c 39 FD 501 lt ui 2 a o a o 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 A 40 6 3 5 3rd folding control A Conveyance folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 3rd folding roller 1 This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the folding release motor M16 After the
43. 4 Saddle stitching press home sensor PS27 a H 2 3 4 6 15ant2c088na z 1 Alignment operation 4 Clinching operation 2 Saddle stitching hold Up moved down 5 Saddle stitching hold Lw moved down 3 Saddle stitching hold Lw moved up 6 Saddle stitching hold Up moved up 2 Multi center folding mode At the end of the paper alignment operation 1 the saddle stitching press motor M21 rotates to move the sad dle stitching hold Up downward 2 and stack the paper securely Then M21 keeps rotating to move the saddle stitching hold Up upward to its standby position 3 Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Rt M9 Reverse Saddle stitching press motor M21 Saddle stitching press home sensor PS27 2 3 15ant2c089na 1 Alignment operation 3 Saddle stitching hold Up moved up 2 Saddle stitching hold Up moved down 64 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 7 34 Clincher up down control A Mechanism The clincher shelters at the lower position to obtain space between the stapler and the clincher when the paper is conveyed between them D After the alignment operation the saddle stitching hold Up 7 moves down and holds the center folded paper 6 Then the eccentric cam 5 drives the saddle stitching hold Lw 2 and the clincher 3 to push up the saddle stitching hold Up 7 to
44. Alignment motor Up M5 Stacker entrance roller p Alignment home WA sensor Lw PS24 Alignment motor Lw M16 D Alignment plate Lw a04dt2c006ca 29 FS 607 lt ul gt 77 x FS 607 lt Lu z a 6 STACKER SECTION 6 2 Drive Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 12 13 14 15 1 E 21 3 10 4 5 6 9 7 8 15jmt2c001na Od WBN 90 Coupling from 7 Alignment motor Up M5 Stacker entrance motor M13 Stacker entrance roller Flat stapling stopper Fr Flat stapling stopper Rr Alignment motor Lw M16 Saddle stitching stopper Saddle stitching stopper motor M18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Alignment plate Lw Flat stapling stopper release solenoid Fr SD8 Flat stapling stopper release solenoid Rr SD7 Paper assist roller Paper assist solenoid SD51 Paper exit arm Paper assist motor M51 Alignment plate Up Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 6 33 Operation 6 3 1 Alignment Up control In the stapling saddle stitching tri folding mode the alignment motor Up M5 rotates in the forward reverse direction to open c
45. SECTION The tray lower limit sensor PS3 detects the lowest limit of the tray In the intermittent print mode the total num ber is not added up by the software counter and the PS3 is used to restrict the number of sheets of paper 5 le 1550302029 1 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS7 4 Tray lower limit sensor PS3 2 Tray upper limit sensor PS2 5 Main tray 3 Counter reset sensor PS15 41 FS 503 lt 5 7 a 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 FS 503 lt Lu z a Blank page 42 SS Se IKONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FS 607 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has
46. de eu odi ordo dp dod pie a RPM Sr 76 16 9 2 Paper size detection CONTO hh RET aa ke 76 16 05 Paper eed GONITOL ace Eod kd e 7T 16 34 Papetemply detection essa eee u a RR E wr PER HOA E RR REG 78 15 3 5 Remaining paper detection COnIIOl seed RR 78 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION sez raa RR Ex kk hh n RR ER 79 iiu sas sea u Rex PERLEN ET NEA 79 EE ETE 80 Te Ne KGG KW aa 81 17 3 1 Vertical conveyance Control LL aaa a ua s ho RR RR ex ER 81 16 REGISTRATION SECTION 2 5 vce Wine ep doce kasa bera x oce o KS 82 PAA AA 82 EEE AA AA 83 18 3 Gress eee ee KA eRe 84 15 9 7 LOOP TOO ONE oodles ESE KEEP 84 15 5 2 Registration operation ees ces Ras ER REOR ERO Reed E Ri ardor ss no 85 18 3 3 Paper leading edge timing correction 85 18 3 4 Registration speed correction control GG eee 85 JO ADU SECTIO aa dpa e hio ed anra d d Rod dub p CE pp espina bh 86 TOM COU qr rape ird dp aa ul Sa
47. 1 FNS start s 2 Paper transferred to the stacker in low speed 3 Last paper ignal turned ON 4 Saddle stitching stopper moving to the tri fold ing position of the copy 5 Tri folding paper exit operation 6 Standing by for the paper of the subsequent 47 FS 607 lt 7 a FS 607 lt Lu z a amp S 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 42 6 3 5 Stacker paper exit control The paper exit roller motor M7 controlled by the FNS control board FNSCB drives the paper exit belt of the stacker via the coupling gear A Paper exit belt operation The paper exit arm 2 mounted on the paper exit belt 1 exits the paper to the main tray in the stapling mode The paper exit roller motor M7 4 drives the paper exit belt via the coupling pin 3 The paper exit belt home sensor PS9 5 detects the home position of the paper exit arm 15jmt2c013na 1 Paper exit belt 4 Paper exit roller motor M7 2 Paper exit arm 5 Paper exit belt home sensor PS9 3 Coupling pin Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION B Paper exit arm control 1 Stapling mode when the paper length is shorter than B5S in the sub scan direction Completing the stapling operation the paper exit roller motor M7 rotates to drive the paper exit belt in t
48. 1 l r 1 i i a03ut2c016ca 1 Home position 3 Platen APS position 2 Scanner home sensor PS1 B Shading correction After searching the home position the exposure unit performs shading correction The white standard board attached to the rear side of the platen glass is used for the shading correction There are two types of shading correction white correction two times and black correction one time The white correction is performed by reading the white standard board L1 with the exposure lamp turned on The black correction is performed by reading the brightness with the L1 turned off To acquire the white correction data the brightness of each pixel is compared between the first time cor rection and the second time correction and the brighter one is used as a white correction data The shading correction reading operation differs between when the sub power switch SW2 ON and when the start button ON 1 The reading operation when the SW2 ON a03ut2c017ca 1 Home position 5 White correction Second time 2 Scanner home sensor PS1 6 Black correction 3 Platen APS position 7 Returning the amount moved 4 White correction First time Platen cover DF is closed The exposure unit stops at the home position 2 Platen cover or DF is opened The exposure unit stops at the platen APS position Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 SCANNER SECTION 2 The reading operation whe
49. 11 LI AE lt J 4 12 v o o a04kt2c006ca 1 Decurler gate solenoid 1 SD2 ON 11 Decurler Lw 2 Decurler gate solenoid 1 SD2 12 Decurler roller 4 3 Switching paper through path 18 Paper exit sensor PS3 4 Paper through path normal path 14 Decutler roller 2 5 Paper through path toward the decurler 15 Decutler roller 3 Up 16 The paper curled downward 6 The paper curled upward 17 Paper through path toward the decurler 7 Decurler belt 1 Lw 8 roller 2 18 Decurler gate solenoid 2 03 9 Decurler Up 19 Decurler gate solenoid 2 503 ON 10 Decurler belt 2 13 RU 503 504 lt LLI z a amp S 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 74 Decurler Up control When the upward paper curl straightening ON in the service mode and Adjustment Menu Finisher Adjust ment setting a start printing signal is sent form the main body and the decurler gate solenoid 1 SD2 starts operating Then it switches the direction of paper conveyance path toward the decurler Up The paper conveyance path is switched to the normal path when the SD2 is OFF When the SD2 is ON the path is switched toward the decurler Up 502 stop the operation after predetermined time has passed since the paper exit sensor 53 detected the trailing edge of the last paper Decurler Lw control When the downward paper curl
50. 25 OTHER CONTROLS 725 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI z a amp S 25 OTHER CONTROLS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 1 2 1 2 3 726 Power supply fan 42 control Purpose To cool the DC power unit 1 DCPS 1 2 DCPS 2 Low high speed switching timing Rotates at low speed during standby Switches to high speed upon starting of printing Switches to low speed a predetermine time period after printing is finished Writing suction fan 1 M43 2 M44 control Purpose To cool the polygon motor and the writing optical parts ON timing Rotates at high speed during standby and printing The number of revolutions during standby can be set using software DIPSW Developing fan 1 M45 2 M46 3 M64 control Purpose To cool around the developing section ON timing Starts to operate upon starting of the developing motor Y M14 developing motor M M15 developing motor C M16 and developing motor K M17 OFF timing Stops a predetermined time period after printing is finished The predetermined time period differs depending on the ambient humidity 5 minutes 30 seconds at max Main unit fan M47 control Purpose To cool around the drum section ON timing Starts to operate upon starting of the developing motor Y M14 develo
51. COMPOSITION OPERATION Stapler rotation home sensor PS13 Stapler rotation Forward motor M6 Reverse Clincher rotation home sensor PS14 Forward Clincher rotation motor M4 Reverse Stapler motor Rr M9 Clincher motor Rr M10 Main tray paper exit sensor PS6 3 5 15jmt2c017na 1 FNS start signal turned ON 4 Stapling operation 2 Stapler Rr and clincher Rr moving horizon 5 Stapler Rr and clincher Rr moving to the tally home position rotational 3 Stapler Rr and clincher Rr rotating 45 6 Stapler Rr and clincher Rr moving to the home position horizontally 48 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 STAPLER SECTION 7 3 2 Stapler control The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motors Rr M9 and Fr M14 and the clincher motors Rr M10 and Fr M15 FS 607 A Stapling operation In the stapling operation the stapler motors Rr M9 and Fr M14 in the staplers Rr and Fr 6 push out the paper press section 4 to the clinchers 2 by the cam mechanism 5 to hold the paper 1 and punch out the staples 3 Then the clincher motors Rr M10 and Fr M15 in the staplers Rr and Fr bend the staples lt 5 7 a 15jmt2c018na 1 Paper 4 Paper press section 2 Clinc
52. When start printing signal is sent from the main body the ventilation assist fans M6 and 7 start to rotate paper exit sensor PS3 detects the trailing edge of the last paper M6 and 7 are turned off 75 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 RU 503 504 lt Lu z a Blank page 76 M R KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FD 501 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve ment of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the corresponding page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been cha
53. aj Ga NRS 15ant1c003na 1 2 3 4 5 70 Stack to the right angle conveyance section Right angle conveyance Conveyance to the folding section 1st folding 2nd folding 6 7 8 9 10 Paper exit Stack movement of the paper exit Front side view Top side view Right side view Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 C Multi center folding saddle stitching mode 1 From the paper exit from the main body to the center folding 3 PAPER PATH N ESO Ca 0 15ant1c004na 1 2 SI 4 Stack to the right angle conveyance section Right angle conveyance Conveyance to the folding section Center folding 1st folding 5 7 8 Release from the folding roller Front side view Top side view Right side view 77 SD 501 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 72 2 From the center folding to the paper exit Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006
54. amp o 7 STAPLER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 44 7 STAPLER SECTION 7 1 Composition Stapler Rr Stapler rotation motor M6 Stapler movement motor Stapler movement M11 home sensor PS11 Clincher rotation motor M4 Stapler rotation home sen sor PS13 Clincher Rr Clincher rotation home sensor PS14 Clincher Fr a04dt2c007ca Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 2 Drive 7 STAPLER SECTION e e lt ul E 77 e a 15jmt2c014na 1 Stapler movement motor M1 1 7 Stapler Fr 2 Upper side of the timing belt B Stapler movement home sensor PS11 3 Clincher rotation motor M4 9 Stapler Rr 4 Clincher Rr 10 Stapler rotation motor M6 5 Clincher Fr 11 Timing belt 6 Lower side of the timing belt 45 FS 607 lt LLI S z a amp x 7 STAPLER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 46 73 Operation 7 8 1 Stapler movement control The staplers move in the horizontal direction for adjusting their distance The stapler at the rear also rotates The movement is made according to the stapling mode A Horizontal movement operation The stapler movement motor M1 1 1 moves the staplers in the horizontal direction The stapler Rr 8 and
55. d aZ 18kjt2j006nb 1 Main body 3 Loop 2 Entrance roller 4 PK Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Punch control PK 512 The FNS transfer motor M1 is driven by the main body start signal In the punching mode the motor M1 stops temporarily after the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the rear edge of paper At the same time the punch motor M301 S rotates in the direction according to the number of punched holes Number of punched holes of PK 512 is switched between 2 to 4 and 2 to 3 holes depending on the country The motor M301 drives the slide link in the main scanning direction through the eccentric cam As result the projection of the switching cam is pushed in the slide link moving direction and the switching cam is rotated around its axis And then the punching blade 7 lowers to punch a hole The projection of the punch blade is fitted into the groove of the switching cam 4 PUNCH SECTION Moving distance of the slide link 5 is controlled by detecting the eccentric cam actuator 4 with the punch home sensor PS301 1 When the actuator rotates 180 degrees first punching is completed In the second punching M301 is reversed When the actuator reverses 180 degrees punching is completed Forward and reverse rotations are repeated alternately The rotating speed of M301 is controlled by detecting the rotation of the punch encoder plate 6 fixed to the axis of M301 with th
56. fd501t02012c 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 2 Drive 6 2 1 Conveyance drive FD 501 1 2 lt Lu z a 19501102013 1 Coupling 3 Folding gate 2 The pulley operates as an idler due to the 4 Folding gate solenoid SD15 bearing 30 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTIO 6 2 2 Folding drive FD 501 F4 lt 6 z 7 19501102014 1 3rd folding roller 1 mounting board 4 2nd folding guide 2 3rd folding guide 5 1st folding roller 1 mounting board 3 2nd folding roller 1 mounting board 6 1st folding guide 37 FD 501 z lt ui 2 a o a o o 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 32 6 3 Operation 6 3 1 Registration control The paper that has passes through the punch registration sensor PS6 and arrives at the folding conveyance section is pressed against the registration roller to make adjustments for skew A specified period of time after he PS6 turns ON the 1st folding motor M4 resumes the conveyance of paper When no folding operation is made no registration control is made However no folding is made on the paper that
57. lt ui a o a o 7 MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 44 7 3 Operation 7 3 1 Main 1 up down control The up down operation of the main tray is controlled by rotating the tray up down motor M1 1 in the normal or reverse direction A Main tray paper detection A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor PS18 turns ON M11 starts up to bring down the main tray until the main tray upper limit sensor PS20 turns OFF and then bring it up again until PS20 turns ON After the paper is exited PS20 maintains the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray the surface of the main tray when no paper exited and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance to prevent the paper exited from having an uneven edge B Switching the operation of the main tray The main tray is set so that it normally does not operate When letting the main tray operate insert the short connector 2 into the CN90 1 Z Caution Letting the main tray operate with the next option connected may cause damages to the machine Be absolutely sure not to connect the short connector 029 29 9606 2 fd501t02037c Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 SUB TRAY SECTION 8 SUB TRAY SECTION A 8 1 Composition FD 501 Sub tray paper full sensor PS17 19501102024 lt
58. 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Punch registration control available only when PK is installed The FNS conveyance motor M1 turns OFF temporarily to stop conveyance of paper when the specified time has passed since paper exit sensor PS37 detected the leading edge of the paper Thus the paper is pressed against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend When the specified time has passed M1 turns ON to restart conveying the paper The above operation is not performed when conveying a large paper 220 mm and longer in the sub scan direction and in the non punchingmode When punching the paper conveyed from PI the loop is formed on the Pl s side For details refer to PI 502 ser e vice manual 41 JE 1 lt ul 77 e a04dt2c002ca 1 Main body 3 Loop 2 Entrance roller 4 PK option 73 FS 607 lt LLI a a S 4 TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 74 4 3 2 FS transfer control The FS transfer is conducted by the 24V DC motor controlled by the FNS control board FNSCB A Door switch control The FS transfer drive control is started when transmitting the start signal from the main body However en error message is transmitted to the main body PRCB and the control is not started if the door switch MS1 turns OFF B FStransfer control The FNS
59. 55 55 18x19 12x 18 11x 17 82x 14 8 5 x 11 8 2 x 115 5 BLS 8 5 x 13 814 x 13 8 13 8 x 18 8K 16K 16KS Tab paper A4 8 x 11 Custom paper Max 330 x 487mm Min 140 x 182 mm Bypass feed SRA3 B4 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 55 5 55 B6S A6S 18x19 12x 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 14 81 x 11 8 2 x 118 52x 8125 812 x 13 8 x 13 816x 18 4 8x 13 8K 16K 16KS Tab paper A4 8 x 11 Custom paper Max 330 x 487mm Min 140 x 182 mm ADU SRA3 A3 B4 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 55 A5 A5S 13x19 12x 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 14 8 2 x 11 8 x 115 5 x BAS 8 x 13 8 x 18 85 x 131 8 x 18 8K 16K 16KS Custom paper 330 x 487mm Min 140 x 182 mm bizhub PRO C6500 OUTLINE 2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Magnification Fixed magnifi Inch x 1 000 x 2 000 x 1 545 x 1 294 x 1 214 cation X 0 785 x 0 772 x 0 647 x 0 500 Metric x 1 000 x 2 000 x 1 414 x 1 224 x 1 154 X 0 866 x 0 816 x 0 707 x 0 500 Zoom magnifi x 0 25 to x 4 00 at the step of 0 1 cation Warm up time Inch 390 seconds or less Metric 420 seconds or less First copy out time Full color 6 5 seconds or less A4 8 x 11 Monochrome 6 5 seconds or less A4 8 x 11 Black and white 5 0 seconds or less A4 8 x 11 Continuous copy speed Full color 65 copies A4 8 x 11 Monochrome 65 copies
60. 8 9 10 Paper Punch blade at the upper position Front side Punch motor M301 Shaft 75 PK 512 513 lt ul 2 a e a 5 PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION 5 5 1 Composition e ip Punch scraps box full sensor es PS302 Punch scraps box set sensor PS304 EM M NS Front side 15kjt2e009nb lt e LLI a amp S 5 2 Drive The punch scraps box section comprises no moving parts 5 3 Operation 5 3 1 Punch scraps box control A Punch scraps box full detection The punch scraps generated by the punch operation falls in the punch scraps box 8 The punch scraps box full sensor PS302 1 turns ON and transmits the no punch scraps box information to the main body when the punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps B Punch scraps box detection The punch scraps box set sensor PS304 detects whether the punch scraps box is set or not PS304 turns OFF and transmits the no punch scraps box information to the main body if the punch scraps box is not set 16 SS Se IKONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL SD 501 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to ch
61. A4S 8 2 115 Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper color paper coated paper Paper weight 64 to 105 g m D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main bogy e e FS 607 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS E Machine data Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Power source 24 5VDC supplied from the main body Maximum power consump 80W or less tion Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out 790 5 W x 656 D x 990 H mm When the main tray is set in 674 5 W x 656 D x 990 H mm Weight Approx 65 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096 RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION N o D Transfer section u Main tray section Stapler section Folding saddle stitching tri folding section Stacker section a04dt1c001ca FS 607 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 4 Non sort sort group mode 2 a04dt1c002ca 1 Paper path from PI PI 502 installed 4 Main tray 2 Paper
62. ADU section pe p 5 Paper feed section Vertical convey Paper feed section AE Photo conductor section A ance section PAN Toner collection Registration Charging section section section a03ut1c002ca Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER PATH 4 PAPER PATH o iD o o o 3 do N aCe ai 5 2 Straight paper exit Transfer Fusing Paper exit common conveyance Paper feed common Reversed paper Bypass tray ext paper feed Reverse conveyance 79 ge paper feed LI Mg
63. Max 324 x 460 mm 21 1050 2 06500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported Taiwan and China Paper weight 50 to 244 g m Maximum folding sheets Paper weight Sheets 50 to 81 g m 5 sheets 82 to 130 g m 3 sheets 131 to 244 g m 2 sheets Folding precision for 1 sheet w 15ant1c009na 1 Paper size 2 x 1 5 mm 15ant1c008na 1 1 5 mm or less Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 Multi letter folding mode 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Paper size AAS 8 x 115 Paper weight 50 to 91 g m Maximum folding Paper weight Sheets sheets 50 to 81 g m 5 sheets 82 to 91 g m 3 sheets Folding precision Original size 1 2 3 for 1 sheet 45 97 5 4 mm 102 0 4 mm 1 5 mm or less 81 118 91 6 4 mm 96 1 4 mm 15 1 010 D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main body E Machine data Power source AC100 to 240V DC5V DC5V is supplied from the main body Maximum power consump 270 W tion Dimensions When the bundle exit tray is stored 1 170 W x 775 D x 1 020 H mm When the bundle exit tray is pulled out 1 170 W x 1 441 D x 1 020 H mm Weight Approx 263 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096RH with no condensation Note The
64. The fusing roller drive assy which includes the fusing roller Lw moves up down to press release the fusing belt with the roller The up down movements of the fusing roller drive assy are made by the cam which is driven by the fusing motor M29 The home position of the cam is determined by the fusing release home sensor 516 The sensor detects bizhub PRO C6500 the cam position with the actuator attached to the cam shaft one way clutch is provided on the M29 drive transmission path toward the drive gear so that the M29 drive force is transmitted only to the cam when the M29 is rotating in reverse direction z lt ul a S 2 a e amp a03ut2c080ca 1 Release 4 Fusing roller Lw 2 Pressure release driver gear 5 Fusing roller Lw driver gear 3 Cam 6 Pressure 705 21 FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 21 3 3 Fusing temperature control A Fusing temperature detection e The fusing roller 1 is heated by the fusing heater lamp 1 L2 2 L3 3 L4 e The fusing belt is heated by the heated fusing roller 1 The fusing roller Lw is heated by the fusing heater lamp 4 L5 e The surface temperature of the fusing belt is detected by the temperature sensor 1 TEMS 1 3 TEMS 3 The surface temperature of the fusing roller Lw is detected by the temperature sensor 2 TEMS 2 4 TEMS A Each tem
65. Wide 1 B4 A4 45 B5 55 A5 12 18 11 x 17 81 2 x 11 8 2 x 115 51 x 8 5 size entry Max 324 x 460 mm kai 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China 4 C6500 only A4 and 81 2 x11 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper book paper Paper weight Main tray 50 g m to 244 g m D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main body eo N FS 503 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS E Machine data Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Power source 24 5V DC supplied from the main body Maximum power consump 110VA tion Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out 915 x 656 D x 1020 H When the main tray is set in 798 W x 656 D x 1020 H mm When the main tray is removed 544 x 656 D x 1020 H mm Weight Approx 80 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096 RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT COMPOSITION A 2 UNIT COMPOSITION N u fs503to1001c 1
66. a PF 601 HT 504 lt a o a 7 HT 504 OPTIONAL Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 90 7 2 2 power control e When the temperature sensor in the dehumidifier fan heater unit detects an error a relay in the AC board 3 is cut off to prevent abnormal temperature from occurring AC voltage is supplied either from the main body 1 or external 2 Parts whose voltage is supplied from external are equipped with an inlet 4 and a circuit breaker switch 5 in the power supply unit 2 a03xt2e001ca 1 The AC voltage supplied from the main 3 drive board ACDB body 4 2 AC voltage supplied from external 5 Circuit breaker switch SS KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL LU 202 HT 503 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark e To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of
67. lt 5 7 a 8 24 Front back sides skew correction in main scan direction black image written by the write unit K is skewed in the main scan direction when performing duplex printing black images finally printed on front and back sides of paper will be skewed in opposite way Theinclination of the CY2 lens2 of the write unit K should be adjusted in order to correct the skew The adjustment can be made manually using the following menus User s mode chart adjustment Service mode CD skew adjustment 8 2 5 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction When the back side mag adjustment is enabled with the utility the adjustment is carried out by changing the number of revolutions of the polygon motor In order to reduce magnification rate in sub scan direction the number of revolutions of the polygon motor increases lowering the clock rate The magnification reduction rate can be set manually using the following menus User s mode chart adjustment Service mode FD mag adjustment 39 8 WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 2 6 Image stabilization control To achieve stable image quality the following controls are provided Refer to 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL for details See P 110 maximum power control automatic power control Vm adjustment control Color registration control bizhub PRO C6500
68. ul pu z 77 a o 5 LS 501 502 lt c LLI a amp 5 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION 70 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 2 Drive 3 4 8 Is502to2004c 1 2nd gate solenoid 5010 5 Entrance roller 2 Coupling conveyance roller 2 6 1st gate 3 gt Conveyance motor M2 7 Coupling conveyance roller 1 4 1st gate solenoid 501 B 2nd gate Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 3 Operation 5 3 1 Path switching The path along which paper conveyed to the entrance guide plate is conveyed varies according to the operation mode The switching of the conveyance path is made by the 1st gate and the 2nd gate LS 501 502 1st gate The switching of the conveyance path is made between the stacker tray paper exit stacker tray non sort mode and stacker tray sort mode and the sub tray paper exit sub tray mode and the coupling conveyance coupling mode 1 COMPOSITION OPERATION 15502102005
69. 13 Trimmer scraps press plate Pin Trimmer scraps press claws Scraps press home sensor PS48 Shutter One way clutch for pressing the trimmer scraps A 87 SD 501 5 lt o E 7 a o SD 501 lt LLI S z a amp S 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 88 8 33 Operation 8 3 1 Bundle press stage up down control The bundle press stage conducts the up and down operation to convey and exit the paper by the switch back method The bundle press stage is moved up to decrease the angle difference when receiving the paper 8 conveyed by the bundle clip from the slope 1 The bundle press stage exits the paper 5 to the bundle exit tray at the hor izontal position 4 at the paper exit The bundle registration plate 6 and the bundle exit auxiliary roller 8 move up and down together with the up and down operation of the bundle press stage 7 8 gt 6 5 4 15ant2c057na 1 Slope 5 Paper path at the paper exit 2 Front side direction 6 Bundle registration plate 3 Bundle exit auxiliary roller Bundle press stage upper position 4 Bundle press stage horizontal position B Paper path to the bundle press stage The registration claws 8 push in the paper to make sure that the paper is con
70. 3 Paper feed motor M301 6 Pick up roller lt LLI a amp x Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Paper feed control The pick up roller 7 paper feed roller 6 and registration roller 3 are driven by the paper feed motor M301 e M301 drives in both directions forward and reverse When it drives in forward the pick up roller and the paper feed roller rotate to transfer papers while the registration roller does not rotate When M301 drives in reverse only the registration roller rotates to feed papers while the pick up roller goes o fe up to the shelter and one way clutch Keeps the paper feed roller from rotating The separation roller which is not driven by the motor is provided with a torque limiter When a piece of paper is transferred the separation roller moves in synchronization with the paper feed roller On the other hand when two or more papers are fed the separation roller remains stationary and separates the papers The registration clutch MC301 functions as the brake to stop the registration roller not to turn ON or OFF the drive force transmission The registration sensor PS301 4 and the timing sensor PS302 2 detect the timing of the original 6 7 8 Ill Kf T 77 e ICQ KO Ro 3
71. 4 OT 502 o 2 Paper exit decurler roller 5 OT paper exit roller 3 Cam 6 Paper exit roller 94 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 20 3 Operation 20 3 1 Conveyance control A Reverse paper exit switch control The paper exit path for paper conveyed from the fusing section is switched by the paper exit gate The paper exit gate is driven by the paper exit solenoid SD4 Switching the paper exit path with the gate is made according to the print mode and the paper exit type bizhub PRO C6500 B Conveyance path 1 Straight paper exit Paper is exited face up after printed on the one side or printed on the both sides lt 5 7 a u a03ut2c072ca 1 Fusing section 5 OT 502 Option 2 Fusing paper exit sensor PS17 6 Paper exit roller 3 Reverse gate 7 Paper exit sensor PS13 4 Paper exit decurler roller 95 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 ADU conveyance path This paper path is used to exit paper face down after printing the one side for one side printing or double 9 side printing tc 5 ws 22 5 Fo 5 1 9 5 6 1
72. 5 7 a bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI a amp S 14 TONER COLLECTION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 14 3 Operation 14 3 1 Toner collection control Toner collection section is driven by the transfer belt motor M18 and the paper feed motor M41 Collecting toner is performed by the M18 that drives the transfer belt and the paper feed operation driven by the M41 14 3 2 Toner collection box control The presence of toner collection box is detected by on off of the waste toner door sensor PS60 14 3 3 Box full control When the waste toner full sensor PS52 is turned on a warning message is displayed on the touch panel There is a box full counter in the NVRAM board NRB After the PS 52 is turned on the counter starts counting For operation details refer to the table blow PS60 PS52 Box full counter Operation ON OFF Print available ON ON Less than 2500 Warning message is displayed on the touch panel when he PS52 turns on After the PS52 turns on printing is available unless the count exceeds 2500 ON ON 2500 or more Rejects incoming new jobs Job in progress is continued 3000 is counted Print stopped at 3000 counts 64 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 15 PAPER FEED SECTION 15 PAPER FEED SECTION 15 4 Configuration Pre registration roller Paper feed roller
73. A4 8 x 11 Black and white 65 copies min A4 8 x 11 Continuous copy count Up to 9 999 sheets Resolution Scan Main scanning 600 dpi Sub scanning 600 dpi Write Main scanning 600 dpi Sub scanning 600 dpi 1800 dpi 1 Standard memory 256 MB for each color Y M C K Expansion memory 30 GB for each color Y M C K HD 506 No of originals in memory Full color Line1 Line2 Dot1 Dot2 23 sheets 5461 sheets 2 Reference value Priority in high compression 110 sheets 16384 sheets 2 Conditions Original KM 101 color Density Standard Mode Text Photo printed original life size Memory capacity Standard 256 MB Black and Line1 Line2 Dot1 Dot2 126 sheets or more 16384 sheets 2 white mono Priority in high compression 271 sheets or more 16384 chrome sheets 2 Conditions Original FAX test chart 4 A4 Density Standard Mode Text Photo printed original life size Memory capacity Standard 256 MB Interface section RJ45 Ethernet Serial port RS232 C Service port Serial port USB TypeB Connector for printer controller 1 When smoothing is selected at the print setting 2 When HD 506 is installed Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS C Available types of paper and ranges of paper weight o o Type of paper Tray1 2 3 Bypass feed Plain paper O O A4 812 x 11 or large
74. B Bypass gate control The bypass gate is provided on the paper path to the stacker section Even while in the staple operation the bypass gate conveys the next page to reduce a loss of time for a high productivity The drive of the bypass gate 1 is made by the bypass solenoid SD5 2 The operation of SD5 is limited only to the small sized paper A4 B5 and 8 x 11 in the staple mode For the 1st page on and after the 2nd copy paper is sent to the regular route 8 SD5 operates only on the 2nd page to send paper to the bypass route 4 The 1st and 2nd pages are put upon one another to be conveyed to the stacker simultaneously On and after the 3rd page 505 is released and paper is sent on the regular route a sheet of paper at a time lt 5 7 a fs503to2003c 1 Bypass gate 3 Regular route 2 Bypass solenoid SD5 4 Bypass route 1 In the case of the 1st copy The bypass solenoid SD5 does not operate when the paper of the 1st copy is passing through it FS 503 lt Lu z a 4 PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 70 2 In the case of the 2nd and subsequent copies A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the trailing edge of the 1st page of the 2nd copy the bypass solenoid SD5 turns ON to draw the 2nd page of t
75. Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS S PI 502 E OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS e kakuyan ed d cp Red e ora pusi 1 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM atira bese one em a Rhe hm dee ors 3 Si PAPER PATE E EE EF SED HM at a d SE den 4 3 1 Auto sheet feeding online operation u sr eme Rea E RR Ra 4 3 2 Manuel sheet feeding online Operation s asses px Kk RR RR ae ee CR RR 4 COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 PAPER FEED SECTION eks aksess RR FREE HEG ap eked Sagan ade wees edo 5 A1 COMPOSHON truni KK WA 5 BO DIVE PAA Veta dus aa ae 6 she cm 6 422 c rece AP 7 2 8 Operation Salas u butuh 8 5 4 3 1 Tray lift mechanism een 8 EE 9 5 A33 Separation mechanism s kaa KG GAN E 10 Pr 454 Registration ciii Hide ENER RAS 11 435 Papersize detection Control Dek ERE Da ES ke E e 12 8 CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 PI 502 OUTLINE lt Lu z a Blank page i Theory of
76. LESSE E 17 2 9 D z J a03ut2c073ca 8 1 Fusing section 4 gt Reverse paper exit sensor PS19 2 Reverse decurler roller 5 01 502 Option 3 Fusing paper exit sensor 517 6 Reverse gate 96 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Reverse paper exit This paper path is used to exit paper face down after printing on the backside in one side printing or dou ble side printing 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 10 11 12 a03ut2c074ca N N Fusing section Reverse decurler roller Fusing paper exit sensor PS17 Reverse paper exit sensor PS19 Small size roller Reverse roller Lw Decurler sensor PS62 8 9 10 11 12 13 Paper exit pressure sensor PS10 Paper exit decurler roller OT 502 Option Paper exit roller Paper exit sensor PS13 Reverse gate 97 bizhub PRO C6500 z lt ul 2 a e amp bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI a amp S 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 98 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 3 2 Reverse paper exit timing control In face down paper exit paper conveyed from the fusing section to the reverse decurler roller passing under the reverse gate The reverse decurler roller conveys the pap
77. Paper exit from the RU section Paper exit sensor PS3 Intermediate roller 2 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 A Straight mode 7 The entrance conveyance motor M1 and the paper exit motor M5 turn ON when start printing signal is sent from the main body Then M1 rotates at the same rate as the line speed of the main body while M5 rotates at high speed 2 The M5 reduces the speed at the same rate as that of the M1 after the predetermined time has passed since the entrance sensor PS1 detected the edge of the paper 3 The M6 rotates at high speed again after the predetermined time has passed since the PS1 detected the rear end of the paper D Q 2 4 1 2 stop the operation after predetermined time has passed since the paper exit sensor 53 detected the trailing edge of the last paper 1 2 3 Entrance sensor PS1 Entrance Middle conveyance motor lt M1 a 6 2 Paper exit motor M5 7 a T 8 speed i 4 5 a04kt2c004ca 1 Start printing signal ON 4 Decelerating at low speed 2 Paper leading edge detection 5 Accelerating at high speed 3 Paper trailing edge detection 70 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION B Reverse paper exit mode Each control timing is the same as in the straight mode Te LO gt oc me 3 Entran
78. Px Q HO ar ES N o 90 91 2 3 lt pu 7 7 a03wt2c011ca 1 Remaining paper sensor 1 PS102 6 Remaining paper detection gear 2 Remaining paper sensor 2 PS103 7 Rotational direction when the paper lift plate goes up 3 Remaining paper sensor 3 PS104 B Rotational direction when the paper lift plate goes down Remaining paper sensor 4 PS105 9 Actuator Shaft of the paper lift motor M100 75 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 Sensor detection and remaining paper 2 The remaining amount of paper is detected in eight levels according to on off statuses of the four sensors E The number of horizontal lines or an arrow mark appear on the tray mark displayed on the touch panel of I the main unit in order to indicate the remaining amount of paper in the tray o N 3 Remaining paper sensor 1 2 3 4 statuses and remaining amount of paper Number of sheets 809 m PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 Indication on the touch panel 1 to 600 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 ligh 600 to 850 ON OFF OFF OFF 2 lines ligh 850 to 1100 ON ON OFF OFF ligh 1100 to 1400 ON ON ON OFF 4 lines ligh 1400 to 1700 ON ON ON ON 5 lines ligh 1700 to 1950 OFF ON ON ON 6 lines ligh 1950 to 2250 OFF OFF ON ON 7 lines ligh 2250 or
79. The correction setting is enabled in the Utility gt Machine Admin setting gt System settings gt Expert adjustment gt Quality adjustment gt Image Quality stability When the value of simple maximum density correction reaches the value that correspond to a level of gamma correction selected on the operation panel Operation panel setting 2 1 normal 1 2 Simple maximum density correction value 15 10 8 5 3 775 bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI z a amp S 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 23 2 3 Other Image stabilizing controls Th e image stabilizing controls described below is only executed when selecting Stability on the Expert adjust ment Quality adjustment Image Quality stability screen A Toner refresh mode control a03ut2c113ca Toner refresh mode control 1 Purpose Printing low coverage images makes the developer toner become deteriorated due to agitation with little consumption of developer and as the result print quality becomes degraded To prevent this the deteriorated toner in the developer is ejected and replaced with new toner 2 Operation a Manual toner refresh mode Develops the amount of toner that equals the consumption for printing 8 papers A3 size for each color to eject the deteriorated toner b Automatic to
80. Turns on off synchronously with each drum motor 9 3 3 Image stabilization control To achieve stable image quality the following controls are provided Refer to 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL for details See P 110 Drum rotation control Vm adjustment control lt 5 7 a 45 10 CHARGING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 10 CHARGING SECTION 10 1 Configuration Charging wire Charging plate bizhub PRO C6500 Charging corona Y s Charging y corona M Charging 228 7 4 Y corona C Charging corona K a03ut2c031ca lt LLI z a amp 46 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 10 CHARGING SECTION 10 2 Operation 10 2 1 Charging control A Charging wire The high voltage unit 1 HV 1 boosts 24 VDC and apply a negative DC voltage to the charging wire The wire discharges the negative voltage e Charging output range 450 to 1 100 pA bizhub PRO C6500 B Charging grid Tolet the charging wire discharge stably a negative high voltage is applied to the charging grid from the high voltage unit 1 HV 1 Charging grid output range 250 to 1 000V F4 E lt ul 6 z 77 a 6 47 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI 2 a amp x 4
81. a amp o 1 2 a03xt2c011ca 1 START button ON 2 Start feeding 76 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 3 6 Paper empty detection control Paper empty detection on the tray is made according to on off statuses of the upper limit sensors 1 PS1 and 2 PS9 6 and the paper empty sensors 1 PS3 and 2 PS11 1 When the paper lift plate 4 goes up while paper is on the tray the paper pushes up the actuator 2 and then the PS3 and PS11 1 are turned off When the paper lift plate further goes up the pick up roller section 5 is pushed up to turn off the PS1 and 59 6 When there is no paper the actuator is inserted in the hole 3 in the paper lift plate and is not lifted up On the other hand the pick up roller section 5 is lifted up to turn off the PS1 59 6 If PS1 PS9 turn off when the paper lift plate is being lifted the product detects that paper is empty and shows the message on the touch panel e While feeding paper the PS3 and PS11 are switched from OFF to ON while the PS1 and the PS9 is OFF and paper empty is detected PF 601 HT 504 z lt 5 B o amp o 5 a03xt2c012ca 1 Paper empty sensors 1 PS3 and 2 PS11 4 Paper lift plate 2 Actuator of the paper empty sensors 1 5 Pick up roller section PS3 and 2 PS11 6 Upper limit sensors 1 PS1 and 2 PS9
82. duct the paper exit operation to the saddle stitching section At the time the folding alignment stoppers Rt moving to the right 4 are contacted with the alignment stopper 5 and stopped by the torque limiter 7 The home position of the folding exit claws in the alignment operation is detected by the folding sub scan align ment home sensor PS56 12 The initial position and the center folding exit operation are detected by the fold SD 501 ing exit home sensor PS24 6 lt 5 7 a 9 8 7 15ant2c026na 1 Alignment stopper B Folding sub scan alignment exit motor M8 2 Direction at the alignment operation to the left 9 8 rotated in the reverse direction 3 Folding alignment stoppers Rt 10 Folding sensor 2 PS44 4 Direction at the center folding exit operation to the right 11 Direction at the center folding exit operation 5 Home position stopper 12 Folding sub scan alignment home sensor PS56 6 Folding exit home sensor PS24 13 Folding exit claws 7 Torque limiter 14 Direction at the alignment operation to the right 45 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Folding sub scan alignment control The folding sub scan alignment exit motor M8 rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the alignment opera tion in the sub scan direction 2 after a specified period of time since the
83. lt LLI S z a amp S 15503102027 1 Deformed cam 5 Position at 27 6 Position at 44 3 Paper exit opening home sensor PS12 7 Position at 55 4 Position at 0 2 Paper exit opening unit A Non staple control When the paper length is less than 239 mm paper exit unit is not opened When the paper length is 289 mm or longer paper exit unit is opened by 27 Turn ON the start signal while in the M8 open the paper exit unit to about 27 Close the paper exit unit after the alignment 38 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION B Staple control When the paper length is less than 219 mm paper exit unit is not opened When the paper length is 219 mm or longer and less than 400 mm paper exit unit is opened by 55 When the paper length is 400 mm or longer paper exit unit is opened by 44 Open angle is narrow for 400 mm or longer due to the differences of the number of stapled pages FS 503 of stapled pages Less than 400 mm 100 pages 400 mm or longer 50 pages C Sub set staple control Sub set staple control avoids exited papers misalignment when sub set staple is used Paper holding arm is driven by paper exit solenoid SD9 When stapled sheets of paper are exited paper holding arm presses previously exited sheets since they are misaligned by staples When exiting sheets without staple paper holding arm does not operate As
84. 182 x 148mm BA 4 45 B5 BSS A5 12x 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 11 8 2 x 115 5 2 x 8 2 Size entry Max 324 x 460 mm Custom paper Wide paper 4 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China 4 A4 8 2 x 11 only for C6500 AN Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper trace paper coated paper Paper weight 50 to 300 g m Maximum tray capacity 500 sheets 80 g m x 2 trays D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main body E Machine data Power source for metric area 230 VAC DCS 5V 5V DCS is supplied from the main body AC100 240V DC5V DC5V is supplied from the main body Power source for inch area 200 VAC DCS 5V 5V DCS is supplied from the main body Maximum power consump 180 VA or less ion N Dimensions 400 W x 723 D x 1231 H mm The main tray is not included in the width Weight Approx 130 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096 RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice 4 A Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT COMPOSITION 2 UNIT COMPOSITION
85. 3 Hole 77 lt Lu z a amp S 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 18 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 9 7 Remaining paper detection control Remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR 1 VR2 and 2 VR4 that are interlocked with the up down operation of the paper lift plate via the pulley and the gear The following 8 levels are detected according to the resistance value and the detected information is sent to the main body a03xt2c013ca 1 Remaining paper VR 1 VR2 VR 2 VR4 4 3 8 Tray lock control Each of the tray is locked by the tray locked lever When the tray lock release sensors 1 PS4 and 2 PS12 of the either trays 4 or 5 are turned off the tray lock solenoids 1 SD4 and 2 SD8 of the corresponding tray are turned on This causes the tray lock lever to go up and the tray is unlocked In order to avoid pulling multiple trays out at a time the SD4 and 08 solenoids other than those which has already been turned on do not become on even when an off status of another lock release sensor is detected while PS4 or PS12 sensor is off When a jammed paper is lying over the tray and the exit conveyance section the tray remains locked until the jammed paper is removed This prevents the paper from being torn off Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 4 Configuration
86. 31 to 50 60 mm or less 65 mm or less Not defined is not used The above information is applied when paper weight is 64 g m and no thick cover Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 3 Trimming mode A Paper size SRA3 B4 5 45 45 B5S 12 x18 11 x 17 8 5 x 14 81 2 x 115 3 81 2 x 13 81 4 x 13 8 s x 131 41 8 x 13 z 8K 8 16 83 Custom paper 11050 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140 mm C6500 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 247 mm Wide paper A3 B4 45 55 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 115 Size entry Max 324 x 460 mm amp 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China Paper weight 50 to 244 g m Maximum trimming sheets 50 sheets 80 g m or 49 sheets 80 g m 1 sheet 200 g m The above is the number of the printed paper before folding The number of fore edge after folding is double SD 501 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 Multi center folding mode N Paper size SRA3 B4 SRA4S 45 B5S 12x18 11 x 17 8 2 14 81 2 x 118 81 2 x 13 8 x 13 8 s x 18 4 8 x 13 8K 3 16 5 3 Custom paper 11050 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140 mm C6500 Max 324 x 460 mm Mln 182 x 247 mm Wide paper 45 55 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 115 Size entry
87. 4 2 1 Conveyance drive D 4 21 4 1 8 a04ki2c002ca 1 Decurler gate solenoid 1 SD2 9 Entrance conveyance motor M1 2 Decurer gate 1 10 Paper exit roller 3 Gear 11 ntermediate roller 3 4 Paper exit motor M5 12 Intermediate roller 2 5 Decurer roller 2 13 Intermediate roller 1 6 Entrance roller 2 14 Decurler roller 1 7 Belt 15 Decurler gate solenoid 2 503 8 Entrance roller 1 16 Decurler gate 2 Theory of 4 3 4 3 1 Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Operation Conveyance control The entrance conveyance motor M1 controls the rotation of the entrance rollers 1 6 and 2 5 The paper exit motor M5 controls the rotation of the intermediate rollers 1 2 2 12 3 1 and the paper exit roller 9 The paper ejected from the main body is conveyed to the RU section by the entrance roller 1 8 Then the ntermediate roller conveys the paper 4 and then paper exit roller exits it 10 The intermediate sensor PS2 3 detects paper jam 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION RU 503 504 lt 5 7 a a04kt2c003ca 1 2 3 4 5 6 Intermediate roller 3 Intermediate roller 1 Intermediate sensor PS2 Conveyance by the intermediate roller Entrance roller 2 Entrance roller 1 7 9 10 11 12 Entrance sensor PS1 Conveyance to the RU section Paper exit roller
88. 6 turns OFF and ON respectively M18 keeps rotating in the same direction 13 and then the crank 4 stops when it reaches at the standby posi tion 2 1 PS20 turns OFF where is 180 opposite from the standby position 1 In the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set M18 rotates in the reverse direction 14 and the crank 4 also rotates 180 in the reverse direction to conduct the 1st folding operation The 2nd folding operation is operated as in the 1st folding operation SD 501 2 lt 5 7 a _ TA 6 4 3 pi 15ant2c025na 1 Standby position 2 8 tst folding blade 2 Projecting position 9 Paper 3 1stfolding blade home sensor 2 PS21 10 Folding roller 1 4 Crank 11 Folding roller 2 5 Standby position 1 12 Paper inserted 6 1stfolding blade home sensor 1 PS20 13 Rotational direction to the standby position 2 7 Actuator 14 1st folding for the subsequent set 41 SD 501 lt Lu z a 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 42 2 Control When the folding main scan alignment motor Fr 7 stops rotating at the completion of the paper alignment operation the 1st folding blade motor M18 turns ON and starts rotating in the reverse direction The 1st folding blade f
89. 7 Rotation toward the separation 3 Driven rotation B Paper feed direction 4 Separation roller 9 Spring force 5 Spring 10 Paper feed roller 16 3 4 Paper empty detection control paper status of the tray is detected by the paper empty sensor BP PS47 16 3 5 Remaining paper detection control When the paper empty sensor BP PS47 turns off a message saying that the bypass feed tray is empty appears on the touch panel 78 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 17 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION 17 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION 17 4 Configuration Intermediate conveyance roller 1 bizhub PRO C6500 Intermediate conveyance roller 1 e Vertical conveyance sensor PS50 door sensor PS51 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance door a03ut2c056ca 5 lt co E e z wn o A o 79 17 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 17 2 Drive o o D O tc D5 d N a 1 lt LLI e 6 a03ut2c057ca 1 Intermediate conveyance clutch 1 MC13 3 Drive coupling 2 Paper feed motor M41 4 Intermediate conveyance roller 1 80 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 17 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION 17 3 Operation 17 3 1 Vertical conveyance control Paper that
90. 8 2 7 Image processing For the image processing the following items are provided Refer to 24 IMAGE PROCESSING for details See P 117 Rotation Expansion 2dotPWM PWM Frequency conversion lt e LLI z a amp 40 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 9 PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION 9 PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION 94 Configuration bizhub PRO C6500 Transfer belt unit Drum Lubricant applying roller 5 lt oc o E 7 o a lamp Lubrication Cleaning blade Toner collection screw a03ut2c028ca 47 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI a amp x 9 PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION 42 9 2 Drive Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 HL 0000 a03ut2c026ca 1 Drum motor Y 14 M M15 M16 and K M17 2 Drum Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 9 PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION 9 3 Operation 9 3 1 Image creation control he image creation process starts when the drum motor K M17 turns on 1 though transferring each olor toner image to the transfer belt is made in the order of yellow magenta cyan and black fter M17 turns on the other drum motors are turned on in the order of motor Y M14 2 M M15 3 nd C M16 4 The erase lamp charging
91. Front side scanning 6 Back side scanning 2 Conveyance to the reverse paper exit sec 7 Paper exit tion B gt Conveyance of the following originals from 3 A pause to reverse the paper feed section 4 Reverse 9 Continued action paper feeding and exiting b Pushing at low speed Reverse conveyance operation of M302 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 6 4 Configuration o o fe 7 6 a052t2c013ca lt amp 1 Paper exit sensor PS306 5 Reverse gate 2 Paper exit gate 6 7 Reverse stacker 3 Reverse sensor PS305 Paper exit stacker Z 4 Reverse roller B Paper exit roller E x 21 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 2 Drive 5 DF 609 4 3 2 a05212c014ca 1 Paper exit gate 5 Reverse paper exit motor M303 2 Reverse solenoid SD302 6 Paper exit roller with one way clutch 3 Reverse gate Paper exit solenoid SD301 4 Reverse roller lt e LLI z a amp o 22 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 6 33 Operation The reverse roller and the paper exit roller are driven by the reverse paper exit motor M303 One way clutch rotates the paper exit roller only in th
92. Home position stoppers Rt Folding sub scan alignment home sensor PS56 3 Folding exit home sensor PS24 B Folding exit claws 4 Torque limiter 9 Alignment stoppers Lt 5 Folding sub scan alignment motor 8 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION 6 2 6 Guide shaft drive 4 5 Lo D m Ree ee MO lt 1 i ir 3 2 1 15ant2c021na 1 Guide shaft home sensor PS46 3 Front side view 77 2 Guide shaft motor M25 4 Guide shaft 35 SD 501 lt e LLI 2 a amp S 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 36 6 33 Operation 6 3 1 Folding entrance conveyance control A Mechanism The folding entrance motor M8 and the roller release solenoid 3 SD7 5 conduct the folding entrance con veyance operation The paper 1 conveyed from the right angle conveyance section is conveyed to the folding entrance with the pressure of the folding entrance roller 1 7 released Once the right angle conveyance is c
93. In the non staple mode the paper exit is made by the nip of the intermediate rollers Up and Lw B Staple control n the staple mode the paper exit is made by the paper exit arm that is driven by the paper exit arm motor M23 The home position of the paper exit arm is detected by the paper exit arm home sensor PS9 2 Stapler motors Fr M31 Rr M30 Paper exit arm motor 23 Paper exit arm home sensor PS9 1 Bl 4 15503102036 1 Start signal ON 3 gt Movement to the paper exit arm standby 2 Stapling position 4 Paper exit operation of paper bundle 24 7 STAPLER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 STAPLER SECTION 505 53 Composition Stapler Rr Stapler Fr fs503to2016c Staple scraps box A 74 25 7 STAPLER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 2 Drive 7 2 1 Stapler movement rotation Lo O 7 lt e 6 7 amp 4 fs503to2017c 2 1 Cam 5 Stapler Fr 2 Stapler rotation home sensor PS14 6 Stapler movement motor M11 3 Stapler rotation motor M4 7 Stapler movement home sensor PS1 1 4 Stapler Rr 8 Belt 26 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 STAPLER SECTION 7 2 2 Stapler FS 503
94. Ka Se 4 Sd eg Lu sequ 4 8 2 Double Sided moder svara dda ett olend Kane bem aaah 5 CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 PAPER FEED SEGTION s rt sm ae xe pare Se eA E 7 poesia d ddr ed 7 BO ris e iac rd 8 OO oo crecer 9 43 1 va awa a hates abes Pata Su a tatc 9 43 2 Original size delegti fi s llu l ar suphu usu ee Rae 12 ASS No paper mand deeded ean CoP ERR ERE ka ORE ken 13 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION amang Ba yana tog bist eq i da RR u ee an ufui deba Goth 14 5 COMGUISHON reg Co Pena ae Gade bed 14 Z ST De TT 15 WE 16 8 531 Scanning and conveyance Control a he head AG 16 6 RBEVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION pababa pna ARKA 21 colL 21 22 ONES EEE EE ORAS SE 23 Bd eee ead owe PEO NR I E P SAE do a UR RR 24 652 Reverse paper ext contol uus y yayay ee ceed ced EORR ER RR 29 CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 DF 609 OUTLINE lt Lu
95. Paper conveyance section 4 Main tray section 2 Stapler section 5 Sub tray section 3 Stacker section FS 503 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 fs503to1002c 1 Sub tray paper path 2 Main tray paper path straight sort staple 3 Main tray paper path only while in stapling Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION m COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION FS 503 A 4 4 Composition lt 5 7 a Tray gate Bypass gate fs503to2001c 4 PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 2 Drive 1 FS 503 lt Lu z a 3 fs503t02002c 1 Conveyance motor M1 3 Bypass solenoid 505 2 Gate solenoid SD2 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Conveyance path switching A Tray gate control The tray gate switches the paper conveyance path between the main tray and the sub tray The tray gate is normally set to the conveyance path to the main tray When paper is exited to the sub tray how ever the gate is switched to the path to the sub tray through the drive of the solenoid SD2 FS 503
96. Punch conveyance sensor PS5 2 case of the folding regardless of the 4 case of the S size paper with a punch presence of a punch only 21 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 D L size gate When folding the paper the conveyance path is switched back and forth for each paper conveyance to prevent he succeeding paper from coming into contact with the trailing edge of the L size paper that is in folding pro cess The drive of the gate is made by the L size gate solenoid SD4 L size paper The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or more N FD 501 z lt LLI S z a amp S fd501to2008c 1 L size gate SD4 OFF position 2 Punch registration sensor PS6 22 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION For the control of the L size gate SD4 stands by at the OFF position outer path for the 1st sheet of paper to pass through The 1st sheet of paper turns ON SD4 a specified period of time after the punch registration sensor PS6 turns ON and makes the switch to the inner path When the 2nd sheet of paper turns ON PS6 SD4 turns OFF after a specified period of time to make the switch o the outer path The above operations are repeated for each sheet of paper L size gate solenoid SD4 Paper passes Outer pat
97. Up M5 and Lw M16 n Folding paper exit sensor PS25 i NE 2 4 5 15jmi2c011na 1 start signal turned ON 4 Last paper of the copy aligned 2 Paper transferred to the stacker in low speed 5 Folding paper exit operation 3 Last paper of the copy 6 Standing by for the paper of the subsequent Copy Theory of Operation Ver 1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 4 Tri folding mode Transmitting the F high speed S signal from the main body 1 the stacker entrance motor M13 turns ON and rotates in M13 rotates in low speed 2 to transfer the paper in low speed when the stacker entrance sensor PS5 detects the trailing edge of he paper M13 rotates in high speed and stands by for the subsequent paper after a speci fied period of time since it rotates in low speed M13 stops after completing the alignment operation of the last paper of the copy 8 and the movement of the saddle stitching sto M13 turns ON and pper to the tri folding position 4 rotates in high speed to stand by for the subsequent paper when the folding paper exit sen sor PS25 detects he trailing edge of the paper bundle 5 3 6 Stacker entrance sensor PS5 E Y Stacker entrance High speed motor M13 Low speed 1 Saddle stitching stop DOWN i T per motor M18 Folding paper exit sensor PS25 1 I2 4 5 15jmt2c012na
98. decelerated a specified period of time after the stacker entrance sensor PS5 turns ON and before it runs through the stacker entrance roller 6 3 2 Intermediate roller control The roller drive of the intermediate roller Lw is transmitted from the main tray paper exit motor M7 by the belt and the coupling and the transmission of the conveyance power to paper is made by the pressure release of the intermediate roller Up A Non staple mode control While in the non staple mode when the start signal is turned ON the intermediate roller Up 1 is driven up to the nip standby position by the cam 2 of the intermediate roller open close motor M25 The home position of the intermediate roller Up open close operation is detected by the intermediate roller home sensor 533 3 fs503to2039c 1 Intermediate roller Up 3 Intermediate roller home sensor PS33 2 Cam of the intermediate roller open close motor M25 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION While in the print operation the pressure release of the intermediate roller Up 1 onto the intermediate roller Lw 2 is made by the intermediate roller release solenoid 507 3 When paper is being conveyed to the stacker 507 turns ON to release the nip and paper that passes through the opening between the intermediate roller Up 1 and the intermediate roller Lw 2 is conveyed to the stacker When paper is being exited 507 turns OFF
99. kaa 25 5 1 9 25 ED aqu EE 26 5 293 Meat registration ONG Leave dk NDN ERA PANG 26 5 2 REC CCELI 27 5 0 M NSTRE d bb ARR E pa ida se Ead ST AYALA 27 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION usasqa sasha RA YR YR RU RR RA RR RR ACER aswaa 29 Dd Composto uy ya ee sand Kv waa RR RE dia 29 po ANG cin qw ERAS RUNE EXE EU Gs E ERE ee 30 524 Conveyance OIN lt 4 e ri Rad RA 30 622 FODNGANVE is iis eese beber eee ep Pede des grece fen aides 31 DO NNN rd ket 32 EE EEE EEE 32 632 Oonveyance pat SWHCHING secs e x yn e wb we nee RR REG e laku bis 33 Bes conl s eo ll u u itali sss atte b br 35 523 4 2nd DIPA redde duka d eR Rd eR 37 EE eee us Sas oe gos eek eei RES 40 To MAIN TRAY SECTION Z uu er k t oe wales paqu s dor du eR E Red 42 T COMPOSWON cu 42 TE remm 43 LO LION DP Tree 44 Tel Man Wey up down FOM Las sae kawasaki be Ok asa kc RA h 44 B SUB TRAY SEG UON adi qas d per ERR qd ev e Qe RE URN Rao Lar P du e 45 ERA RR d RE RA Ra Rd edd s 45 SEE dot Rex PARAK EE EE 46 8 9 ETT 47 83 1 Sub tray full
100. lt LLI a amp S a03xt2c002ca 1 Lift wire Fr2 and Rr2 3 Paper lift plate 2 Lift wire Fr1 and Rr1 4 Paper lift motor 1 M2 and 2 M3 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 2 Paper feed drive 4 PAPER FEED SECTION a03xt2c003ca 1 2 SI 4 5 6 Paper feed roller Pick up roller Separation roller Torque limiter Paper feed clutch 1 MC1 Coupling transmission of driving force to he tray 4 7 8 9 10 11 Separation clutch 1 MC2 Paper feed clutch 2 MC4 Coupling transmission of driving force to the tray 5 Separation clutch 2 MC5 Paper feed motor M1 PF 601 HT 504 5 lt X o E 7 a o 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 3 Pick up drive a03xt2c004ca 1 Pick up solenoid 1 501 and 2 505 2 Pick up roller COMPOSITION OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 43 Operation 4 3 1 Plate up down control A Plate up mechanism The paper lift motors 1 M2 and 2 M3 drive the pulley to wind up the lift wires in order to lift the paper lift plate PF 601 HT 504 B Plate down mechanism The paper lift plate 1 goes down by the down button 2 Loading papers on the paper lift plate
101. the SD9 remains OFF When exiting the 1st sheet of paper into the sub tray switch the SD9 a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper 509 is energized in accord with the paper exit direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the intermediate conveyance sensor PS13 19501102006 1 Sub tray gate 3 Sub tray paper exit 2 Main tray paper exit Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION C Ssize gate Switching is made according to the paper size and the presence of folding The drive of the gate is made by S Size gate solenoid 503 In the punch mode with no folding and in the case of the S size paper SD3 remains OFF When conducting the folding operation or when feeding the 1st sheet of large size paper switch SD3 a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper switch the SD9 in accord with the paper exit direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the punch conveyance sensor PS5 S size paper The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or less FD 501 lt E VN lt ul 2 a e a 1 2 19501102007 1 S size gate 3
102. 18 3 2 Registration operation After the specified time passed from when the print start signal is received 1 the loop motor M31 starts to turn to rotate the loop roller The paper conveyed from the intermediate conveyance section or the ADU is conveyed to the registration roller by the loop roller When the registration sensor PS22 detects the paper front end M31 turns OFF after the specified time passed At this point because the registration motor M30 is stopping the paper is pressed against the registration roller and forms small loop 2 before the M31 stops Making paper from a small loop enables to correct skew of the paper The V TOP signal is generated when the transfer belt becomes ready for the first transfer After the specified time passed from when the V TOP signal is received the M30 and M31 stop and carry out registration bizhub PRO C6500 Paper feed motor M41 Registration motor M30 Loop motor M31 Intermediate conveyance sensor 2 PS28 Registration sensor PS22 V TOP lt 5 7 a a03ut2c093ca 1 Print start signal is received 3 Second sheet registration loop 2 First sheet registration loop 18 3 3 Paper leading edge timing correction control The time period from when the registration motor M30 starts to rotate until the leading edge sensor PS63 detect
103. 2 Moving to the alignment position for the 5 Moving to the alignment position for the paper size subsequent copy 3 Last paper of the copy aligned 4 Flat stapling mode The saddle stitching stopper motor M18 does not operate in the flat stapling mode Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 6 3 4 Stacker entrance transfer control The stacker entrance motor M13 drives the stacker entrance roller swing belt to transfer the paper to the stacker align the trailing edge of the paper and adjust the staple wait timing FS 607 A Stacker entrance operation The downsizing of the device is achieved by adopting the stack method whose incline angle is approximately 70 The corrugation roller is adopted for the stacker entrance roller 5 to assist the paper exit to the stacker After the paper falls to the stacker the swing belt 6 align the paper with its trailing edge To assist in aligning the curled paper with the trailing edge according to the number of sheets stacked and the paper size the paper assist solenoid SD51 1 pressurizes the paper while the paper assist motor M51 8 drives the paper assist roller 2 lt 5 7 a 15jmt2c008na 1 Paper assist solenoid SD51 5 Stacker entrance roller 2 Paper assist roller 6 Swing belt 3 Paper assist motor M51 7 Stacker empty sensor PS20 4 Stacker entrance sens
104. 2 x 81 2 Size entry Max 324 x 460 mm 500 sheets 5 A5S 65 2 51 2 x 81 21 51 2 B S 2 Tab paper BA A4 45 B5 B58 11 x 17 82 x 11 872 x 115 custom paper Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140mm Custom paper 1050 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140mm m 23 4 C6500 Max 330 x 483 mm Min 128 x 148mm 1050 only 2 C6500 only C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China C6500 only A4 and 8 2 x11 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured Sub tray ji weighing 50 to 300 g m SRA3 B4 SRA4 SRA4S 4 45 B5 B5S A5 55 BOS A6S 13 x 19 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 x 14 8 2 x 11 81 2 x 118 57 x 8 51 2 x 81 5 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 18 8K 16K 16KS 2 Tab paper 3 A4 81 2 x 11 custom paper Custom paper Max 380 x 487 mm Min 100 x 148mm 1 C6500 only 2 C6500 supported in all the destinations 23 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured 8 Processing capacity 105PPM Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS C Type of paper 1 Punching function Paper size 2 holes SRA4S Z A4 45 B5 BSS A5 55 2 12x18 11x17 87 14 87 x 11 8 2 x 118 54 x 81 2 8 x 13 87 x 13 81 s x 1314 8 x 13 8K3 16K 9 16KS 9 Tab paper
105. 240V DC5V is supplied from the main body LS 502 24V DC supplied from the main body Maximum power consump 143W or less tion Dimensions 785 W x 723 D x 1 020 H mm Weight Approx 110 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096RH Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice LS 501 502 OUTLINE 2 UNIT COMPOSITION 2 UNIT COMPOSITION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 9 10 nn 5 Is502to1001c 1 2 3 4 5 Shift unit 1st gate Entrance conveyance section Stacker tray Hand cart 6 7 8 9 10 Stacker tray conveyance section Coupling conveyance section Sub tray Sub tray conveyance section 2nd gate Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH 3
106. 3rd folding conveyance sensor PS54 turns ON the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps While the paper is being conveyed the 3rd folding roller gears 1 1 and 2 4 rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear 2 After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps M16 rotates until it gets to a specified number of steps This rotates the eccentric cam 5 to allow the idle gear arm 3 to separate the idle gear 2 from the 3rd olding roller gears 1 1 and 2 4 At the same time when M16 starts up the cam provided on the inside of the 3rd roller gear 2 4 rotates to allow the 3rd roller 1 1 and 3rd roller 2 to contact each other closely to rotate the 3rd roller 1 The plases of the 3rd folding roller gears 1 1 and the 3rd folding roller gears 2 3 are not aligned in the depth direction Therefore they do not engage with each other the idle gear 2 has been sep arated il 2 M 6 19501102022 1 3rd folding roller gear 1 4 3rd folding roller gear 2 2 Idle gear 5 Eccentric cam 3 dle gear arm 6 Seen from the FD side Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION And in parallel with this when the 3rd folding release motor M16 starts up the winding up of the wire that pulls he folding guide 2 t
107. 5 Image correction unit shutter mechanism kisses ese e I eR eens 54 11 8 6 Control of flip prevention for the belt cleaning blade 54 s 11 87 Control against belt NIN a ka Rr a RE RR REG RR RR EA 54 11 3 8 Image stabilization CONG a 54 12 DEVELOPING SEGON s s maasahang rare AA AG ddd g Pod 55 MT asian PA nd Pe Tu eed hod db OD 55 pg PEE 56 19 3 NN eee qui eae a AA 57 19 9 1 Developer CONVEYANCE yuyuyuqta aaa rd odores sam ONE RR be bee ER 57 1232 Developing bias rr aa Sewn ee Gp eH ewe RE a EY 57 12 3 3 Developing suction ses erp he mensa 58 12 9 4 Image stabilization OM TO l sak EG ERE Rd race E REG de 58 18 TONER SUPPLY SECTION sara ema does e Ed E Ra RR dea dass Ee eae RS 59 TN d tree addin WI ek lt xr oto food V ries do acera a V ES 59 D 1r TP 60 D cre caa ae has oe ba NaC 61 19 9 1 Toner conveyance GOMA haa keh ae EROR Rn cd ACER 61 13 3 2 Remaining toner detection control em eram sasa Rege odor ka ku 61 19 9 8 Stop control for print operation with no toner sisse sese mm me enn 61 14
108. 6 13 Process speed The printer has three process speed settings to accommodate with various types of paper One of the three set ings is used according to the paper thickness weight and whether the paper is coated or not bizhub PRO C6500 lt 721 Lu z a 22 Paper weight Plain paper Glossy photo paper 64 to 135 g m 300 m s 1 1 speed 106 to 135 g m 207 7 m s 2 3 speed 136 to 209 g m 207 7 m s 2 3 speed 150 m s 1 2 speed 210 to 300 g m 150 m s 1 2 speed Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 SCANNER SECTION 7 SCANNER SECTION d 7 1 Configuration a E a gt N a Exposure unit CCD board Shading correc tion plate xv CCD unit 1 NE ae Mirror unit g a03ut2c014ca 7 2 Drive COMPOSITION OPERATION a03ut2c015ca 1 Exposure unit 4 Scanner wire Rr 2 Scanner wire Fr 5 Scanner motor M1 3 V mirror unit 23 bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI a amp z 7 SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 24 7 3 Operation 7 3 1 Scanner Exposure lamp control A Home position search of the exposure unit When the sub power switch SW2 is turned on the exposure unit starts to search the home position after the specified time passed 1 2 3
109. 68 7 3 5 Stapler control A Mechanism The stapler operation is conducted by the stapler motors Rt M29 and Lt M30 10 and the clincher solenoids Rt SD9 and Lt SD10 5 The stapler operation is detected by the stapler home sensors Rt HS1 and Lt HS3 8 and the clincher start sensors Rt HS2 and Lt HS4 11 HS1 HS2 HS3 and 4 are hall element sensors and control the position of the magnet 12 of the rotating eccentric cam 9 M29 and M30 10 drive the staple bending arm 3 and the stapling arm 2 via the eccentric cam 9 The staple bending arm bends the rolled staple 6 into the U shape and the stapling arm staples it toward the clincher Then the 509 and 5010 bend the staple by driving the clincher plate 4 The stapling operation is completed by hese operations The staple empty switches Rt SW1 and Lt SW2 7 detect whether the staple or cartridge is set or not 11 12 10 EDS u 15ant2c091na 1 Front side direction B Stapler home sensors Rt HS1 and Lt HS3 2 Stapling arm 9 Eccentric cam 3 Staple bending arm 10 Stapler motors Rt M29 Lt M30 4 Clincher plate 11 Clincher start sensors Rt HS2 and Lt HS4 5 Clincher solenoids Rt SD9 Lt SD10 12 Magnet 6 Staple 7 Staple empty switches Rt SW1 an
110. After a specified period of time since the clincher up down home sensor PS26 detects that the clinchers are contacted with the staplers M10 inserts the tip of the bundle arm under the fold line of the paper 7 when the bundle arm assist motor M26 starts the assisting operation by pushing up the trailing edge of paper at the back side and M10 stops after a Specified period of time 8 M22 rotates in the reverse direction to convey the paper to the bundle clip section when M10 stops 8 It stops after a specified period of time since PS31 turns ON M10 rotates in the forward direction to pull out the bundle arm from the paper and take shelter it from the con veyance path 11 after a specified period of time since the bundle clip starts to catch the paper 10 M10 stops when the bundle arm home sensor PS32 turns ON 12 M10 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the bundle arm to its standby position 13 for the subsequent set after a specified period of time since it stops Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTIO 14 9 01102113 Folding sensor 2 PS44 D Bundle arm assist motor M26 Clincher up down home sensor P526 Bundle arm Forward motor M10 Reverse Bundle arm Forward rotation motor M22 Reverse Bundle arm rotation home sensor P531 Bundle arm home sensor P532 Bundle clip Forward motor M11
111. B4 A4 45 B5 BSS 11 x 17 8 x 11 8 x 118 custom paper Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140mm Lo fe holes 4 holes B4 A4 B5 12x18 11x17 8 x11 8K 16K Tab paper B4 4 45 B5 BSS 11 x 17 8 2 11 8 2 x 115 custom paper Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140mm 1 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China 4 A4 11 only for C6500 Applicable paper Plain paper tab paper Paper weight 50 to 209 g m 2 Folding functions N Papersize B4 SRA4S 1 A4S 12x18 11x17 81 14 81 x 115 8K Custom paper Max 305 x 458 mm Min 210 x 279mm 1 C6500 only 2 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China Applicable paper Plain paper Paper weight Folding Letter 50 to 130 g m fold in Letter fold out Z fold Double parallel 50 to 91 g m fold Gate fold 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 PI functions A Paper size FD 501 OUTLINE SRA3 2 B4 SRA4 2 SRA4S M 45 B5 BSS 5 13x 192 12x18 11 x 17 81 2 x 14 8 2 x 11 8 2 x 118 51 2 x 81 2 8 2 x 13 8 x 13 x 131 4 8 x 13 8K 16K 16 83 Tab paper B4 4 45 B5 BSS 11 x 17 8 2 x 11 8 2 x 115 custom paper Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140mm Max 330 x 483 mm Min
112. DF 609 lt e LLI z a amp z 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 Control 7 The front side scan is performed 1 in the same operating method as in the single sided mode 2 M302 starts driving forward at the same time as M303 is turned on Then the original is conveyed to the reverse conveyance section 2 3 After the specified time has elapsed from when the reverse sensor PS305 has turned on M302 and M303 turn off 3 Then only M302 starts rotating again in reverse at high speed 4 and the original is conveyed toward the stuck position Leftward by the conveyance belt 4 M302 pauses 3 after the specified time has elapsed from when M302 has turned on in reverse at high Speed and switches speed to low speed 5 Then the original is conveyed to the stuck position against the positioning plate 1 5 After the positioning is completed the scanner main body side performs scanning 6 After the back side scan 6 is completed the paper exit is performed 7 in the same operating method as in single sided mode 7 When there are any originals that follow the paper feed motor M301 keeps operating to continue the con veyance 9 iming senso Conveyance motor M302 erse High Reverse sensor PS305 Reverse paper High exit motor M303 LOW 20 05212 012 1
113. DRV3 D1 D2 D3 D4 DRVA DRVA DRVB Drive signals control signals of four kinds DRVB Motor phases A and B control signals A Motor M A B B AB BB CLK PLL PLL control signal LCK Lock LD PLL lock signal FR Forward reverse rotation signal EM Lock LCK LD Motor lock abnormality BLK Drive brake signal P S Power stop 5 5 55 Operating load start stop signal CW CCW F R Rotational direction switching signal ENB Effective signal TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal 24V Power to drive the fan motor CONT DRIVE Drive signal Fan FM HL Speed control signal 2 speeds EM Lock LCK FEM Detection signal Others TH1 S ANG Analog signal C 4 Classification Load symbol Ex of signal name Description SG S GND S_GND Signal ground Ground PG P GND Power ground DCD Data carrier detection SIN Serial input SOUT Serial output DTR Data terminal operation available GND Signal ground earth er DSR DSET Data set ready RTS Transmission request signal CTS Consent transmission signal RI Ring indicator TXD Serial transmission data RXD Serial reception data C 5 Blank Page KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL bizhubPno C6500 Main body 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement
114. Er ka ke ees E RU RR A RR aa 50 Ja ciuis bee REFER RE Squad pua dd quK REFER qu 50 TT ODE sus o aea oh Abin bb sie bisce Ga ase ds dd kia dde 51 SD 501 lt s 5 7 a CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Lal Saddlesttching alignment db ciues sse aa rrr u ERR oe god RE ERE 51 fO Saddle stitching hold Give ua a kk suyus sasa WANG OPERA aha we oa 51 o 0 2 8 Clincher up down NYE k esce deeper nor e Babago qa dm beer dene r 52 3 124 Stapler clihcher movement drive siis eee e esee ide h ve 53 1 2 5 bane dk 54 26 Bundle arn rotation asse E AR RdEG 55 TET Bungle arn movement dive AA MR RON REOR E bx e ee n 56 LAB BUNGIE am assist CINE Lisa sacco eR a ERE AG E OUR RR 57 PAG cl ES ek ket ree ag eme p pure a quo NG Eee wer Eas 58 LO DON ua ei dada en UE TAL Heap EE Epp sa ama n NG WE D PERRA OR 59 731 Saddle stitching alignment control ka seems kk d reda 59 7 3 2 Stapler clincher movement control eee eee eee 61 733 Saddlestitching hold conte essais ra a i den ead ees we 62 e 134 refer up GOWN CONIC e cessa
115. HV 1 1st transfer C HV 2 lt c LLI z a amp 2 Drum motor K M17 Developing motor K M23 Toner supply motor K M52 Erase lamp K EL K Charging corona K HV 1 Laser drive board K LASDB K Developing bias K HV 1 Developing bias K AC HV 1 1st transfer K HV 2 Transfer belt motor M18 1st transfer pressure release motor M19 2nd transfer pressure release motor M34 2nd transfer CONT Bias HV 2 2nd transfer HV 2 Separation HV 2 00 13 14 16 a03ut2c030ca 1 M17 ON 9 Separation ON 2 M14ON 10 Start of second transfer 3 M15ON 11 Finish of writing The last toner image 4 M16 ON 12 Finish of first transfer Y 5 M20 ON 13 Developing bias K AC OFF End of writing 6 Start of writing First toner image 14 Start of transfer belt release 7 V TOP signal generation 15 Charging corona Y OFF 8 Finish of writing First toner image 16 Start of second transfer cleaning 44 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 9 PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION 9 3 2 Erase lamp EL control A Purposes Toeliminate remained electric potential on the drum surface To distribute the electric potential uniformly on the drum surface Tolight when the drum is in the position before charging bizhub PRO C6500 B Execution timing
116. M C DPRS C and K DPRS K Accord ing to the detected results the laser MPC value is corrected Execution timing When printing has not been performed for 6 hours or longer Every 1 000 prints When a change in humidity exceeds 20 from the last time the adjustment is performed When turning on the sub power switch SW2 after replacing the materials Gamma correction control Purpose In order to correct print density with respect to the original density according to gamma characteristic of toner images formed on each drum and the transfer belt in relation to the exposure level Operation Patch images are created on the transfer belt and read by the PGC sensor PS1 1 The PS11 output level is checked against a predetermined output level with respect to print density and the gamma is corrected according to the result Execution timing When printing has not been performed for 6 hours or longer Every 1 000 prints When a change in humidity exceeds 20 from the last time the control is performed When turning on the sub power switch SW2 after replacing the materials Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL 23 2 2 Image stabilizing controls when selecting the Stability in expert settings The image stabilizing controls described below is only executed when Stability is selected in Expert adjust ment Quality adjustment Image Quality stability A Simple Maximum den
117. Operation Ver1 0 Sep B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS N o LO a A Type Type Torque limiter separation type seat feeding device B Functions Auto sheet feeding online Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body operation Manual sheet feeding offline operation Feeds 15 25 Tri Note You can select the following 5 post processing modes he sheet to FS under the instruction from the operation panel of PI aple back mode aples flat stapling mode Punch mode when PK 512 513 is installed on FS Saddle stitching mode olding mode The tray Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding C Type of paper Paper size Tray Up A4 45 B5 B5S A5 8 x 11 81 x 118 51 x 81 16K 16KS Custom paper Max 216 x 297 mm Min 182 x 189 mm Tray Lw B4 5 45 A4 AS B5 55 A5 12x18 11 x 17 8x 14 816 x 11 81 x 118 51 x 81 8 x 18 814 x 13 x 1314 8 x 18 8K 16K 16KS Custom paper Max 314 x 458 mm Min 182 x 189 mm Paper type Plain paper recycle paper color paper special paper coated paper high quality paper Paper weight 50 to 200 g m Capacity Tray Up Lw 200 sheets 80 g m or 30 mm or less in height Paper curling a Curling 1 a 4 15 1 001 10 mm or less 1 5 papers 1 PRODUCT
118. PI function The same as the thick paper control is conducted because the paper type information cannot be obtained in the print job using PI Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 3 2 Alignment control A Alignment mechanism The alignment is conducted by driving the alignment claws 2 by the right angle conveyance motor M6 5 through the belt 3 and the torque limiter 4 The alignment claws move to the rear of the shelter direction 7 and are stopped by the mechanical stoppers 1 through the torque limiter when M6 is rotating toward the paper conveyance direction Rotating M6 in the reverse direction the alignment claws push the edge of paper to conduct the alignment 6 SD 501 4 5 6 7 lt ul z 77 amp o 15ant2c013na 1 Mechanical stoppers 5 Right angle conveyance motor M6 2 Alignment claws 6 Aligning direction 3 Belt 7 Shelter direction 4 Torque limiter 25 SD 501 lt LLI gt 2 7 a 5 RIGHT ANGLE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 26 B Alignment control The right angle conveyance motor M6 rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal 1 turns ON and the alignment claws move to the standby position 2 in accordance with the paper size No alignment operation is c
119. PS51 folding motor M4 Conveyance folding roller 1 Folding folding release motor M14 2nd folding motor M5 2 19501102041 1 Change of the 1st folding roller 1 to the 2 Change of the 1st folding roller 1 to the folding position conveyance position lt Lu z a 34 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION A 6 3 3 1st folding control A Conveyance folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 1st folding roller 1 This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 1st folding release motor M14 After the 1st folding conveyance sensor PS51 turns ON the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps While the paper is being conveyed the 1st folding roller gears 1 1 and 2 4 rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear 2 After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps M14 rotates until it gets to a specified number of steps This rotates the eccentric cam 5 to allow the idle gear arm 3 to separate the idle gear 2 from the 1st olding roller gears 1 1 and 2 4 At the same time when M14 starts up the cam provided on the inside of the 1st roller gear 2 4 rotates to allow the 1st roller 1 and 1st roller 2 to contact each other cl
120. SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Stapler movement control 1 Size movement in 1 staple front and 2 staples Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body the stapler movement motor M1 1 turns ON to widen the dis tance between stapler and clincher It stops when they are positioned at the specified positions M11 turns ON after a specified period of time since the main tray paper exit sensor PS6 detects the last paper M11 stops when the stapler movement home sensor PS1 1 turns ON FS 607 2 Size movement in 1 staple one corner stapling at rear Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body 1 the stapler movement motor M11 turns ON to widen the distance between the stapler and the clincher 2 The stapler rotation motor M6 and the clincher rotation motor M4 turn ON to rotate the stapler Rr and the clincher Rr and move them diagonally 3 after a specified period of time since M11 turns ON 4 and M6 turn ON and rotate the stapler Rr and the clincher Rr to the home position 5 after a specified period of time since the trailing edge of the last paper passes the main tray paper exit sensor PS6 The rota ions are stopped when the stapler rotation home sensor PS13 and the clincher rotation home sensor PS14 urn ON At the same time M11 turns ON 6 and it stops when the stapler movement home sensor PS11 urns ON Stapler movement home sensor PS11 Stapler movement CLOSE motor M11 OPEN
121. SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 2 Drive 6 2 1 Folding entrance drive LO D lt z a a 3 2 15ant2c016na x 1 Folding entrance motor M3 3 Folding entrance roller 1 2 Right side view 4 Roller release solenoid 3 507 90 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION 6 2 2 Folding conveyance drive U Ep D XO n 3 e a 6 5 4 15ant2c017na 1 One way clutch 6 Right side view 2 Oscillation connecting gear Ext belt 3 Folding conveyance motor M4 B Folding roller 3 4 Folding roller 2 9 Tri folding exit clutch CL1 5 Folding roller 1 37 SD 501 lt Lu z a 6 FOLDING SECTION 6 2 3 Folding blade drive Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 9 10 11 14 7 6 5 4 1 2 15ant2c018na 1st folding blade motor M18 Folding roller 2 1st folding blade home senso
122. SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body S Machine service life Same as the main body Machine data Power source 24 5V DC supplied from the main body Maximum power consump 30W or less tion Dimensions 511 W x 620 D x 220 H mm B Weight Approx 10 5 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 80 RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM Tray Up section Pick up Up section Separation Up section x F ES Conveyance section lec Tray Lw section Pick up Lw section Separation Lw section 18jft2001na N o Lo a PI 502 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH 3 1 Auto sheet feeding online operation Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 15jft1c002na 1 Paper path from the tray Up 2 Paper path from the tray Lw 3 2 Manual sheet feeding offline operation 15jft1c003na 1 Paper path from the tray Lw Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION B COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 PAPER FEED SECTION PI 502 41 Composition Tray Up Pick up roller Up Paper feed roller Up
123. Stacker entrance sensor PS5 Alignment plate home sensor Lw PS24 Alignment motor CLOSE Lw M16 OPEN 02 BI 15jmt2c003na 1 Closing the alignment plate Lw FNS signal 8 Alignment operation for every paper 2 Standby position of the alignment plate Lw Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 6 3 3 Stopper control The stopping position in vertical direction of paper conveyed to the stacker is different among the stapling mode the saddle stitching mode and the folding mode 2 stoppers the saddle stitching stopper and the flat stapling stopper control the stopping position of paper FS 607 A Stopper operation In the stapling mode the flat stapling stopper 1 is set on the paper path by the pushing pressure by the spring 2 The flat stapling stopper 1 determines the position of the leading edge of the fallen paper In the saddle stitching folding tri folding mode the flat stapling release solenoids SD7 and SD8 turn ON and evacuate the flat stapling stopper from the paper path Then the paper falls down to the saddle stitching stop per 8 without contacting with the flat stapling stopper The saddle stitching stopper motor M18 5 moves the saddle stitching stopper up and down in accordance with the paper size The saddle stitching stopper home sensor PS23 6 detects the home position lt
124. Step 2 The material used for the drum surface has a characteristic that holds electrostatic charges in darkness and dis charges under light This enables creating a electrostatic latent image on the drum with laser beam The laser beam draws the image shining on certain points on the drum where the text or image presents according to color separation data Y M C K data created on the image processing section zu 2 a03ut2c004ca 1 Write unit 3 Discharged points 2 Laser beam 4 Negative electrostatic charge 73 bizhub PRO C6500 lt a amp 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 14 6 4 Image development process Step 3 The non image points of the electrostatic latent image on the photoconductor drum is charged negatively while the image points are neutralized As the toner is negatively charged it is attracted to the image points on the drum and as a result a visible toner image is created on the drum This operation is referred to as develop ment a03ut2c005ca 1 Drum 3 Negatively charged toner 2 Negative electrostatic charge 4 Developing roller Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS 6 5 First transfer process Step 4 The toner images created on each of the Y M C and K photoconductor drums are transferred to the
125. TRIMMER SECTION OT TE o o AV TTE 15ant2c068na SD 501 lt 5 7 a 1 2 SI 4 Trimmer blade drive screw Drive plate Drive guide holes Drive shafts 5 6 7 8 Trimmer blade Trimmer blade home sensor PS50 Trimmer blade upper limit sensor PS51 Trimmer blade motor M31 709 9 TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 2 3 Trimmer board drive LO D lt amp 15ant2c069na e 1 Trimmer board solenoid 5011 5 Trimmer board 7 2 Trimmer board replacement sensor PS59 6 One way clutch 8 3 Pinion 7 Front side direction 4 Rack 110 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 TRIMMER SECTION A 924 Paddle drive 15ant2c120na 1 Trimmer paddle 2 Trimmer paddle motor M33 COMPOSITION OPERATION 777 9 TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 3 Operation 9 3 1 Trimmer press control A Mechanism The trimmer press is the me
126. The M65 and the fusing heater lamp 4 L5 do not turn ON at the same time 3 OFF timing e Stops when the temperature of the fusing roller Lw drops to a prescribed level P ADU fan 1 M66 control 1 Purpose cool around the ADU 2 ON timing Starts to operate upon starting of printing in double side or reverse paper exit mode 3 OFF timing Stops a predetermined time period after printing is finished 727 25 OTHER CONTROLS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Q ADU fan 2 M67 control 1 Purpose cool the ADU loop motor M57 and the ADU reverse motor M32 2 ON timing Starts to operate upon starting of printing in double side or reverse paper exit mode bizhub PRO C6500 3 OFF timing Stops a predetermined time period after printing is finished lt LLI a amp x 128 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 OTHER CONTROLS 25 3 Counter control 25 3 1 Structure of counter bizhub PRO C6500 a03ut2c096ca 5 lt e z o 7 a 729 25 OTHER CONTROLS 25 3 2 Counter operation Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Item Specification mechanism Total counter 1 TCT 1 Display the total number of printed sheets in all print modes Mechanical counter driven by electrical signals Counts up by paper exit signal Total counter 2 T
127. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the corresponding page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS ip PK 512 513 LO x eu OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 2 70 as pec teet a edoceri d needed md 1 2 VONT COMPOS MON EM EET 8 3 PAPER PATH Loeb ERE RE Mite 4 COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 PUNGFESECTION a pr rents ER rr tete au aa a ka upa ee ew dca 5 EE 6 EEE E uada eq ERI EP ELEN 5 SO E Ed par eg 6 Punchehlb de eii erri ti
128. and the intermediate roller Up 1 is pressed against the intermedi ate roller Lw 2 by the pressure of the spring The paper is nipped before being exited FS 503 fs503t02012c lt 5 7 a 1 Intermediate roller Up 3 Intermediate roller release solenoid 07 2 Intermediate roller Lw 4 Paper FNS entrance sensor PS4 mm mm um Intermediate roller open close motor M25 mm Alignment motors Fr M22 Rr M5 Intermediate roller release solenoid SD7 s n n n F 3 5 is503t02032c 1 Start signal ON 4 Alignment operation 2 Movement of the intermediate roller Up to 5 Paper nip by the intermediate rollers Up the nip standby position and Lw 3 release of the intermediate roller Up 79 FS 503 lt c LLI a amp S 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 20 B Staple mode control While in the staple mode operation through the initial operation made when the start signal is turned ON the intermediate roller Up 1 is moved to the evacuation position by the eccentric cam 2 that is driven by the inter mediate roller open close motor M25 fs503to2013c 1 Intermediate roller Up 3 Intermediate roller home sensor 533 2 Eccentric cam Theory of Operation
129. are noticeable consult a physician Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire You may be burned due to dust explosion lt O ac Handling of Service Materials N CAUTION Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly flammable and must be handled with care A risk of fire exists Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated A risk of fire exists Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid If this happens immediately wipe it off A A risk of fire exists When using any solvent ventilate the room well Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to gt ts discomfort D cr 6 11 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 4 Fuse Fuse N CAUTION CAUTION Double pole neutral fusing ATTENTION Double p le Fusible sur le neutre 5 Used Batteries Precautions Handling of batteries N CAUTION ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Germany VORSICHT Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgem Bem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hers
130. arm 3 Guide shaft 6 Bundle arm motor M10 71 SD 501 lt LLI z a amp S 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 72 Bundle arm rotation mechanism The bundle arm rotation motor M22 2 drives the bundle arm 8 via the belt slide guide 5 and guide shaft 6 When M22 drives the slide guide 5 in the main scan direction the guide shaft 6 passing through the long hole of the slide guide is rotated and then the bundle arm 8 is rotated around the fulcrum When it is driven to the paper 8 side M22 stops where the ring 71 is contacted with the guide plate 4 The bundle arm rotation home sensor PS31 9 detects the home position of the bundle arm 15ant2c045na 1 Front side direction 6 Guide shaft 2 Bundle arm rotation motor M22 7 Ring 3 Paper 8 Bundle arm 4 Guide plate 9 Bundle arm rotation home sensor PS31 5 Side guide Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION In the rotation drive of the bundle arm 8 the slide guide 5 has to be overrun to be sure to make the ring 7 of the bundle arm contact with the guide plate 6 To prevent any parts from damage due to the overrun the guide shaft 3 can be moved by t he shock absorbing guide 4 and the spring 2 SD 501
131. be opened and closed Pressing the paper removing switch on the stacker tray operation board TOB brings down the stacker tray And when the stacker tray arm release sensor PS15 is turn on SD4 turns off immediately The lock is released due to SD4 being turned off and the front door can be opened and closed LS 501 502 4 3 2 Jam release lever lock mechanism The entrance guide plate and the coupling guide plate are provided with a jam release lever to release jams The operation of each of the jam release levers is made by the entrance conveyance lock solenoid SD5 and the coupling conveyance lock solenoid SD1 1 ON OFF timing of SD5 and SD11 Operation timing ON When the stacker tray goes up and while in printing Lock OFF While in standing by when the stacker tray goes down after completion of printing Release and when the front door is open except in coupling mode and in sub tray mode lt LLI S z a amp S Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 A 5 1 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition Paper cooling fan Paper cooling fan motor FM4 molor 2 FM6 2nd gate Paper cooling fan motor 1 FM2 1st gate D Paper cooling fan motor Rr FM5 Paper cooling fan motor Fr FM1 Paper cooling fan motor Mi FM3 15502102003 18 501 502 lt
132. been made To indicate clearly a section revised show 4h in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ve1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS N FS 607 z OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS i254 ade Bre o eco Rad rdc bed ed Road 1 ES ETE bk NET 5 ai PAPER PAIHL ub Radon weg Qt RETE EN atado Siue ea 6 S Nonsornsort aroup mode erg 2 sr REG x eara ske Eia E E E ads 6 GE AN Dr CPP 7 3 3 Stapling Mode rer d REG Rd rasa REGN 8 34 Foldng sadde stlehingm de Sy d em ADR ER Rad 9 3 5 SIEM MOOS acu oi tet JONE ete eto ds 10 COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 TRANSFER SECTION z u teet tu Re doe pug eM ed 11 43
133. change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark e To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show 4h in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS o o DF 609 ra OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS i ona o cic e d ub ed dob e dL ROO ed d cp d Reed e rad 1 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM uu sese Rad ra ex eh rhe Pre AG RoE 8 PAPER PAs Sa Dama Su urusa saa
134. clinch arm 2 pushes down the clinch metal fitting 9 to clinch the staple 7 that has been cut When he eccentric cam rotates up to 270 the clinch operation is completed After completion of clinching the eccentric cam rotates to the home position to complete a series of operations fs503to2022c 1 2 3 4 5 Pin Staple cut clinch arm Coupling metal fitting Pin Staple cut blade 6 7 8 9 Round hole Staple Presser metal fitting Clinch metal fitting Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 STAPLER SECTION D Cartridge detection The presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a cartridge is detected by the cartridge set sensors Rr PS42 Fr PS43 When there is no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly an error message is displayed on the operation section FS 503 E Staple detection When the staples run short the staple empty sensors Rr PS44 Fr PS45 detect this condition and display an error message on the operation section F Staple tip detection The tip of the staple is detected by the staple ready sensors Rr PS46 Fr PS47 While in the stapling operation the staple ready sensors determine that the staples have been clogged when the PS46 and PS47 not turn on within a specified period of time after the staple home sensors Rr PS 40 PS41 turn off and rotate the stapler motors Rr M30 Fr M31 in the reverse direction up to
135. conditions When turning the sub power switch SW2 off with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to Automatic or On compulsory in the user settings and coated paper is selected When opening closing the tray with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to Automatic or On compul sory in the user settings and coated paper is selected When changing the original setting to coated paper from other types with the dehumidifier fan heater set ting set to Automatic or On compulsory in the user settings When changing the dehumidifier fan heater setting to Automatic or On compulsory from Off compul sory Operation details Detects the temperature in the trays with the temperature sensors 1 TEMS 1 and 2 TEMS 2 and con trols the dehumidification until the temperature reaches the target level During the dehumidification the printing from the tray is prohibited Ambient humidity Target temperature rise in the tray Less than 55 Not controlled 56 to 60 6 C 61 to 65 7 C 66 to 70 8 C 71 to 75 9 C More than 76 10 C D Dehumidifier control operation stop conditions When a original setting other than the coated paper is selected during dehumidifier control operation When the dehumidifier fan heater setting is changed to Off compulsory during dehumidifier control oper ation 29 PF 601 HT 504 z lt 5 7
136. control timing SD9 is turned ON by staple operation n predetermined time after stapled sheets go through stacker empty sensor PS20 SD9 is turned OFF The timing of turning OFF SD9 is when 2 3 of stapled sheets are exited lt 5 7 a fs503to2028c 1 Paper 3 Paper exit opening solenoid 509 2 Paper presser arm 39 FS 503 lt Lu z a 8 TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 5 2006 40 8 3 2 Main tray up down control The driving force of the tray up down motor M3 rotates the lift pulley by the belt and the gear to wind up the lift wire The main tray goes up or down according to the direction in which the up down wire is wound up When the lift pulley Lw rotates clockwise as seen from the front the main tray goes up and when it rotates counter clockwise the tray goes down A Non staple up down control According to the FS operation signal from the main body the tray up down motor M3 raises the tray until the tray upper limit sensor PS2 turns ON When paper passes through the main tray paper exit sensor PS10 lets down the tray raises up the tray again a specified period of time after PS2 turns OFF and stops it when PS2 turns ON The above steps are repeated for each sheet of paper 2 Main tray paper exit sensor PS10 Tray upper li
137. conveyed in the same manner 2 51 6 7 I 5 T Registration sensor PS301 c LLI a s Registration clutch MC301 l EE i 121 8 For High ward Low Paper feed motor jd Low M301 M f High Timing sensor PS302 Forward Conveyance motor M302 Reve LOW m rse High 3 4 a052t2c004ca 1 Paper feed motor high speed ON 6 Start conveying the original to the convey 2 Loop formation section 3 Registration roller released 7 Conveyance to the conveyance section 4 Nipping by the registration roller completed 5 A pause M301 10 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION B Double sided mode Z The first sheet of original is conveyed in the same manner as in single sided mode 1 2 While front side of the first sheet is being scanned 2 the second sheet is conveyed from the tray and is formed a loop to corrected its skew 3 and the registration roller nips the original 4 3 When paper exit operation starts 6 after the back side scan 5 of the first sheet is completed the second sheet on standby at the registration roller is conveyed to the conveyance section by the paper feed motor M301 7 and the conveyance motor M302 8 DF 609 1 31041 7 No paper
138. detection contol teirinn EE Eb RARE RAO 47 8 9 2 Wiriespesd BNG c 2 aaa ER ek a a b a bass 47 FD 501 lt 5 7 a CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 PISEGN N aaa uqa fridde Regesto a daun hoe arenes Pans 48 Ol COMPOSHON trer rr KON NS GU AA 48 9 2 DAVE S se done R ANI el e Oder dona 49 8 00 EE e e en pan 49 O22 Paperteed ARRA 50 920 das 51 OS rr 52 Size qu qawa Re 52 Da MN S 53 Na od gels KANAN KA pa upa panpaqa a NIRE e paypu muku 54 OSA Separation mechanisii eges du 55 9 3 5 Multi feed detection control nen 56 9 3 6 Paper empty detection son na raga sema EXE EEG RE ERR we 56 lt 2 a o a o o i Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 3 A Type Type Multi folding device with punch and PI functions B Functions 1 Functi
139. edge of paper is calculated and the laser writing position is adjusted so that the image is precisely centered on the printed page 97 bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI z a amp S 20 REVERSE PAPER 92 EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 20 1 Configuration Reverse paper exit sensor PS19 Paper exit roller Paper exit decurler roller Decurler sensor mens Reverse gate Reverse roller Paper exit decurler roller Reverse roller Lw Paper exit sensor PS13 Paper exit roller a03ut2c069ca Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 20 2 Drive 20 2 1 Reverse paper exit drive o o iD o o EE o 3 do N a lt o amp e 9 E a a03ut2c070ca x 1 Decurler motor M55 5 Reverse paper exit motor M33 2 Reverse roller 6 Paper exit solenoid 504 3 Small size roller 7 Reverse gate 4 Reverse roller Lw 93 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 2 2 Paper exit drive OT 502 drive e LO o tc 5 a d N a 4 z lt LLI e z E a03ut2c071ca 7 a z 1 Paper exit motor M54
140. exit the guide shaft does not oper ate because the paper 3 stacked in the saddle stitching section works as the guide 15ant2c027na 1 Folded paper 5 Projection direction of the guide shaft 2 Guide shaft 6 Storage direction of the guide shaft 3 Stacked paper Folding exit claws 4 Fold line Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION B Guide shaft control The guide shaft motor M25 turns ON 2 and the guide shaft is projected after a specified period of time since he folding main scan alignment motor Fr M7 completes the realignment operation in the main scan direction 1 after the folding operation The guide shaft conducting the back and forth operation by the belt rotation SD 501 stops when the guide shaft home sensor PS46 turns ON 3 Folding main scan alignment motor Fr M7 Reverse Forward Guide shaft motor M25 Guide shaft home sensor PS46 15ant2c086na 1 Realignment operation in the main scan direction 8 Guide shaft motor M25 stopped 2 Guide shaft projected C Folding unit lock control During the print operation the folding unit lock solenoid SD8 locks the folding unit to prevent the guide shaft or the folding exit claws from damage due to pulling out the folding unit by mistake When the paper get jammed the positions of the guide shaft and the folding exit claws are monitored SD8 turns OFF and releases the loc
141. front side and its opera tion is contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 2 Punch position correction control 4 PUNCH SECTION For the punch unit positioned from the side edge of the paper to the inside see 4 3 1 Punch standby position movement control the punch position is adjusted in the following procedure so that punching is made sym metrically to the center of paper at all times The punch position correction is operated by moving the punch unit back and forth while conveying the paper When the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects t the rear side until the paper size sensor PS30 punch operation on the paper conveyed from or Lw PS206 detects the leading edge of the paper Then the punch unit 11 is moved to the fron side edge reference position detection he leading edge of the paper the punch unit 11 is moved to 5 2 detects the side edge of the paper If you conduct the PI itis started when the paper entrance sensor Up PS201 side until PS305 2 detects the side edge of the paper the Once it detects the side edge reference position 3 the punch unit is moved further 11 so that the center of the punch blade 1 is positioned to the cen er of the paper 5 The moving distance and its direction are depending on the paper size It is stopped temporarily at the side edge reference position if it is moved to the rear side
142. fs503to2018c 1 Staple cut bending arm 4 Stapling arm 2 Stapler motors Rr M30 Fr M31 5 Pressure plate 3 Eccentric cam lt 5 7 a 2 FS 503 lt LLI z a amp S 7 STAPLER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 28 7 3 Operation 7 3 1 Stapler movement control For stapler movements there are two types that is the horizontal movement of the stapler intervals and the rotation of the stapler Rr Movement is made according to the staple mode The horizontal movement of the stapler is made by the stapler movement motor M11 The stapler Rr and the stapler Fr are fixed on the upper side and the lower side of a belt that forms a loop and moved respectively in the opposite direction by the motor M11 The home position of the horizontal movement is detected by the stapler movement home sensor PS1 1 The 45 rotational movement of the stapler Rr for the one corner stapling at rear is made by the stapler rotation motor M4 The home position of the rotational movement is detected by the stapler rotation home sensor PS14 1 staple 1 1 staple at front When the start signal is turned ON the stapler movement motor M11 also turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size 2 Size movement in 1 staple one corner stapling at rear When the start
143. has entered the folding conveyance section from the folding entrance sensor side The paper is conveyed vertically as is and exited to the main tray or the sub tray N fd501t02015c 1 Punch registration sensor PS6 3 Folding entrance sensor PS52 2 Registration roller Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION 6 3 2 Conveyance path switching Switching is made between the 2nd folding conveyance path and the folding conveyance path by the fold ing gate solenoid SD15 In the case of other than the Z fold a specified period of time after the 1st folding conveyance sensor PS51 turns ON SD15 turns ON to convey the paper to the 2nd folding after the 1st folding In the case of the Z fold SD15 remains OFF and the paper is conveyed to the 3rd folding after the 1st folding FD 501 lt 5 7 a fd501t02016c 1 n the case of other than the Z fold 8 In the case of the Z fold 2 Folding gate 33 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Timing chart of the 1st folding roller 1 Other folding rollers are also controlled in the same manner Punch registration sensor PS6 FD 501 er solenoid 4 SD8 folding conveyance sensor
144. information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice 19 D SD 501 OUTLINE 2 UNIT COMPOSITION 2 UNIT COMPOSITION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 15ant1c001na 1 2 3 4 Folding section Right angle conveyance section Bundle process section Left side view 5 6 7 Trimmer section Saddle stitching section Horizontal conveyance section Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH A Coupling exit subtray exit mode o D 3 2 1 O O O 15ant1c002na 1 Horizontal conveyance 3 Coupling exit 2 Subtray exit Lo D 3 PAPER PATH Multi letter folding mode Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 AN
145. mm or longer 50 sheets of 92 to 130 g m paper 40 sheets of 131 to 161 g m paper 25 sheets of 162 to 244 g m paper Stapling position 1 staple at the rear 45 1 staple at the front and 2 staples at the center FS 503 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 3 Maximum number of sheets loadable A Main tray Weighing 50 to 244 g m2 Straight Shift 3 000 sheets A4 A4S B5 B5S 8 11 8 2 x 118 16K 16KS 3 1 500 sheets SRA3 B4 SRA4 SRA4S 2 13 x 19 straight only 12 x 18 11 x 17 81 2 x 14 81 2 x 13 8 x 13 8 s x 1314 8 x 13 8k s wide paper B4 4 45 B5 55 A5 12x18 11 x 17 8 2x 11 8 2 x 118 512 x 81 size entry Max 324 x 460 500 sheets 5 A5S 2 B6S straight only 5 x SVT 51 2 x BIAS Tab paper A3 B4 A4 A4S B5 B5S 11 x 17 8 2 11 8 2x 115 custom size 324 x 460 mm 182 x 140 Custom paper 1050 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140 mm C6500 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 148 x 148 mm 1 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China 4 C6500 only A4 and 8 x11 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured Staple mode Staple sheet Set 2109 150 paper length 182 to 364mm 75 other than paper length 182 to 364mm 10 to 20 50 21 to 30 30 31 to 40
146. mm s Is502t02027c 1 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 ON 3 2nd sheet of paper 2 1st sheet of paper 4 Last sheet of paper B Paper full control When the number of the sheets of paper discharged on the sub tray gets to 200 the sub tray full sensor PS9 turns on to give indication of paper full on the operation panel A KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FS 503 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve ment of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the corresponding page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only ar
147. number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 2 0 A Revision in relation to launching of C6500 2004 10 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS 3 LS 501 502 5 LO a Il OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Ie eee m lr rns 1 2 VONT COMPOS MON EM Em 4 S PAPER PATH adu dide E huysa a 5 COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION tee beg bg TEN eek ass aus e NA 7 AA Pr 7 EE E E EE 7 EEE EN NE 8 48 1 Door open close mechanisms id eek eek Ex R ace RE Ra ad X de 8 432 Jam release lever lock eee eee seen ERE RR 8 5 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION eek E eset es Subs Sasachu asad 9 Dil amp stad Wid Sh sa 9 5 CET 10 53 Operation MEM 11 SSA
148. on the both left and right shaft 6 The lift wires B are connected to each shaft and the plate is kept in a horizontal position by the drive pulley Plate up down control 4 one for each of the lift drive shaft 5 via each pulley 9 When the each lift drive shaft of the trays are rotated by the paper lift motors 1 M38 1 2 M39 2 and 3 M40 S the each drive pulley winds up the wire and then the lift plate goes up 15 PAPER FEED SECTION bizhub PRO C6500 9 B lt 5 7 a IN 4 7 6 a03ut2c047ca 1 M38 6 Shaft 2 M39 7 Lift plate 3 M40 8 Lift wires 4 Drive pulley 9 Pulleys 5 Lift drive shaft 67 15 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Plate down operation When each tray is pulled out the each lift drive shaft is disengaged from the couplings of the lift motors 1 M38 2 M39 3 M4O The disengagement cuts off the drive force from the M38 M39 and M40 to the lift plate and the plate goes down by its own weight bizhub PRO C6500 Operation timing When the tray is set the paper lift motors 1 M38 2 M39 and 3 M40 start to rotate and the lift plate goes up When the upper limit sensors 1 PS30 2 PS36 and 3 PS42 are turned on by the top sheet the M38 M39 and the M40 stop e When
149. only by KMBT trained service technicians Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed Accordingly KMBT does not warrant either explicitly or implicitly that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended Therefore this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that for performing maintenance and control of the product properly Keep this Service Manual also for future service DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION In this Service Manual each of three expressions ADANGER A WARNING and ANCAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning When servicing the product the relevant works disassembling reassembling adjustment repair maintenance etc need to be conducted with utmost care N DANGER Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury A WARNING Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury A CAUTION Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound medium trouble and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as fo
150. period of time since the trimmer blade motor M31 completes the trimming 1 M5 stops after a specified period of time since the bundle exit sensor 2 PS57 detects the trailing edge of paper 3 SD 501 2 Bundle exit Forward motor M5 Reverse Trimmer blade motor M31 Bundle exit sensor 2 PS57 ri 3 15ant2c107na 1 Trimming completed 8 Trailing edge of paper detected 2 Bundle exit conveyance lt LLI z a amp x 1 15ant2c114na 1 Bundle exit sensor 2 PS57 704 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION A D Shutter trimmer scraps press control When the trimming is executed with the shutter closed the bundle exit motor M5 starts rotating forward to exit paper 1 Then the scraps press plate moves backward to drop the trimmer scraps with the shutter opened 2 After a specified period of time since the paper exit is finished 3 the M5 motor rotates in reverse to move the scraps press plate frontward 50 mm and stops 4 with the shutter closed Then the next trimming is excused in this condition After a specified period of time from paper exit when the trimming is performed five times or when the total trimmed number of sheets becomes 60 sheets 30 sheets before folding or more after the previous 19 D scraps press operation the M5 motor starts rotating in
151. pre reg istration roller 7 The paper pushes the actuator 1 and the actuator turns on the paper feed sensors 1 PS29 2 PS35 and 3 PS41 In order to correct skew of the paper the leading edge of the paper is pressed against the pre registration roller that is not moving until the paper forms a small loop 2 This is made by stopping the paper feed roller after the specified time passed from when the PS29 PS35 and PS41 turn on 4 5 6 7 a03ut2c050ca 1 2 SI 4 Actuator 5 Paper feed roller Loop 6 PS29 PS35 PS41 Separation roller 7 Pre registration roller Pick up roller 71 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a 15 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 D Pre registration control The pre registration roller is driven by the paper feed motor M41 via the pre registration clutch 1 MC8 2 MC10 and 3 MC12 When paper feeding is started with the pick up roller MC8 MC10 and MC12 do not transmit the drive force from the motor to the pre registration roller so as not to rotate the roller The fed paper is pressed against the pre registration roller and since the roller is stopping the pressure causes the paper to form a small loop 2 in order to correct skew of the paper The MC8 MC10 and MC12 start to transmit 3 the drive force to the pre registration roller to rotate it after h
152. presses the plate down button 2 on the side of the tray and release lever 4 releases the coupling in the torque limiter 5 The pulley drive shaft 6 keeps rotating while the plate down button is pressed When the paper lift plate 1 is at its uppermost position the tray down stopper 7 is on the rear side 8 o the tray and the gear 9 prevents the paper lift plate from going down COMPOSITION OPERATION a03xt2c005ca 1 Paper lift plate 6 Shaft 2 Down button 7 Tray down stopper 3 Papers 8 Rear side of the tray 4 Release lever 9 Gear 5 Torque limiter C Operation timing 1 When tray is set The paper lift motors 1 M2 and 2 M3 are activated and lift the paper lift plate The M2 and M3 motors are stopped when the upper limit sensors 1 PS1 and 2 PS9 detect the upper most status of the paper lift plate 2 During printing When the PS1 and PS9 sensors turn off the M2 and M3 motors are activated When the PS1 and PS9 sensors turn on upon detection of the upper most status of the paper lift plate with the paper lift plate up M2 and are stopped 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 2 Paper size detection control A Main scan Sub scan direction detection The detection methods differ between main scanning direction and sub scanning direction 1 Main scan direction The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR
153. registration clutch MC102 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 2 2 Pick up drive LU 202 HT 503 a03wt2c003ca 1 Pick up roller 3 Front side 2 Pick up solenoid SD100 4 Paper feed roller lt 5 7 a LU 202 HT 503 lt e LLI a amp 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Paper feed control A Pick up control 1 Outline Paper is picked up when the pick up solenoid SD100 is turned off The pick up roller rotates with the paper feed roller 2 Operation 7 At the time printing is started 1 0100 is off and the pick up roller presses against loaded paper with its own weight 2 Then the paper feed clutch MC101 turns on 2 to transmit drive force of the paper feed motor M1 to the pick up roller and the pick up roller starts to rotate and picks up a sheet of paper to be fed by the paper feed roller 3 When the Pre registrations sensor 5 106 located just before the pre registration roller detects the leading edge of the paper 3 SD100 turns on to make the pick up roller separate from the paper and the paper is fed only by the paper feed roller 4 When the LU exit sensor PS107 turns on 4 MC101 is turned off to stop the paper feed roller and the pick up roller 5 When predetermined time peri
154. reverse to start the press operation When the press operation is started the shutter opened by the paper exit operation is closed again 7 When the scraps press home sensor PS48 detects that the scraps press plate is at the home position the M5 motor stops 8 and next operation of the trimming and paper exit 9 is performed 2 BI 4 516 71 pI Bundle exit motor M5 Scraps press home sensor PS48 77 8 15 2 118 x 1 Start of paper exit 6 Start of press operation 2 Shutter is opened Shutter is closed 3 Paper exit completed B Press position stop 4 Shutter is closed 9 Start of paper exit 5 Finish of paper ejection A 705 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 E Bundle exit paper full control The bundle tray paper full sensor PS61 1 detects the bundle exit paper full The main body displays the mes sage on its operation panel when the paper full is detected SD 501 1 15ant2c109na 1 Bundle tray paper full sensor PS61 Trimmer scraps full control The trimmer scraps full sensor PS41 detects the paper scraps full of the scraps box When the PS 41 is turned on for three seconds after the paper exit operation driven by the M5 is finished the scraps is detected as full The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the paper scraps full is dete
155. shown in the figure below Display of operation panel Enhance Mode Writing bit and resolution 2 Line1 Text Photo Text 8bit 600dpi Other Approx 2001 screen Photo Approx 200lpi screen Tex 1bit ED 600dpi ap 1bit ED 600dpi Line2 Type1 Text Photo Text 8bit 600dpi Other Approx 180lpi screen Photo Approx 180lpi screen Tex 1bit ED 600dpi ap 1bit ED 600dpi Line2 Type2 Text Photo Text 8bit 600dpi Other Approx 135lpi screen Photo Approx 135lpi screen Tex 1bit ED 600dpi ap 1bit ED 600dpi Dot1 Text Photo Text 8bit 600dpi Other Approx 190lpi screen Photo Approx 190lpi screen Tex 1bit ED 600dpi 1bit ED 600dpi a Dot2 Type Text Photo Text 8bit 600dpi Other Approx 200lpi screen E Photo Approx 200lpi screen d Tex 1bit ED ap 1bit ED 600dpi Dot2 Type2 Text Photo Text 8bit 600dpi Other Approx 140lpi screen Photo Approx 140lpi screen Tex 1bit ED 600dpi ap 1bit ED 600dpi compression Gives priority Text Photo 1bit ED 600dpi to lessening Photo color scanned data ap 119 24 IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 Print image using 8bit 1bit ED Original image Print image bizhub PRO C6500 2 Print image using 200lpi or 140Ipi screen Original image Print image Print image Line screen Dot screen lt e LLI z a amp S 120 Theory
156. straightening ON in the service mode setting a start printing signal is sent form the main body and the decurler gate solenoid 2 SD3 starts operating Then it switches the direction of paper conveyance path toward the decurler Lw The paper conveyance path is switched to the normal path when the 503 is OFF When the SD3 is ON the path is switched toward the decurler Lw 502 stop the operation after predetermined time has passed since the paper exit sensor 53 detected the trailing edge of the last paper Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION 4 3 8 Fan control There are five fans Paper fan 1 2 and 3 M2 M3 and M4 2 4 5 Ventilation assist fan 1 and 2 M6 st and M7 3 1 The paper fans reduce unevenness of the wax on the paper by blowing and cooling down the paper with 2 air E tc The ventilation assist fan intakes fresh air and exhausts heat around the paper exit section lt 7 a04kt2c007ca 1 Ventilation assist fan 2 M7 4 Paper fan 2 M3 2 Paper fan 1 M2 5 Paper fan 3 M4 3 Ventilation assist fan 1 A Paper fan control When a start printing signal is sent from the main body the paper fans M2 and M4 start to rotate paper exit sensor PS3 detects the trailing edge of the last paper M2 and M4 are turned off B Exhaust assist fan control
157. subsequent paper The overlap stopper moves down to the standby position and stands by for the 1st paper of the subsequent set 12 after a specified period of time since PS1 detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set 4 7 10 Entrance sensor PS1 Up Overlap motor lt 5 7 a M13 Down Right angle conveyance gate solenoid SD2 ME ode MA ion 121 1 2 315 61 8 9 11 15ant2c074na 1 Main body start signal 7 Trailing edge of the subsequent paper detected 2 Overlay stopper moved to its standby position B Paper moved downward 8 Right conveyance gate switched 9 Right conveyance gate switched 4 Paper isolated 10 Paper isolated 5 gt Conveyance path cleared 11 Conveyance path cleared 6 Subsequent paper conveyed 12 Overlay stopper moved to its standby posi tion 23 SD 501 lt LLI a a S 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 24 2 Center folding saddle stitching mode control In the center folding and saddle stitching modes 1 2 or 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section The number of the stacked sheets is different depending on its paper weight and the convey ance pattern Normal paper less than 130 g m up to 3 sheets are stacked and conveyed to
158. the 2nd folding release motor M15 After the 2nd folding conveyance sensor PS53 turns ON the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps While the paper is being conveyed the 2nd folding roller gears 1 1 and 2 4 rotate in the same direc tion since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear 2 After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps M15 rotates until it gets to a specified number of steps This rotates the eccentric cam 5 to allow the idle gear arm 3 to separate the idle gear 2 from the 2nd folding roller gears 1 1 and 2 4 At the same time when M14 starts up the cam provided on the inside of the 2nd roller gear 2 4 rotates to allow the 2nd roller 1 1 and 2nd roller 2 to contact each other closely to rotate the 2nd roller 1 The phases of the 2nd folding roller gears 1 1 and the 2nd folding roller gears 2 8 are not aligned in the depth direction Therefore they do not engage with each other after the idle gear 2 has been separated fd501t02019c 1 2nd folding roller gear 1 4 2nd folding roller gear 2 2 Idle gear 5 Eccentric cam 3 dle gear arm 6 Seen from the FD side A 97 501 COMPOSITION OPERATION 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 And in parallel with this when the 2nd folding release motor M15 starts up the winding up of the wire that pulls
159. the SW2 on and that the fusing temperature is 50 degrees C or below 777 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI a amp S 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C 1 712 Color registration adjustment Purpose Performed in order to correct the misalignment in main or sub scanning direction entire horizontal magnifi cation and skew Operation The color registration sensors Fr and Rr reads a patch image created on the transfer belt The correction is carried out by calculating the amount of the misalignment from the read value Execution timing When adjusting in service mode When the sub power switch SW2 is turned on with the fusing temperature is 50 C or less Every 1 000 prints When printing is not performed for a predetermined period of time When the temperature in the write sec tion has changed 10 C When printing is not performed for one hour after the correction is finished PGC sensor baseline correction control 1 2 Purpose This correction is necessary to be executed in advance to carry out the maximum density control and the gamma correction control Operation To carry out the maximum density control reference values for the PGC sensor PS11 are determined by measuring the density of the transfer drum surface when no toner is a
160. the completion of the registration operation M23 rotates in the reverse direction to return the bundle press plate Up to the home position 7 when the trim mer blade motor M31 completes the paper trimming operation 6 Lo D 10 5 7 Bundle press Forward movement motor M17 Reverse Bundle press en motor M23 Reverse 2 Trimmer registration sensor 555 lt Bundle press home sensor PS37 Bundle press lower limit sensor PS47 Trimmer blade motor M31 a A x ta 3114 6 15ant2c105na 1 Searching the press position completed 5 Press 2 Press operation 6 Trimming completed 3 Lower limit detected 7 Returning to the home position 4 Press release 96 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 3 4 Bundle registration control The paper registration operation reforms the skew at trimming A Mechanism 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION The bundle registration motor M12 drives the registration claws 4 Two registration claws 4 conduct the registration by making the paper 14 contact 3 with the bundle registra tion plate 13 from the gutter side In the registration operation the bundle press section 7 conducts the pressing by moving to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size To conduct the bundle registration the registration claws 4 press the paper until the actuator
161. the front and back of the plate lift wire Fr2 Fr3 Rr2 Rr3 lift the paper lift plate and the other two one each on front and back lift wire Fr1 and Rr1 pull the plate downward The pulling force of the lift wire Fr1 and Rr1 is exerted by the springs and it works to stabilize the paper lift plate LU 202 HT 503 B Up operation When the upper door sensor PS100 turns on 1 upon closing of the upper door the paper lift motor M100 rotates in forward direction to lift the paper lift plate 2 until the upper limit sensor PS109 turns on 3 When the height of paper stacked in the tray becomes lower as the paper is fed PS109 becomes off 4 and 100 starts to rotate again in forward direction to lift the paper lift plate until PS109 becomes 5 again Paper lift motor M101 lt LLI z a amp o Upper door sensor PS100 Upper limit sensor PS109 2 3 4 5 4 5 1 Closing of upper door 4 The height of stacked paper lowers due to 2 Paper lift plate goes up paper feeding 3 Paper lift plate stops at the upper limit posi 5 Paper lift plate reaches the upper limit posi tion tion C Down operation When the upper door sensor PS100 turns off upon opening of the upper door the paper lift motor M100 starts to rotate in reverse direction to make the paper lift plate go down by a predetermine
162. times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show 4h in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS LU 202 HT 503 OUTLINE 1 PRODUGI SPEGIFIGATIONS 12 23 tapas cae mariah e ade pe dabei lt 1 dob 3JBUS20 Sar esia a tru errem prede hu ke NG NA RAD a nw Sa kms 1 1527 HESOSL Y PUDE wa kaq NT E FRE Mine idee 2 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM dupini make ig GE SG sad 3 PAPER eu ntes SERI Gas eee poete pp eie TEE d eR RENE 4 CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 PAPERTFEED SECTION auk atenerne ia bab PUGAD pa ild e AOI NGA 5 COMIQUIBION usus usss PW Y QS 5 roms or TELE 6 LIONE 9 TCO
163. transfer roller Up DC bias The DC bias for the second transfer roller changes depending on the following conditions Process speed Black and white mode or color mode e Humidity of paper Front side or back side of paper C Operation timing Refer to 9 3 1 Image creation control See P 43 53 bizhub PRO C6500 lt ui a a o 54 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 11 3 5 Image correction unit shutter mechanism The image correction unit is provided with a shutter mechanism that covers the sensors while they are not used to prevent them from contamination The color registration sensor shutter Fr 6 and Rr 7 are driven by the color registration shutter solenoid SD2 2 in order to protect the color registration sensor Fr PS8 5 and Rr PS9 8 The sensor shutter 3 that protects the sensor 4 is driven by the shutter solenoid 503 1 4 2 1 a03ut2c037ca 1 SD3 5 PS8 2 SD2 6 Color registration sensor shutter Fr 3 sensor shutter Color registration sensor shutter Rr 4 PGC sensor 8 PS9 11 3 6 Control of prevention for the belt cleaning blade countermeasures against the flip of the belt cleaning blade and the occurrence of white bands on images a toner band is periodically created on the tran
164. up roller driven by the transfer motor M203 presses the paper and picks it up to transfer it to the separation section PI 502 15jft2c005nb 1 Spring 4 Pick up roller mounting plate 2 Pick up solenoid Up SD201 5 Release arm 3 Pick up roller lt ul 2 B amp o 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 433 Separation mechanism The separation roller 4 is driven to rotate in the opposite direction from the paper transfer direction 2 When ransferring no or 1 sheet of paper the separation roller rotates in the paper transfer direction to transfer the paper to the paper transfer section because the frictional force between the paper feed roller 1 or the paper and the separation roller 4 is stronger than the frictional force of the torque limiter 3 When transferring 2 or more sheets of paper the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the bottom sheet from being transferred because the frictional force between the sheets is stronger than the fric ional force of the torque limiter 3 N o lt LLI e z D B s 15jft2c006na z 1 Paper feed roller 5 2nd sheet 2 Paper transfer direction 6 1st sheet 3 Torque limiter Pick up roller 4 Separation roller 10 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 3 4 Registratio
165. way when the bundle clip moves down 2 the release roller Lw 10 gets onto 12 the release plate Lw 11 and then the wire winding shaft 4 rotates 9 and takes up the wire 5 to open the bundle clip SD 501 5 6 7 8 lt pu 2 77 amp o 12 11 10 4 15ant2c049na 1 Up 7 Getting over at up 2 Down B Release plate Up 3 Wire winding rotation 9 Wire winding rotation 4 Wire winding shaft 10 Release roller Lw 5 Wire 11 Release plate Lw 6 Release roller Up 12 Getting over at down 87 SD 501 lt Lu z a 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 82 B Control The bundle clip motor M11 rotates in upper limit sensor PS33 turns ON 2 aft the assisting operation 1 Then the bun The bundle arm conveys the paper from Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 he forward direction to move up the bundle clip until the bundle clip er a specified period of time since the bundle assist motor M26 starts dle clip stops with its clip opened he stapling section to the bundle clip section and then the bundle arm rotation motor M22 stops 3 After a specified period of time M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle clip and close of time 4 he bundle clip to catch the paper and then M11 stops after a specified period When the bundle arm motor
166. z a Blank page i Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS fe A Type Type Belt conveyance type original auto feeder B Functions Original size B4 4 45 B5 55 5 55 B6S 11x 17 81 x 14 8 x 11 8 2 x 115 5 x 814 51 x 8 58 8 5 x 18 8 x 13 8 5 x 13 8x 18 8K 16K 16KS Max original size 297 x 431 8mm Min original size 128 x 189 7mm Various sizes of paper can be accommodated C Original type Paper type Plain paper igh quality paper of 35 to 210 g m single side igh quality paper of 50 to 210 g m double side Paper of less than 49g m conveyed in thin paper mode Paper of more than 129g m conveyed in thick paper mode Special paper Same as plain paper However paper feed and convey ance performance are not guaranteed e Recycled paper coarse paper thermal paper binding holed paper user defined paper paper with smooth surface paper with rough surface and paper with folds Following types of special paper cannot be used OHP film blueprint master paper label paper off set master bonded original high quality paper paper weight Less than 34g m or more than 21 1g m2 Paper curl amount Up to 10 mm with 5 originals overlapped one another 1 4 15sat1c001na a Curing 10 mm or less 1 Original Max t
167. 03up0e001ca S 14 SAFETY INFORMATION A WARNING DO NOT throw the toner recovery box into a fire If it is thrown into a fire the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation a03up0e002ca CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from Do not remove caution labels And also when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and cannot be seen clearly replace it with a new caution label MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1 accident has occurred the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage 2 If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer an on site evalua tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified 3 To determine the cause of the accident conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on site checks in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT 4 Forreports and measures concerning serious accidents follow the regulations speci fied by every distributor 5 16 Legal restrictions on copying Certain types of originals must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such originals off as the originals The following is not a complete list but
168. 1 F4 lt ul pu z a 4 15ant2c072na 1 Trimming direction 5 Trimmer blade retaining plate 2 Drive guide holes 6 Trimmer blade 3 Front side direction 7 Trimmer stoppers 4 Drive shafts 775 9 TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Control The trimmer blade motor M31 starts the trimming 2 when the trimmer press motor M32 completes the press and stops 1 M31 stops when the overcurrent is detected 3 31 starts the returning operation to the home position 5 when the bundle press motor M23 starts releasing he press 4 M31 stops when the trimmer blade home sensor PS50 turns ON 6 LO D Bundle press Forward motor M23 Reverse Trimmer press Forward motor M32 Reverse Forward rimmer blade motor M31 Reverse timmer blade home sensor PS50 j lt 2 3 5 6 15ant2c112na 5 2 1 Trimmer press completed 4 Releasing the press started 2 Trimmer operation 5 Returning operation to the home position 3 Stopped by the overcurrent 6 Home position detected 5 776 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 TRIMMER SECTION 9 3 8 Trimmer board control A Mechanism The trimmer operation may be conducted improperly due to the damage on the trimmer board if the trimmer board is subjected
169. 1 9 Right angle conveyance roller 4 3 Right angle conveyance roller 1 10 Roller release solenoid 2 SD6 4 Right angle conveyance sensor 1 PS5 11 Right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 5 Roller release solenoid 1 SD5 12 Paper conveyed to the folding section 6 Paper conveyed to the overlap section 13 Folding entrance roller 7 Overlap stopper 14 Roller release solenoid 3 507 A 2 SD 501 lt Lu z a 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 28 B Conveyance control The roller release solenoid 1 SD5 turns ON to press the right angle conveyance roller 1 2 after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor PS1 detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set 1 After the alignment operation 3 the right angle conveyance motor rotates in the forward direction to convey the paper to the front side 4 by rotating 90 At this time the roller release solenoid 5077 turns OFF a specified period of time after the entrance sensor PS1 detects the trailing edge of paper and releases the pressure of the olding entrance roller 1 5 A specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 detects he leading edge of paper SD7 turns ON to pressure the folding entrance roller 1 and nip 6 the upper section of paper that has been conveyed to the front side And also a specified per
170. 1 SD5 5 and 2 SD6 10 convey the paper When conveying the paper to the overlap section the paper falls vertically 6 to the overlap stopper 7 by its own weight after conveyed by the overlap assist roller At the time the press by the right angle conveyance roller 1 3 is released by default since the conveyance direction is not the rotational direction of the right angle con veyance roller 1 3 but the axial direction of the right angle conveyance roller 1 After stacking and aligning the specified number of papers the roller release solenoid 1 SD5 5 turns ON to nip the paper and convey the paper to the position rotated 90 from the right side to the front side 8 The roller release solenoid 3 507 14 is OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller by default since the upper edge of the paper 1 passes over the folding entrance roller 13 When conveying the paper from the right angle conveyance section to the folding section 12 the roller release solenoid 2 SD6 10 turns ON to release the pressure of the right angle conveyance roller 4 9 and convey the paper to the folding section by nipping the paper with the folding entrance roller 13 SD 501 141 1 13 12 lt oc 5 wn a 11 10 os 9 6 8 B U 15ant2c014na 1 Upper edge of the paper path B Right angle conveyance 2 Entrance sensor PS
171. 1 Sub tray mode coupling mode 3 Stacker tray non sort mode stacker tray 2 1stgate sort mode 71 5 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B 2nd gate The conveyance path is switched between the sub tray paper exit sub tray mode and the coupling conveyance coupling mode LS 501 502 lt Lu z a 1 15502102006 1 Coupling mode 3 2nd gate 2 Sub tray mode 72 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 3 2 Conveyance line speed control The conveyance process speed of the entrance roller and the coupling conveyance rollers 1 and 2 that are driven by the conveyance motor M2 varies according to the conveyance process speed of the main body These operations are common to all the modes 18 501 502 When main body process speed is 1000 mm s 1 2 3 4 Entrance sensor PS4 Conveyance motor 1000 mm s M2 490 mm s 15502102007 1 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 3 2nd sheet of paper 2 1st sheet of paper 4 3rd sheet of paper B When the main body process speed is 490 mm s 1 4 lt oc wi 2
172. 1 VR1 and 2 VR3 that move together with the paper guide The detected size is sent to the main body within a fixed time period after the tray is set PF 601 HT 504 2 Sub scan direction The size detection in the sub scan direction is made by the following each pair of the sensors the paper Size sensors Rt1 PS5 3 and Lt1 PS6 4 for tray 4 Rt2 PS13 3 and Lt2 PS14 4 for tray 5 e When the paper rear guide 6 is moved the detection cams Up 1 and Lw 2 that are different in shape are pressed by the knob 5 Depends on the position of the paper rear guide the paper size sensors Rt1 4 Rt2 4 and Lt1 3 Lt2 3 are turned on and off lt LLI z a amp o a03xt2c006ca 1 Detection cam Up 4 Paper size sensors Lt1 PS6 and Lt2 2 Detection cam Lw PS14 3 Paper size sensors Rt1 PS5 and Rt2 5 Knob PS13 6 Paper rear guide 70 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Paper size Paper size sensor PS5 and Lt2 PS14 Rt1 PS5 and Rt2 PS13 65 B6S A4S B5 11x17 18x 19 OFF light blocking OFF 81 x 115 8K 16KS OFF ON A5S B5S A4 SRA4 ON exposure ON 51 x 8 58 81 2 x 11 81 2 x 14 A5 SRA4S SRA3 8 x 13 ON OFF 8 s x 18 4 81 2 x 13 8 x 13 12 x 18 16K For the paper sizes below it is necessary to
173. 1 turns ON M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slant ing position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor PS45 turns ON 3 M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage 5 after the bundle clip releases the paper the bundle registration motor M12 assists the paper conveyance operation and the bundle press move ment motor M17 conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position 4 M24 stops when the bundle press SD 501 stage up down home sensor PS35 turns ON 6 M24 moves up the bundle press stage 8 for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit 7 7 Bundle press Forward movement motor M17 Reverse Bundle press Forward motor M23 Reverse Bundle registra Forward tion motor M12 Reverse Bundle press stage up down motor M24 Reverse Forward lt 5 7 a Bundle press stage up down home sensor P535 Bundle press stage up down limit sensor P545 Bundle registration plate home sensor P516 01 21131 4115116 8 15ant2c101na 1 Main body start signal 6 Returning to the home position 2 Bundle press stage moved up Paper exit completed 3 Stopped at the upper limit B Bundle press stage moved up 4 Paper conveyance assisting operation completed 5 Bundle press stage moved down Only for th
174. 1 0 Sep 2006 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL 23 1 Outline This unit carries out various image stabilizing controls in order to achieve stable high print quality The image stabilizing controls carried out during printing are different from those carried out when the sub power switch SW2 is turned on bizhub PRO C6500 23 2 Operation flow 23 2 1 Image stabilizing controls when the sub power switch SW2 is ON during printing and dur ing idling An operation flow when the sub power switch SW2 is ON during printing and during idling is described in the igure below When the sub power switch SW2 is turned ON Carries out the controls from A to H During printing and idling Carries out the controls from D to H A Drum rotation control up B Environmental decision control a e v A MPC APC a v C Oolor registration adjustment v 0 PGC sensor baseline correction control 1 v E Maximum density correction VO correction v G Vm correction D sensor baseline correction control 2 Y H Gamma correction a03ut2c085ca 770 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL A 1 2 1 2 Drum rotation control Purpose To prevent uneven electrostatic charges on the drum which causes improper images under high humi
175. 1 1 1 1 74g m Middespeed 2 3 1 4 75to Highspeed 1 1 1 1 80g m Middespeed 2 3 1 4 81to Highspeed 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1059 Middle speed 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 106to Highspeed 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1359 Middle speed 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 Lowspeed 1 2 2 8 1 2 2 8 2 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 3 136 Middle speed 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 1629 Low speed 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 16310 Middle speed 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2099 m Low speed 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 210 to 256g m 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 257 to 300g m 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 F4 lt 6 z D Paper select mode and paper type Paper select mode Paper type Plain paper A Color specific Colored paper High quality paper Coated paper GL Coated paper ML Coated paper GO m o O U gt gt gt Coated paper MO 702 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI a amp x 21 FUSI G SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Fusing proc
176. 125 85 x 13 x 13 81 x 184 8x 18 8K 16K 16KS Tab paper Custom paper A4 8 5x 11 Max 330 x 487mm Min 100 x 148 mm 1 Non sort mode only 2 mode is 128 x 148 mm 8 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Type of paper 1 Stapling mode 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Paper size B4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 BSS A5 12x18 11 x 17 85 x 14 8 x 11 8 2 x 115 8 x 13 8 x 18 8 5 x 1814 Bx 13 8K 16K 16KS Tab paper A4 8 x 11 Custom paper Max 314 x 458 mm Min 182 x 148 mm Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper color paper coated paper same as the main body Paper weight 64 to 105 g m 1 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured 2 Saddle stitching mode Paper size SRA4S 45 12x18 11 x 17 8 5 14 8 x 115 8K Custom paper Max 314 x 458 mm Min 210 x 280 mm Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper color paper coated paper Paper weight 64 to 105 g m 3 Folding mode Paper size SRA3 B4 SRA4S 45 12x18 11 x 17 8 2 x14 85 x11S 8K Custom paper Max 314 x 458 mm Min 210 x 280 mm Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper color paper coated paper Paper weight 64 to 105 g m2 4 Tri folding mode Paper size
177. 14 mm or more For the large size paper the bundle arm assist motor M26 rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal 1 turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate to the standby position in accordance with the paper size 2 and stands by for the paper The subsequent operation is conducted in the same manner as for the small size paper SD 501 8 Bundle arm assist Forward um motor 26 Reverse Bundle arm assist home sensor P538 Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor P539 Clincher up Forward down motor M20 Reverse i Bundle arm Forward rotation motor M22 Reverse 1 3 4 15ant2c096na 1 Main body start signal 5 Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm lt Lu z a 2 Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size 6 Assist of the bundle arm conveyance 3 Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate Bundle arm moved in accordance with the 4 Clincher moved down paper size 8 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode 78 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 73 8 Bundle clip control A Mechanism The bundle clip is the mechanism to hold the paper that the bundle arm conveyed to the slope and convey the paper to the bundle press stage with its fore edge side to the trimmer section The bundle c
178. 2 a052t2c003ca 1 Conveyance 5 Separation roller 2 PS302 6 X Paper feed roller 3 Registration roller 7 Pick up roller 4 PS301 B No paper sensor PS304 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 A Single sided mode 7 The paper feed motor M301 switches to high speed 1 and the pick up roller is pressed against the origi nals set to the original feed tray he pick up roller conveys the originals to the paper feed roller and the separation roller DF 609 T 3 The paper feed roller conveys a piece of original at the top and the separation roller keeps the rest of the originals from being transferred The original is conveyed until it hits the registration roller and the original forms a loop to correct skew 2 5 M301 pauses after the specified time and the registration clutch MC301 turns OFF to release the registra ion roller 3 After the specified time M301 rotates in reverse at low speed and the registration roller nips the original 4 After the specified time has elapsed from when the timing sensor PS302 has turned ON M301 is turned off once 5 and starts rotating again in reverse at high speed 6 at the same time as the conveyance motor M302 is turned on Then the original is conveyed to the conveyance belt of the conveyance section amp After the specified time has elapsed from when PS302 has turned ON M301 turns off 7 9 The rest of the originals are
179. 2 on the bundle press section comes in the upright position and the trimmer regis tration sensor PS55 1 turns ON The bundle exit claws 9 are located at the 180 opposite to the registration claws on the belt M12 rotates in the reverse direction 10 to exit the paper at the paper exit The home position of the registration claws 4 is detected when the registration claws push the actuator 11 and turns ON the bundle registration home sensor PS34 12 om 13 oT A PO 12 ma KO O n 7 i 5 10 9 7 6 15ant2c060na 1 Trimmer registration sensor PS55 8 Bundle sensor 4 PS54 2 Actuator 9 Bundle exit claws 3 Registration direction 10 Drive direction of the bundle exit tabs 4 Registration claws 11 Actuator 5 Left side view 12 Bundle registration home sensor PS34 6 Bundle sensor 2 PS15 13 Bundle registration plate 7 Bundle press section 14 Paper 97 SD 501 lt 5 7 a SD 501 lt LLI a amp x 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 98 B Control The bundle registration motor M12 rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal turns ON and the registration claws move to the standby positio
180. 2 0 Sep 2006 7 3 6 Bundle arm control The bundle arm 4 rotates and moves in the sub scan direction It rotates to convey the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section and moves in the sub scan direction to catch release the paper In the multi center folding mode the bundle arm rotates to the stapling position after the last paper of the set is conveyed In the saddle stitching mode it rotates after the stapling operation By moving the bundle arm the tip of the bundle arm is inserted under the fold line of the paper and the paper is caught 1 The caught paper is conveyed to the bundle clip section 2 by the rotation of the bundle arm The bundle arm moves in at the foldi he outside of the sub scan direction and releases the paper 8 when the bundle clip holds the paper ng side 2 15ant2c043na 1 Paper catch 3 Paper release 70 4 Bundle arm Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION A Bundle arm movement mechanism The bundle arm 5 is driven by the bundle arm motor M10 6 to catch release the paper 4 in the sub scan direction via the belt The bundle arm home sensor PS32 1 detects the home position of the bundle arm 4 5 6 7 a 3 15ant2c044na 1 Bundle arm home sensor PS32 4 Paper 2 Front side direction 5 Bundle
181. 2 0 Sep 2006 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION B Overlap control 1 Multi letter folding mode control In the multi letter folding mode up to 5 sheets are stacked in the right angle conveyance section and conveyed to the folding section The multi letter folding is available only with paper of 50 to 91 g m in weight and is SD 501 unavailable with others The overlap motor M13 turns ON when the main body start signal 1 turns ON and moves the overlap stopper upward to its standby position Turning ON the right angle conveyance gate solenoid SD2 3 after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor PS1 detects the trailing edge of the paper the right angle conveyance gate is switched M13 moves the paper upward 4 and isolate the paper from the conveyance gate by transferring it to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate Turning OFF SD2 5 the conveyance gate opens and waits for the subsequent paper Conveying the subsequent paper through the right side of the right angle conveyance gate 6 and detecting the trailing edge of paper by the entrance sensor PS1 7 M13 moves the overlap stopper downward 8 When the trailing edge of paper passes under the right angle conveyance gate SD2 turns ON 9 to switch the right angle conveyance gate and M13 moves up the overlap stopper 10 to send the conveyed sheets of paper to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate Then SD2 turns OFF 11 and stands by for the
182. 2 holes is contrary to it on the right and left sides When the switching cam is rotated counterclock wise the punching blade is driven 2 2to 4 holes mode In the 2 to 4 holes mode the 2 punching blades at both ends are driven only when the switching cam is rotated clockwise in the same way as in the 2 to 3 hole mode As the 2 punching blades at the center should be driven in both cases of 2 or 4 hole punching shape of the groove of the switching cam is symmetrical on the right and left sides and both the front and rear sides are curved in the rotating axis direction Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Punch control PK 513 Transmitting the start signal from the main body the FNS conveyance motor M1 rotates In the punch mode M1 stops temporarily a specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the trailing edge of the paper At the same time the punch motor M301 9 drives the shaft 10 to rotate a full circle The eccentric cams 2 rotate in sync with the shaft to move down the punch blade 1 to conduct the punch operation M301 stops and the punch operation is completed when the punch home sensor PS301 8 turns ON 1 rotates again to convey the paper a specified period of time after it stops temporarily 4 PUNCH SECTION 15kjt2c001na 1 2 SI 4 5 Punch blade Eccentric cam Punch home sensor PS301 Punch blade at the lower position Drive arm 6 7
183. 22 FM7 Paper feed assist fans Fr11 FM1 and Fr21 5 Air blowing Shutter solenoids Fr1 SD2 and Fr2 SD6 Papers 75 PF 601 HT 504 lt co 5 wn o a 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 A Operation timing When the coated paper is selected in the paper setting the paper feed assist fans Fr11 1 Fr12 FM3 Rr11 FM2 and Rr12 FM4 or the paper feed assist fans Fr21 5 Fr22 FM7 Rr21 FM6 and Rr22 8 of corresponding tray start to operate when the START button is pressed PF 601 HT 504 B Open close shutter control Amount of air blow is adjusted by the shutter solenoids Fr1 502 8 Rr1 503 2 Fr2 506 8 and Rr2 507 2 When the SD2 SD3 SD6 07 turn on the shutters are closed to increase the air blow The SD2 SD3 SD6 SD7 keep turning off and on for a specified period of time after the start button is turned on Air blow operation is performed once between turning on of the start button and start of paper feed 2 e The SD2 503 506 and 507 can be forced off using DipSW4 0 Paper feed motor M1 Paper feed assist fans Fr11 Fr12 FM3 Rr11 Rr12 FM4 Fr21 7 Rr21 FM6 Rr22 FM8 5 Fr22 FMS Shutter solenoids Fr1 SD2 Rr1 SD3 Fr2 SD6 Rr2 SD7 lt LLI z
184. 25 41 to 50 20 51 to 60 15 61 to 100 10 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A Sub tray Weighing 50 to 300 g m SRA3 B4 SRA4 2 SRA4S A4 MS B5 BSS A5 A5S 2 B6S A6S 18x 19 12 x 18 11 x 17 872x 14 8 x 11 8 2 x 115 51 2 x 821 51 x 8 58S 81 2 x 13 81 4 x 13 8 s x 131 8 x 18 8 16K 8 16KS Tab 4 B4 4 45 B5 55 11 x 17 8o x 11 8 2 x 115 custom size Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140 mm Custom paper 1050 324 x 460 mm Min 182 140 mm C6500 Max 330 x 487 mm Min 100 x 148 mm Wide paper B4 A4 45 B5 BSS A5 12 x 18 11 x 17 81 2 x 11 8 x 115 51 2 x 8175 Size entry Max 324 x 460 mm 4 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China 4 C6500 only A4 and 8 x11 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured C Type of paper 1 Staple A Paper size 2 B4 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 5 12x18 11x 17 8 2 x 14 81 2 x 11 8 2 x 115 5 x 81 8 x 18 81 4 x 18 8 s x 18 4 8 x 18 8K 8 16K 9 Tab BA 4 45 B5 B5S 11 x 17 81 2 x 11 81 2 x 115 custom size Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x140 mm Custom paper 1050 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140 mm C6500 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 210 x 148 mm
185. 2c008na 1 FNS start signal turned ON 4 Moving to the folding position for the paper size 2 Moving to the saddle stitching position for 5 Moving to the saddle stitching position for the paper size the subsequent copy 3 Stapling operation 35 FS 607 lt LLI S z a a S 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 96 3 Tri folding mode Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body 1 the saddle stitching stopper motor M18 rotates 2 to move down the saddle stitching stopper to the stopping position in accordance with the paper size After completing the alignment operation of the last paper 3 M18 rotates 4 to move down the saddle stitching stopper to the 1st folding position in the tri folding After completing the folding operation when the folding paper exit sensor PS25 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle M18 rotates 5 to move up the saddle stitching stopper to the alignment position in accordance with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy Alignment motor Up M5 Alignment motor Lw M16 Saddle stitching stopper home sensor PS23 paaa Saddle stitching stop UP H tor M18 motor 18 DOWN Folding paper exit sensor PS25 1 1 2 4 5 15jmt2c007na 1 start signal turned ON 4 Moving to the 1st folding position
186. 2c010na 5 1 start signal turned ON 4 1st paper of the 2nd copy 2 Paper transferred to the stacker in low speed 5 2nd paper of the 2nd copy 8 3 gt edge of the last paper of the 1st 6 1st and 2nd paper of the 2nd copy trans copy detected ferred simultaneously When transferring the 3rd and following paper of the 2nd and following copies the paper is transferred to the stacker by the same operation for the paper of the 1st copy 39 FS 607 lt Lu z a 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 40 8 Folding saddle stitching mode Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body 1 the stacker entrance motor M13 turns ON and rotates in high speed M13 rotates in low speed 2 to transfer the paper in low speed when the stacker entrance sensor PS5 detects the trailing edge of the paper M13 rotates in high speed and stands by for the subsequent paper after a speci fied period of time since it rotates in low speed M13 stops after completing the alignment operation 4 of the last paper of the copy 3 M13 turns ON and rotates in high speed to stand by for the subsequent paper when the folding paper exit sen sor PS25 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle 5 3 6 Stacker entrance sensor PS5 Stacker entrance High speed motor M13 Low speed Alignment motors
187. 2c055ca 1 Print start signal 3 Second pick up 2 First pick up lt ec 5 7 a 77 16 BYPASS FEED TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Separation mechanism The separation roller 4 is driven in the opposite 1 to the paper feed direction 8 via the torque limiter 6 The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller 10 by means of the spring 5 force 9 and the pressure applied from the torque limiter The friction force between the separation roller and the paper feed roller is limited by the torque limiter in order to prevent multi feed bizhub PRO C6500 When no paper exists between the separation roller and the paper feed roller or when the only one sheet of paper is present the separation roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of arrow 3 since the torque is over the limit When multiple sheets of paper are fed the separation roller reverses the direction of rotation 7 opposite to the paper feed roller and feeds the lower paper 2 that contacts with the separation roller back to the tray 1 The drop in frictional force between the two rollers due to the multiple sheets causes the counter rotat ing of the separation roller z lt ui 2 a a o a03ut2c092ca 1 To the tray 6 Torque limiter 2 Second sheet of paper
188. 4 Moving to the folding position for the paper size 2 Moving to the alignment position for the 5 Moving to the alignment position for the paper size subsequent copy 3 Last paper of the copy aligned 34 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 2 Saddle stitching mode Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body 1 the saddle stitching stopper motor M18 rotates 2 to move down the saddle stitching stopper to the stopping position in accordance with the paper size After completing the stapling operation 3 the alignment motors Up M5 and Lw M16 open the alignment plate and M18 rotates 4 to move down the saddle stitching stopper to the folding position After completing the folding operation when the folding paper exit sensor PS25 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle M18 rotates 5 to move up the saddle stitching stopper to the saddle stitching position in accor e dance with the paper size and stand for the paper of the subsequent copy 3 Stapler motor Fr M14 Clincher motor Fr M15 Stapler motor Rr M9 Clincher motor Rr M10 Alignment motor Up M5 Alignment motor Lw M16 Saddle stitching stopper home sensor P523 i 5 Saddle stitching stop UP n E per motor M18 B DOWN 6 1 2 Folding paper exit sensor PS25 H 2 4 5 15jmi
189. 5kt2c014na 1 start signal turned ON 2 Opening the paper exit opening 8 Closing the paper exit opening 4 Paper exit opening closed 23 FS 607 lt LLI a a S 4 TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 24 4 3 9 Sub tray paper exit control The sub tray paper exit motor M21 controlled by the FNS control board FNSCB drives the sub tray paper exit roller A Sub tray paper exit motor M21 control The sub tray paper exit motor M21 rotates in high speed when the sub tray paper exit sensor PS1 detects the leading edge of the paper M21 rotates in low speed after a specified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the trail ing edge of the paper M21 stops after a specified period of time since PS1 detects the trailing edge of the paper B Sub tray full detection When the exited paper on the sub tray reached to a specified thickness the sub tray full sensor PS19 turns ON and the sub tray full information is sent to the main body Then the main body displays the message on its dis play panel Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 MAIN TRAY SECTION 5 MAIN TRAY SECTION 54 Composition FS 607 Paper exit unit Main tray exit roller KA Main tray Lift wire an lt ul 6 z 7 6 a04dt2c004ca 25 5 MAIN T
190. 6 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 6 3 2 Reverse paper exit control 1 Operation n reverse conveyance mode the paper exit solenoid SD301 is set to OFF while the reverse solenoid SD302 is set to ON The original 3 from the conveyance section wraps around the reverse roller 2 by the paper exit gate 1 Then through the reverse gate that is turned ON 6 the original slides under 5 the conveyance belt 4 and is returned to the conveyance section 5 4 05212 021 1 Paper exit gate OFF 4 Conveyance belt 2 Reverse roller 5 Sliding under the conveyance belt 3 Original 6 Reverse gate ON 29 DF 609 lt 5 7 a DF 609 lt 2 a o a 6 REVERSE PAPER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 Control 7 After the front side scan is performed 1 the conveyance motor M302 2 conveys the original from the conveyance section and then the reverse paper exit motor M303 conveys it to the reverse path that is set the paper exit solenoid SD301 OFF and the original is fed around the reverse roller 3 2 When the reverse solenoid SD302 is turned on 4 the reverse gate sets the conveyance direction toward the conveyance belt Then the original starts returning 5 to the conveyance section while sl
191. 7 lt 6 z D 3 Bundle press stage 8 223 Bundle registration drive 4 3 2 15ant2c053na 1 Exit claws A 4 Registration claws 2 Leftside view 5 Bundle registration home sensor 534 3 Bundle press stage 6 Bundle registration motor M12 A 85 lt e LLI a amp z 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION N 86 8 2 4 Bundle press drive Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 15ant2c054nb 1 2 3 4 5 Bundle press plate Up Release wire Rt Wire winding shaft Bundle press motor M23 Release wire Lt 6 7 8 9 Front side direction Bundle press lower limit sensor PS47 Bundle press home sensor PS37 Spring Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 A 825 Bun dle exit drive 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION O 3 15ant2c055nb Q WN Left s exit conveyance belt ide view exit drive belt Actuator Belt Bund e exit motor M5 One way clutch for the bundle exit convey ance belt 8 9 10 11 12
192. 7 Reverse Bundle press Forward COMPOSITION OPERATION motor M23 Reverse Bundle press movement home sensor P536 Trimmer registration sensor P955 Bundle press stage up down home sensor P535 Trimmer blade motor M31 5 15ant2c102na 1 Conveyed by the bundle clip 7 Stopped at the press position 2 Moved to the paper conveyance position B Searching the home position 3 gt Moved to the press standby position 9 Moved to the trimming position 4 Home position detected 10 Returning to the home position 5 Bundle press stage moved down 6 Searching the press position Only for the paper of 297 mm or more before folding 93 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 2 No trimming mode The bundle press movement motor 17 rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to he paper conveyance position 2 after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor M11 starts con veying the paper 1 Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appro priate press position in accordance with the paper size 3 17 rotates in the forward direction to return the bundle press section to the home position 5 when the bundle press stage up down home sensor 535 detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down 4 LO D 1 2 5 Bundle clip For
193. 8 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION 11 1 Configuration Color registration sensor shutter Fr Color registration sensor shutter Rr Bett cleaning blade Toner guide roller P d First transfer roller Y I 7 K First transfer roller C sensor shutter First transfer roller M Second transfer roller Lw Image correction unit EO First transfer roller K Separation claw unit a03ut2c032ca Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 11 2 Drive 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION 11 2 1 Transfer belt conveyance pressure drive 10 a03ut2c033ca 1 First transfer roller Y 9 driving roller Drum 10 Standby all released 3 First transfer roller M 11 Black and white mode Only first transfer rollers K is pressed 4 First transfer roller C 12 Full color mode all pressed 5 First transfer roller K 13 First transfer roller K pressure release arm 6 First transfer pressure release motor M19 14 Drive coupling 7 Transfer belt 15 First transfer roller K pressure release cam 8 Transfer belt motor M18 16 First transfer rollers Y M C pressure release cam 49 bizhub PRO C6500 lt ul gt 77
194. 8 Saddle stitching alignment plate Rt 8 7 2 2 gt Saddle stitching hold drive AA pa 3 nt2c030na 1 Saddle stitching hold Up 5 Eccentric cam 2 6 Saddle stitching press home sensor PS27 3 Left side view 7 Saddle stitching hold motor M21 4 Spring B 57 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 2 8 Clincher up down drive LO D lt z a 5 4 3 15ant2c031na x 1 Left side view 5 Clincher up down motor M20 2 Roller 6 Spring B Eccentric cam 7 Clinchers Rt Lt 4 Clincher up down home sensor PS26 8 Saddle stitching hold Lw 52 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTIO 7 2 4 Stapler clincher movement drive Lo e 4 lt e z 77 e 15ant2c032na 1 Top side view 5 Stapler movement home sensor PS25 2 Stapler Rt 6 Stapler movement motor M15 3 Clincher Rt 7 Clincher Lt 4 Front side view B Stapler Lt 53 SD 501 lt Lu z a 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 54 7 2 5 Stapler clincher drive Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006
195. 8 and 3 14 The folding rollers 2 and 3 are pressured each other by the spring 15 The 2nd folding blade is driven by the 2nd blade motor M19 10 via the crank mechanism 11 The folding sensor 2 PS44 9 the folding sensor 1 PS7 1 and the folding passage sensor PS8 12 detect he paper 10 11 12 13 14 15 9 8 3 15ant2c024na 1 Folding sensor 1 57 9 Folding sensor 2 PS44 2 Spring 10 2nd folding blade motor M19 3 Folding roller 2 11 Crank mechanism 4 1st folding blade motor M18 12 Folding passage sensor PS8 5 Crank mechanism 13 2nd folding blade 6 Right side view 14 Folding roller 3 7 tst folding blade 15 Spring 8 Folding roller 1 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION B Tri folding control 1 Operation After the initial operation the 1st folding blade 8 is at the standby position 1 5 In the actuator 7 the 1st fold ing blade home sensor 2 PS21 8 turns ON and the 1st folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 6 turns OFF When the paper 9 is conveyed to the folding section and the 1st folding blade motor M18 is rotated 2 the crank 4 rotates 90 to project the 1st folding blade to the paper and push the paper 12 between the folding roller 1 10 and 2 11 with its edge At the time the actuator also rotates 90 so that PS21 3 and PS20
196. AM 8 PAPER PATHE M UTE 4 CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 PAPERFEED SECTION hae xod ERE e AAA E NGA 5 AN EE EE 5 AS kuwa aya M aeq 6 AZI May 6 APL PapecToad se eee da Wise dea Gals en r aote e n ee aH WI 7 LI ME C 000 PT 8 43 Operedlon ssarsassssosvaner anqa Rad Ada saa 9 45 1 Plate up down ARN EE RD e e 9 43 2 Papersize detection u u sss eee ar E ERG RAS E 10 433 Pickup ies uu sadesa kint i OEE REESE DAES eo ds 13 A94 Separalon a au dE seg 14 205 M de RP 15 2935 Paperemply detection COItt l edd e debe re dedo es eda kw ate 17 43 7 Remaining paper detection control ee bade eee bes ERROR e E 18 238 T r Dekor GAGA KANG qupa saq dees ee TOR 18 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION a REPE PBA PADA ERA Cw ER 19 5d COMOUISION six Nuus ead ER RR NE We qd acea d ORE a 19 52 aga 20 CONES os PIC 21 5 9 01 Fe NOG ed esce Ww espe pace ee ere ad E dor oo d ddp bon ren 21 502 Oonveyance ludos periere ke x ccn ee se ew Cem
197. According to the obtained drift amounts the registration control is performed 38 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 WRITE SECTION D Operation condition of the color registration control The color registration control is performed when Operation condition 1 The color registration automatic correction is executed in the service mode Be sure to perform the above operation when replacing components listed in 9 LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS in Field Service manual Operation condition 2 During warm up However it is not performed if 70 degrees C or higher of fusing temperature is detected when starting the warm up Operation condition 3 The prescribed number of pages are copied printed Operation condition 4 A copy print job is received after the specified time passed Operation condition 5 Changes in temperature detected by the temperature detection board TDB fall outside the prescribed range The control is performed when a copy print job is received first time after the status occurs bizhub PRO C6500 NOTE n case of the Operation condition 3 the registration control is performed interrupting the copy print job This can be changed with DIPSW in service mode to carry out the control after finishing a copy print job In case of the Operation condition 4 and 5 the color registration correction control is performed at the beginning of the first copy print after unity of the operating condition
198. B m 5 15jt2c007na 1 FS start signal turned ON 4 Registration clutch MC203 turned ON 2 Tray reached at the upper limit 5 Trailing edge of the paper passed the paper 3 Paper reached the paper passage sensors passage sensors Up PS201 and Lw Up PS201 and Lw PS206 PS206 71 PI 502 2 o lt e LLI z a amp o 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 12 4 3 5 Paper size detection control The paper size VRs Up VR201 1 and Lw VR202 3 coupled with the side guide 2 detects the paper size in he main scan direction The paper set sensors Up PS203 5 and Lw PS212 4 and the L size sensor Lw PS208 6 detects the paper size in the sub scan direction 6 15jft2c008na 1 Paper size VR Up 201 4 Paper set sensor Lw PS212 2 Side guide plate 5 Paper set sensor Up PS203 3 Paper size VR Lw VR202 6 L size sensor PS208 SS Se IKONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL PK 512 513 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve ment of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual
199. CT 2 Display the total number of printed sheets in black and white print modes Mechanical counter driven by electrical signals Counts up by paper exit signal Electrical counter Display the total number of printed sheets on the LCD board LCDB Data collection 1 Counts up by paper exit signal and stores the data in NVRAM board NRB For key counter KCT Counter to disable copy operation when count up to the set print See P 314 Option number removable Mechanical counter driven by electrical signals 1 Refer to 10 6 Counter data in the main unit field service manual for information on the collected data COMPOSITION OPERATION 3 a03ut2c097ca 1 2 130 Total counter 1 Total counter 2 TCT 3 Key counter Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 OTHER CONTROLS 25 4 Dehumidifier heater control o o 8 A Configuration EE o swt CBRA 5 CBR 2 SW3 RY 2 0 0 o f I HTR LU PF OPTION i HTR1 m HTR2 i J lama 2 ACDB a03ut2c098ca E E B Operation The dehumidifier heater switch SW3 supplies AC power to the sub relay RY 2 inside the AC drive board Pr a ACDB When the main power switch SW1 is OFF the RY 2 can transmit the power to the dehumidifier heater HTR and the dehumidifier heater 1 HTR1
200. D SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 Control for large sized paper f 2 The pre registration for the 1st sheet of paper is carried out in the same manner as that for small sized paper MC102 turns on again 1 after the 2nd paper hits against the pre registration roller and turns off 2 when a predetermined time period has elapsed after the LU exit sensor PS107 detects the leading edge of paper then keeps the off status until the rear end of the 1st paper is detected by PS27 in the main body When PS27 detects the rear end of the 1st paper the MC102 turns on 3 to convey the 2nd paper and turns off 4 when the leading edge of the 2nd paper is detected by the PS27 The MC102 turns on again 5 when PS28 detects the rear end of the 1st paper and turns off 6 when PS28 detects the leading edge of the 2nd paper When a predetermined time period has elapsed after a V TOP signal is issued when a printing process for the 1st paper is finished MC102 turns on again 7 to convey the 2nd paper and turns off to stop the conveyance when a predetermined time period has elapsed after PS106 detects the rear end of the paper 4 6 8 p 331 E Paper feed motor M1 Paper feed clutch MC101 Pick up solenoid SD100 Pre registration clutch PS102 Pre registrations sensor PS106 LU exit sensor PS107 ntermediate conveyance sensor 1 PS27 ntermediate conveyance senso
201. Entrance gate solenoid control The entrance gate switches the path to the horizontal conveyance section and one to the right angle convey ance section The switch is conducted by the entrance gate solenoid 501 The right angle conveyance path is selected when SD1 turns OFF and the horizontal conveyance path is selected when it turns ON In the coupling exit mode and the subtray exit mode SD1 turns ON and sets the entrance gate to the horizontal conveyance section when the main body print signal turns ON SD1 turns OFF after the paper exit B Horizontal conveyance gate control The horizontal conveyance gate switches the path to the subtray section and the coupling conveyance path to the succeeding device The switch is conducted by the horizontal conveyance gate solenoid 503 The cou pling conveyance path is selected when SD3 turns OFF and the subtray path is selected when it turns ON 4 3 2 Conveyance line speed switch control The conveyance is conducted by the entrance conveyance motor M1 and the horizontal conveyance motor 2 1 and M2 turn ON when the main body start signal 1 turns ON M1 switches its rotational speed in accor dance with the main body line speed 8 when the main body exit sensor turns ON 2 Then it switches its rota ional speed to high speed 4 to convey the paper when it receives the paper trailing edge signal when the paper trailing edge passes through the fusing 2 Main body exit sensor Entr
202. FNS control board FNSCB controls the bypass gate solenoid SD5 When stapling 2 sheets of paper for 3 copies SD5 operates as follows 1 For the 1st copy When the paper for the 1st copy is transferred the bypass gate solenoid SD5 does not operate 2 For the 2nd copy The bypass gate solenoid SD5 turns ON and draws the 1st paper of the 2nd copy to the bypass after a speci fied period of time since the staple operation for the 1st copy is started 4 SD5 turns OFF after a specified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the trailing edge of the paper 6 3 For the 3rd and following copies The bypass gate 505 turns ON and draws the 1st paper of the 3rd copy to the bypass after a specified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the trailing edge of the last paper of the 2nd copy 7 SD5 turns OFF after a specified period o time since PS4 detects the trailing edge of the paper 8 FNS entrance sensor PS4 FNS transfer motor M1 Bypass gate solenoid SD5 Stapler movement motor M1 1 1 2 3 14 59 7 181 1 The ist copy 2 The 2nd copy 3 The 3rd copy 5 Drawing the 1st paper of the 2nd copy to the bypass 6 Trailing edge of the 1st paper of the 2nd copy 4 Stapling operation for the 1st copy started 7 Trailing edge of the last paper of the 2nd copy 8 edge of the 1st paper of th
203. H H FJ LU paper feed Tray 1 paper feed nh molem i ertical gt conveyance 5 9 g DN ic Tray 3 paper feed a03ut1c003ca bizhub PRO C6500 OUTLINE 4 PAPER PATH 70 Blank page Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM B CONFIGURATION OPERATION o O o 5 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM a 3 T N a NRB USB RS232C LAN Parallel cop i ic i V il IMCB FS 2 1 FD 1811801 PF DE O 1 0 9 Write a PRCB 4 Ps MPS M MaE PS gt EI lt gt Image bus Clock SYN UART bus Other buses Individual signal IDE line a03ut2c001ca Board name Functions ISW Overall control board OACB Performs overall control of the Yes Image memory control board Controls image memory DRAM HDD Option No IMCB Image processing board IPB Controls various image processing No Printer control board PRCB Controls printer mechanism load applied to the components Yes Such as motors fans solenoids and sensors NVRAM board NRB Performs vario
204. ING TRI FOLDING SECTION 8 3 3 Tri folding gate control The tri folding gate switches between the folding saddle stitching path and the tri folding path The tri folding gate solenoid SD6 drives the tri folding gate FS 607 A Tri folding 2nd folding operation The tri folding gate solenoid 506 5 drives the tri folding gate 6 to switch the paper path to the tri folding path for leading the paper exited from the folding roller 1 to the tri folding stopper 4 To perform the 2nd folding the loop 2 formed when the paper contacts with the tri folding stopper are drawn between the folding roller and the tri folding roller 3 Then the paper is exited to the booklet tray 8 The position of the tri folding stopper determines the folding position in the 2nd folding 9 COMPOSITION OPERATION 15jmt2c022na 1 Folding roller 6 Tri folding gate 2 Loop 7 Paper 3 Tri folding roller B Booklet tray 4 Tri folding stopper 9 Folding paper exit sensor PS25 5 Tri folding gate solenoid 506 B Tri folding gate control After the saddle stitching stopper stops at the tri folding position the tri folding gate solenoid SD6 5 turns ON and drive the tri folding gate 6 to switch the paper path to the tri folding stopper SD6 turns OFF after a specified period of time since the folding paper exit sensor PS25 9 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle 55 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCHI
205. M10 completes the shelter operation 5 M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle clip 6 bundle clip lower limit sensor PS30 turns ON 11 rotates in the forward direc he bundle clip opens the clip to release the paper 7 and M11 stops when the ion to move up the bundle clip after a specified period of time since M11 stops Then M11 stops to move the bundle clip at the standby position for the subsequent set after a specified period of time since PS30 turns OFF 8 Bundle arm Forward motor M10 Reverse Bundle arm Forward rotation motor M22 Reverse Bundle arm assist motor M26 Bundle clip Forward motor M11 4 Reverse Bundle clip upper limit sensor PS33 Bundle clip lower limit motor PS30 i D 4 6 71 15ant20099na 1 Assisting operation by the bundle arm 5 Bundle arm shelter operation 2 Bundle clip opened 6 gt Conveyed by the bundle clip 3 Paper conveyance by the bundle arm completed Paper released 4 Paper caught B Returned to the standby position for the sub sequent set Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION A 8 1 Composition 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Bundle press stage Trimmer scraps removal fan FM1 Up down wire plate Bundle regis tration plate Bundle press Exit claws Bundle tray paper full se
206. N 2 Paper exited to the main tray lt Lu z a 2 Stapling mode Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body the tray lift motor M3 lifts up the tray until the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS2 turns ON The tray lift motor lifts down the main tray after a specified period of time since the paper exit roller motor 7 turns ON After a specified period of time M3 rotates in the reverse direction to lift up the main tray and hen stops when the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS7 turns OFF 400 mm s Ex Paper exit roller motor 7 253 mm s Reverse i Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS7 Tray lift motor M3 UP DOWN 1 1 1 3 4 15jkt2c018na 1 start signal turned ON 3 Main tray lifted down 2 Paper bundle exited to the main tray 4 Main tray lifted up 28 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 6 1 Composition 6 STACKER SECTION Alignment plate Up Paper exit arm Paper exit belt Stacker empty sensor PS5 Swing belt Flat stapling stopper Saddle stitching stopper home sensor PS23 Saddle stitching stopper PS20 O KK NS Stacker entrance sensor SN FG or Mit 8 Alignment home sensor Up PS8 Paper exit belt home sensor PS9 Stacker entrance motor M13
207. N Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 N 4 Shutter mechanism When the spring 10 pushes the scraps press plate 2 to its backmost position the shutter arm 6 is pushed up and the shutter 9 is opened On the other hand the shutter is closed when the scraps press plate is moved for ward from the back most position to the position 3 by the spring of the shutter arm SD 501 Opening the shutter allows the guide sheet 7 which is attached to the shutter to be straightened 8 due to the ension Closing the shutter allows slack in the guide sheet to widen the dropping path of scraps Before trimming the scraps press plate moves 50 mm 3 from the backmost position and stops to be ready for rimming The shutter repeats opening closing operation by shuttling the scraps press plate 50mm back and forth in each rimming operation This shutter operation creates vibration with the guide sheet to shake off the trimmer scraps 8 9 10 lt LLI a amp x TER il 4 m 15ant2c117na 1 Front side direction 6 Shutter arm 2 Scraps press plate Guide sheet 3 Shutter closing position B Guide sheet straightened 4 Shutter opening position 9 Shutter 5 Scraps press claws 10 Spring 102 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Tr
208. NG TRI FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 FS 607 lt Lu z a Blank page 56 SS Se IKONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL PI 502 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve ment of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the corresponding page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0
209. NS signal turned ON 5 Closing the paper exit opening 2 Opening the paper exit opening 6 Paper exit opening closed 3 Paper exit arm home position Paper exit arm home position 4 Stapling operation completed Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 IRANSFER SECTION 4 3 7 Paper exit opening solenoid control The paper exit roller is usually releasing the nip except when exiting the paper because its rotation is slower than the transfer roller However the nip movable section moves to nip the paper when the paper reaches to the paper exit opening e e A Paper exit opening solenoid operation When the paper reaches to the paper exit opening the paper exit opening solenoid SD4 1 moves the nip movable section 2 to nip the paper by pressurizing the nip roller 4 to the main tray paper exit roller 8 and exit the paper to the main tray direction 5 The main tray paper exit sensor PS6 6 detects the paper exit i 2 lt z 15jkt2c011na N e 1 Paper exit opening solenoid 504 4 Nip roller s x 2 Nip movable section 5 Tothe main tray 3 Main tray exit roller 6 Main tray paper exit sensor PS6 B Timing to turn ON the paper exit opening solenoid 1 Non sort sort group mode The paper exit opening solenoid SD4 turns ON after a specified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the trailing edge of the paper 2 Stapli
210. O tc D d N a lt amp 1 a03ut2c063ca a e 8 1 ADU gate 3 ADU reverse roller 8 2 Reverse roller Lw 4 ADU loop roller 5 gt 88 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 19 ADU SECTION B Loop formation When the ADU stop sensor PS20 3 detects the rear end of paper and turns OFF ADU loop roller 5 stops after the specified time passed While the paper is stopped with its leading edge nipped by the ADU loop roller the ADU reverse roller 4 continues to rotate The ADU reverse roller stops after the rear end of the paper passed through after the specified time passed from when the ADU loop roller stops The above two rollers operation make the paper form a loop 1 between the two rollers e When the paper is forming the loop its rear edge is pressed against the ADU reverse roller This enables to correct skew of the paper before starting the reverse paper conveyance bizhub PRO C6500 3 4 5 2 1 a03ut2c064ca lt ul z a e a 1 Loop 4 ADU reverse roller 2 ADU gate 5 ADU loop roller B PS20 89 19 ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Paper reverse When the ADU reverse roller 6 stops the ADU gate 4 closes After the specified time passed from when the ADU reverse roller stops the ADU lo
211. ON 11 17 279 4 O ON lid B Detection timing 1 DF mode e Refer to DF 609 2 Platen mode The original size in the main scanning direction is detected twice and the larger one is regarded as the orig inal size APS sensor 1 PS3 APS sensor 2 PS4 Exposure lamp L1 APS timing sensor 1 PS2 Read switch RS a03ut2c023ca 1 First Original size detection 2 Second original size detection main scan Main scanning Sub scanning direction ning direction detection 29 7 SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 3 3 Original reading area The original reading area for both in platen mode and DF mode is determined as described below A When the automatic Erase outside of original is turned ON Out of original auto reading area equals to the max original size bizhub PRO C6500 B When the automatic Erase outside of original is turned OFF The scanning size specified in the user setting menu Erase outside of original equals to the original reading area Setting for Erase outside of original Mode Scanning size Erase outside of original All Original size Auto size Auto magnification only Auto size Auto magnifi Original size cation Manual Paper size Except original Glass 1 1 Equal magnification to Paper size platen Other than equal magni Original size fication to platen 7 3 4 AE ACS cont
212. P Separation N roller Up ra y Conveyance ais ler Up Paper feed Conveyance roller Lw Pick up roller Lw Separation roller Lw a04ht2c001ca F4 E lt z 77 a PI 502 lt c LLI a amp S 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 Drive 4 2 1 Paper feed drive 1 2 3 4 5 14 13 2 18 15jft2c002nb 1 Pick up roller Lw 10 Paper feed roller Lw 2 Pick up roller Up 11 Conveyance roller Lw 3 Pick up solenoid Up 50201 12 Separation roller Lw 4 Paper feed roller Up 18 Pick up solenoid Lw SD202 5 Transfer clutch MC201 14 Transfer motor M203 6 Separation roller Up 15 Pick up solenoid Up SD201 Lw SD202 7 Transfer clutch Lw MC202 16 Front 8 gt Conveyance roller Up 17 Pick up roller Up and Lw 9 Registration clutch MC203 18 Paper feed roller Up and Lw Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 2 2 Tray lift drive PI 502 1 15jft2c003nb 1 Front 3 Tray lift motor Up M201 2 lift motor Lw M202 lt 6 z E 77 a 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Tray lift mechanism The tray lift
213. PS1 is 21 85 mm 3 The resolution is 0 125 with 1728 dots LU 202 HT 503 5 6 1 N innen 0 MI m a03wt2c014ca 1 Paper 4 Center of the paper 2 Origin point of the sensor 5 Detection range 3 between sensor origin and paper 6 Centering sensor PS1 ter E lt ul 6 z 77 a 79 COMPOSITION OPERATION 5 UP DOWN SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 5 UP DOWN SECTION 5 1 Configuration Upper limit Sensor PS109 Paper lift plate Paper sensor lift motor PS101 M100 Lift wire a03wt2c015ca Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 UP DOWN SECTION 5 2 Drive LU 202 HT 503 lt 5 7 a a03wt2c016ca 1 Lift wire Rr1 6 Lift wire Fr2 2 Lift wire Rr2 7 Lift wire Fr1 3 Lift wire Rr3 B Paper lift plate 4 Drive shaft 9 Paper lift motor M100 5 Lift wire Fr3 10 Remaining paper detection gear 21 5 UP DOWN SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 3 Operation 5 3 1 Plate up down control A Mechanism Moving the paper lift plate up down is made by winding releasing the lift wires with the pulleys driven by the paper lift motor M100 Sixlift wires are connected to the paper lift plate three each on front and back Two wires each on
214. PathisWitohing uapa F beid 11 Pr 53 2 Conveyance line speed CONIC u u saa ses eee races DEERE quas qasa 13 5 3 9 Paper cooling mechanism edd desuper Re bak vekk RACER EROR A AE RR akkar 14 8 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION Ga eee bade ae 15 EEG EE EE NN NN Jib d we 15 0 25 DING EEE ENE eed EE NE 16 62 1 Stecker tray sub tray conveyance ERR RR ERE EC 16 6 2 2 Coupling conveyance grip belt paper press arm drive 17 625 Stacker tray Up dowr DING L u maa ac eme oe Gea eee RUE dE cane en 18 624 Shift unit alignment plate de r Ra dd REESE RE KPE 19 625 Rear stopper job partition plate 20 626 Front stopper paper press arm dilve rnm x ee eee ee 21 GA de en 22 SEE EEE EEE EE 22 632 Opuplhg COT eyalige c Da L ee ex RR geek bak 30 523 3 Sub Vey ear q sd REE qasa 30 CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 LS 501 502 OUTLINE lt Lu z a Blank page i Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A Type 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stack
215. Pick up roller Up 5 Rotational direction of separation roller Lw 11 Paper feed roller Up 6 Paper feed roller Lw 50 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 PI SECTION 9 2 3 Pick up drive FD 501 19501102030 1 Spring 4 Pl pick up solenoids Up SD13 and Lw 2 Direction of spring force SD14 3 Release arm 5 Pick up rollers Up and Lw F4 lt 6 z 57 FD 501 z lt ui 2 a o a o o 9 PI SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 52 9 3 Operation 9 3 1 Size detection control For the size detection of a paper there are the following two directions for each of the tray Up and the tray Lw hat is the main scan direction and the sub scan direction The size detection in the sub scan when the PI paper set sensors Up PS44 and PS45 6 turn ON is made by the following 3 sensors PI maximum size sensors Up PS47 and Lw PS48 1 L size sensors Up PS35 PS41 2 and S size sensors Up PS36 Lw PS42 3 When the PS44 and 545 are OFF the tray is judged paper empty The size detection in the main scan is made by the paper size VR Up VR31 and Lw VR32 4 that are inter ocked with the paper regulation plate 5
216. RAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 2 Drive N 9 D Na ho 2 S Dues E uM M s Hi 8 a 8 15jkt2c015na 1 Lift pulley Up 4 Lift pulley Lw 2 Lift wire 5 Main tray 3 Main tray lift motor M3 26 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 MAIN TRAY SECTION 5 3 Operation 5 3 1 Tray lift control A Tray lift operation The worm gear installed in the shaft of the main tray lift motor 6 winds up the lift wire t lifts up or down the main tray 9 depending on the winding direction Rotating the lift pulley Lw clockwise and counterclockwise in view of front the main tray is lifted up and down respectively 15jkt2c016na 1 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS7 6 Main tray lift motor M3 2 Main tray upper limit sensor PS2 Lift pulley Lw 3 Counter reset sensor PS15 B Lift pulley Up 4 Main tray lower limit sensor 53 9 Main tray 5 Timing belt B Paper detection The main tray upper limit sensor PS2 2 and the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor 57 1 keep the speci fied distance between the upper surface of the paper exited to the main tray the upper surface of the main tray if there is no exited paper and the paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment of the exited paper During the consecutive printing operation FS counts the number of exited paper and stops th
217. RC Ren 22 533 Multi feed controles an Eee an ag OR Ree c aC a o d a 23 534 Centering detection control csse RET EE EE booed ebd eR ER RR 23 6 OTHERS Ba RR PAG d RP DEREN d perdu dud d i ideas 24 6 1 Dehumidifier heater CODITOL RR eners nadaa ERE REE Roe ded Mona 24 5 2 Tray damper Mechanism l u u asked eee ceeded RAS re 25 Men bodress lmedhanen nd ede ERROR RE UR dors ke Rod GR Roe d 26 6 8 1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism 26 6 8 2 Filter replacement assy ventilation 27 6 8 8 Environment temperature detection assist 27 Ts HEHE S i ad aW Ua a q ERU BEI BENE na gl elisa ET eee 28 Lal SOS FW KORR WAR 28 UE o PTT 29 52d Dehumidifer tani eater sus esa dae cee seed ee nee Heed does Ky COR A 29 TE AS ROWS CORIO EE EE Rad Bm e RR KR 30 PF 601 HT 504 lt 5 7 a CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 PF 601 HT 504 OUTLINE lt Lu z a Blank page i Th
218. Reverse Trimmer registration sensor PS55 Trimmer blade motor M31 Bundle registration home sensor P534 pag i 13 1 7 8 11 15ant2c106 1 Main body start signal B Registration operation completed 2 Moved to the standby position 9 Paper press completed 3 Conveyance by the bundle clip started 10 Shelter operation 4 Paper conveyance assisted 11 Trimming completed 5 Pre registration 12 Paper exit operation 6 Press release 13 Home position detected 7 Registration 14 oved to the standby position Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 8 3 5 Bundle exit control A Mechanism 1 Bundle exit mechanism The paper is exited to the bundle exit tray 12 The paper exited to the bundle exit tray is conveyed to the front by the bundle exit conveyance belt 1 and stacked The bundle exit motor M5 5 drives the bundle exit conveyance belt 1 via the bundle exit drive belt 4 and the bundle exit belt drive shaft 3 M5 drives the bundle exit conveyance belt for a specified period of time to convey the paper to the front 13 for every paper exit The bundle exit tray is expandable The bundle tray set sensor PS58 9 detects whether the bundle exit tray is stored or not 5 also drives the scrap press plate 11 In each drive path from 5 to the bundle exit drive belt and the scraps press plate there is a one way clutch
219. SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 3 4 Reverse decurler roller rotation control A Purpose To prevent the reverse decurler roller from deformation when the roller has not been used for certain period of time To minimize unevenness in temperature on the decurler roller surface which can cause unevenness in color of printed images after a continuous printing is carried out bizhub PRO C6500 B Operation timing The decurler motor M55 operates under the following conditions to rotate the reverse decurler motor Device status Remaining paper Rotation speed Rotational direction Standby Executing image stabilization 1 1 speed high Reverse operation After finishing printing 5 minutes 1 1 speed high Reverse NOTE When a new print job is received the after printing operation is canceled to accept the job The after printing operation can be enabled disabled with software DipSW This control is not carried out by default 20 3 5 Paper exit full detection control When the OT 502 option is installed in the paper exit section paper exit full detection control is performed The OT 502 paper exit full sensor PS12 is kept on while the OT 502 tray is used If the prescribed number of sheets are exit or if the on status of the sensor is kept for a certain time period it is detected as a full status of the OT 502 tray and a message notifying the status appears on the touch panel
220. SS A5 55 11X17 85x 14 816 x 11 8 2 x 115 5 x BLS 8 x 13 814 x 18 8 x 1314 8 x 18 8K 16K 16KS PK 512 3 holes 4 holes A4 B5 11 17 x 11 8K 16K PK 513 A3 4 B5 Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper color paper coated paper same as the main body Paper weight 60 to 128 g m Punch prohibited paper Label paper tab paper transparency film 2nd base paper holed paper and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch unit or the punch blade Paper curling a 1 2 a Curling 10 mm or less 1 5 sheets of paper PK 512 513 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS D Maintenance Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main body E Machine data Power source 24 5 DC supply from the main body Maximum power 40 W or less consumption Dimensions 130 W x 470 D x 115 H mm Weight Approx 3 kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096 RH with no condensation NOTE The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT COMPOSITIO 2 UNIT COMPOSITION o N Ng n Punch section 1 15kjt2e001na PK 512 513 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Oper
221. TION OPERATION 25 6 OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 3 Main body assist mechanism 6 3 1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism e When PF is installed to the main body the filter replacement assy retaining mechanism 1 of PF presses down the filter replacement assy of the main body to prevent the filter replacement assy from coming loose PF 601 HT 504 a03xt2c018ca lt LLI gt 2 7 a 1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism 26 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 OTHERS 63 2 Filter replacement assy ventilation mechanism When PF is installed to the main body the ventilation fan 1 FM10 1 and 2 FM9 2 operate to exhaust heated air around the writing section of the main body When the sub power switch SW2 of the main body is on FM10 and 9 keep turned on PF 601 HT 504 03 2 019 1 Ventilation fan 1 FM10 2 Ventilation fan 2 FM9 z lt z 77 amp o 6 3 3 Environment temperature detection assist mechanism When PF is installed to the main body the temperature humidity sensor TEM HUMS of PF is used to check the environment temperature and humidity instead of the sensor of the main body since the temper ature humidity sensor 1 TEM HUMS 1 on the right side of the main body is disabled 27 7 HT 504 OP
222. TION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 3 3 Saddle stitching hold control A Mechanism The saddle stitching hold is the mechanism to prevent the paper misalignment at stapling The saddle stitching hold Up 1 moves down to the saddle stitching hold Lw 2 at its lower position and hold the center folded paper 3 at the fold line from both up and down The eccentric cam 5 moves the saddle stitching hold Up 1 up and down via the arm 6 SD 501 6 lt LLI S z a amp S 15ant2c039na 1 Saddle stitching hold Up 4 Left side view 2 Saddle stitching hold Lw 5 Eccentric cam 3 Center folded paper 6 Arm 62 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION The saddle stitching hold Up 6 is enforced by the spring 8 toward the saddle stitching hold Lw 5 When the saddle stitching press motor M21 rotates the eccentric cam 2 via the gear 1 the arm 4 moves along with the shape of the eccentric cam and the saddle stitching hold Up is lowered by the spring 3 The saddle stitching hold Up 6 holding the center folded paper at its lower position is pushed up to its upper position by the saddle stitching hold Lw 5 during the stapling operation This allows the paper to be moved from the lower position to the upper position without any misalignment The saddle stitching press home s
223. TIONAL Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 HT 504 OPTIONAL 7 4 Configuration to EE e lt a03xt2c020ca 5 1 Dehumidifier fan heater unit Up 4 Dehumidifier fan 1 FM13 and 3 FM11 5 2 Dehumidifier fan heater unit Lw 5 Dehumidifier fan 2 FM14 and 4 FM12 a 3 Power unit 6 Fan heater Up HTR3 and Lw 28 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 HT 504 OPTIONAL 7 2 Operation 7 2 1 Dehumidifier fan heater control A Dryness preparation control When the Dryness preparation control is set to On in the user settings preliminary drying operation is per formed before printing after opening closing the tray When the dehumidifier fan heater preliminary drying control is set to Off in the user settings preliminary drying operation is performed before printing after opening closing the tray when the amount of remaining papers are changed The drying operation is not conducted unless the amount of remaining papers are changed To prevent paper feed jam in the paper feed section the fan heaters Up HTR3 Lw HTR4 dehumidifier fans 1 FM13 2 FM14 3 FM1 1 and 4 FM12 control dehumidification by circulating warm air When the temperature humidity sensor TEM HUMS of PF detects the environment humidity is more than 5696 HTR3 HTR4 FM11 FM12 FM13 and FM14 are turned on Dehumidifier control operation start
224. TONER COLLECTION SECTION RERO hb RI EE E Gh e xa RR RES 62 T4 1 Confgurall n Jul ma us rz aa S doy dA Red mee 62 irap c Irc 63 LE EG S sau saa dade aces o tinc Gm madd amd 64 TEST Toner collector CODD BI Eh eee 64 1482 Toner Colecion DOX CODIKOL Lii are caa WD so Hor EG EORR a 64 14 3 3 Box aE RD 64 TIS PAPER FEED SECTION ri Dna enata RUN ERE QE A REFIERE EAE dae uu 65 15 1 COMIGUIGUON EUER 65 Dogs cen ances EET 66 15 9 o etal dn gid Coie ok 67 TSSA Ped i esed yx WW e em ee e Ene d dore 67 15 5 2 Papersize election Com eere eae eee ka WU Rd co bed C ac 68 i Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS 1553 Paper feed Controls 4 bees ANAN AK BAKLAS ee E MR FERE Rd eR E 69 15 9 4 Remaining paper detection Control isses esse am hh Rt ERROR CREE ERR RR RE Re 73 16 BYPASS FEED TRAY SECTION oo os a KANG E Rh aud eil te etd 74 16 1 GCOniga elllt cessus ee u C E ERE 74 var ESTER FEE SE EE SEE NE EEE 75 16 3 co edu Baha AR o dde Ree erd HAAN 76 169 1 Plate Up GOWITCORIFOL Lia dccem eve
225. UR OU EE d E bi aq EGER On A Sees ben 8 PAPER PA TA ga pa ERE ere acids pad 9 CONFIGURATION OPERATION 5 6 8 9 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ETG kane aou gu Tue 11 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS sundag b e e E rra DRE PUDE I RO Ee a RE 12 PRAG Ea dad dE rire 12 62 Changing process Step ace cu br We Ke e ub 18 6 9 Laser xposure process 9 u l 14 bb pew dese N rA RR RR hm n Rh RR RR sos alke 13 6 4 Image development process Step 3 0 s eh RR nk Rar hay oh 14 6 5 First transfer process Step 4 hawaka Rh KE RR e 15 66 Second transfer process Step B J 22 raa Rada ERG 16 6 7 Separation process EPO RA ERR dora d Eid ea edo 17 5 8 Drum cleaning Gub step 1 uuu a sasa KR ERA KG KAR Rada RR ER bee 18 69 Exposure before charging Sub 2 sss kai s suwaq sas sas s Ra hd kd Rak oe ean eden 18 6 10 Transfer belt cleaning Sub Step 3 u l u scan kh hh er sh e cg 19 6 11 Second transfer roller Lw cleaning Sub step 4 20 5 12 doner collection Sub SIOD ana ak KP kp dog dedi b mo RU CR ae ER PARE Ue rang 21 p 189 Process SDOBU Cot csc quaque ras ed s ei
226. Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 6 3 3 Stack assist control The stack assist plate is a paper pressure plate that is used to increase the speed to put paper in the stacker for an increased productivity The stack assist plate 1 is driven by the stack assist motor M24 When being conveyed to the stacker section FS 503 each sheet of paper is pressed at the position near the rear end of the paper 2 to be stacked at a speed faster than a free fall The stack assist plate is driven by 65 from the home position in the staple mode and by 80 in the shift and straight mode The home position is detected by the stack assist home sensor PS32 3 fs503to2014c lt 5 7 a 1 Stack assist plate 3 Stack assist home sensor PS32 2 Paper Stacker entrance sensor PS5 Stacker assist Forward motor M24 Reverse 1 2 3 fs503t02033c 1 Start signal ON 3 Movement of the stack assist plate to the 2 Paper pressure by the stack assist plate evacuation position 6 3 4 Rear stopper control The rear stopper is a paper rear stopper when paper is exited in the non staple straight sort mode This short ens the conveyance distance to the main tray for an improved productivity The rear stopper is driven and released by the rear stopper motor M26 in the staple mode The set state in the non staple mode the pos
227. Vertical conveyance roller 2 Vertical conveyance roller 1 Vertical conveyance roller 3 COMPOSITION OPERATION Horizontal conveyance Small size roller roller 2 Multi feed detection board R MFDTB R 5 MFDTB S Pre registration roller Centering sen sor PS25 Horizontal conveyance roller 1 a03xt2c014ca 79 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 2 Drive st o Ko LL lt LLI a e 14 7 a 15 gt Wa a03xt2c015ca 1 Coupling transmission of driving force to 8 Vertical conveyance clutch 3 MC9 the tray 4 9 Vertical conveyance roller 3 2 Coupling transmission of driving force to 10 Horizontal conveyance clutch 1 MC10 the tray 5 11 Horizontal conveyance roller 1 3 Paper feed motor M1 12 Pre registration clutch MC12 4 Vertical conveyance clutch 1 MC7 13 Pre registration roller 5 Vertical conveyance roller 1 14 Horizontal conveyance clutch 2 MC11 6 Vertical conveyance clutch 2 MC8 15 Horizontal conveyance roller 2 7 Vertical conveyance roller 2 20 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 3 Operation 5 3 1 Pre registration control In order to correct skew of paper paper fed from the tray strikes against the pre registration roller that is stopping at that time The pre registration clutch MC12 is turned on the driving force of the paper f
228. Y2 lens is driven by the laser correction motor Partial horizontal magni Adjusts the position of the write unit paral fication lelism against the drum See adjusting the timing for the image adjustment in service mode 1 show the symptoms plainly the sample figures in the table indicate the positions of only two colors 2 The gap between the upper and lower lines in the sample figures for Drift in the main scanning direction Entire horizontal magnification and Partial horizontal magnification is not a misalignment Just for show ing the symptoms clearly Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 WRITE SECTION B Overview of the color registration control In the color registration control the color registration marks of each color are formed on the transfer belt outside of the largest paper area The color registration sensors Fr PS8 and Rr PS9 detect the marks to know how much they are shifted from each other If the shift amount falls outside the prescribed range the image write tim ing the clock frequency and the angle of the CY2 lens 2 for the corresponding color are adjusted as necessary bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a a03ut2c108ca 1 Drum Y B Write unit K 2 Write unit Y 9 Transfer belt 3 Drum M 10 Transferring direction 4 Write unit M 11 Color registration sensor Fr PS8 5 Dr
229. ZS K a03ut2c041ca 59 13 TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 13 2 Drive bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI z a amp S a03ut2c042ca 1 Toner supply gear A same shaft as C B Toner supply motor C M51 2 Toner bottle clutch Y MC14 9 Toner bottle motor M53 3 Toner bottle clutch M MC15 10 Toner supply motor M M50 4 Toner bottle clutch C MC16 11 Toner supply motor Y M49 5 Toner supply gear A same shaft as D 12 Toner bottle drive gear 6 Toner bottle clutch K MC17 13 Toner conveyance screw 7 Toner supply motor K M52 14 Toner supply screw 60 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 13 TONER SUPPLY SECTION 13 3 Operation 13 3 1 Toner conveyance control A 1 2 Toner supply control to the toner hopper When toner level in the toner hopper becomes about 50g the bottle motor M53 and the toner bottle clutch Y MC14 M MC15 C MC16 and K M52 are turned on Then the toner bottle rotates to supply new toner Toner supply control to the developing unit When the power is turned on Each of the TCR sensors Y TCRS Y M TCRS M C TCRS O and K TCRS K detects the toner den sity in each developing unit after the specified time passed from when the sub power switch SW2 turns on When the detected density i
230. a 9 TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Control In trimming mode the trimmer paddle motor M33 starts forward reverse rotation after paper clipping is oper ated by the bundle clip motor M11 and then the M33 motor stops when the trimming JOB is finished If the trimming amount value is set in the Trimming adjustment in service mode the forward reverse rotation of motor is controlled by the trimming amount that is added the adjusted value Edges of standard sized paper is SD 501 trimmed by 2mm even when the adjutment value is set to O lt LLI a a S 70 A 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC F Printed in Japan Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid CGAO3U M TE1 0675 disclosure of confidential information
231. a a o 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION 22 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 The first stacked sheet of paper 5 is conveyed while the overlap stopper is located at the standby position 4 Before conveying the second paper right angle conveyance gate solenoid SD2 turns ON to move the right angle conveyance gate 6 to the right 7 At the time overlap motor M13 moves the overlap stopper 30 mm upward 8 It transfers the stacked paper to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate The right angle conveyance gate is replaced 9 to clear the conveyance path The subsequent paper 8 passes the right side of the right angle conveyance gate and the paper is overlapped in adequate order Then M13 moves the overlap stopper downward 1 The same as the second sheet is conducted until all of sheets are stacked 4 1 15ant2c012nb 1 2 3 4 5 Overlap stopper moving 30 mm downward Front side view Overlap stopper moving 30 mm upward Standby position of the overlap stopper 1st paper Right angle conveyance gate Right angle conveyance gate moved 2nd paper Right angle conveyance gate replaced Theory of Operation Ver
232. a guide for the trailing edge of paper To assist the separation of paper released from the grip the paddle is rotated at a high speed For the rear stopper solenoid 503 that drives the rear stopper a latch type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state However a latch type solenoid requires a different contro Signal for each ON and OFF action N o D Lo LO N lt z 77 o a 4 3 2 18502020206 1 Paddler 4 Paper position while the stacker tray sort mode 2 Entrance sensor 54 5 Paper position while in the stacker tray non sort mode 3 Rear stopper 27 LS 501 502 lt Lu z a 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION 1 Stacker tray non sort mode Ex Letter 4 sheets Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 Entrance sensor PS4 Rear stopper Latch ON signal solenoid 503 Latch OFF signal 2 5 8 11 13 3 4 I6 7 9 10 12 6502102029 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 ON 1st sheet of paper Rear stopper open Rear stopper close 2nd sheet of paper Rear stopper open Q N Rear stopper close 2 Stacker tray sort mo
233. aa 21 53 1 OO aa a kk ad due dA PREX Rd deck Ead ERR 21 5912 Slonmentoonttol AA da pasa ER RO a ER E RR EN 25 533 Right angle conveyance cool u uu sus NT eee seek se vane ERROR ERR OR 27 B TOUDING SECTION coda feces ebria bee La rd eros 29 SES 00 r nu KA Fr equa Te e naci n dee 29 Oe JD eade Iba der trs db EE d Si 30 ent VE SS Sed 30 622 Folding conveyance DING arr l luu RR RAE bis bus 31 52 Folding blade dive task Ea RruadrRRRRETEREGadcisSs6pAXGA 32 52 4 Folding Main scan alignment RR RR e bere ER qasa 33 6 2 5 Folding sub scan alignment center folding exit drive 34 QVE sso ka se REOR doom ghee es RR RE de HAE ERU RR Rua 35 CG 1 5 9 T ut scel aer DAAN utes n rdc aud d du ERROR PA 36 6 3 1 Folding entrance conveyance hr he KAG 36 6 3 2 Folding main scan alignment control hh rrr Re 38 633 JEOldingieontroL uus usus sss gag odd ede Xe PRSE 40 63 4 Folding sub scan alignment CONIC s ces uu uc emo RR ab EORR wawas 45 O35 Guide shat os er kac pone E Ga 48 Lo SADDLE STITCHING SECTION issu m
234. ack to the tray 3 The drop in frictional force between the two rollers due to the multiple sheets causes the counter rotating of the separation roller PF 601 HT 504 10 1 lt e LLI a amp a03xt2c009ca 1 Paper feed roller 6 Pressing force 2 Lower 2nd sheet of paper 7 Spring 3 Tothe tray B Torque limiter 4 Direction to feed paper normally 9 Paper feed direction 5 Separation roller 10 Direction to separate sheets 14 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 5 Air assist mechanism The paper feed assist fans that are provided on the paper guides in the trays 4 and 5 blow air 7 onto paper 9 in order to assist the separation of paper 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Tray 4 is provided with paper feed assist fans Fr11 1 6 Fr12 FM3 5 Rr11 FM2 1 and Rr12 3 Tray 5 is provided with paper feed assist fans Fr21 FM5 6 Fr22 FM7 5 Rr21 FM6 1 Rr22 FM8 3 When feeding from the tray specified as a tray for coated paper the assist fans of the tray start to operate 4 03 2 010 Paper feed assist fans Rr11 2 and Rr21 FM6 Shutter solenoids Rr1 SD3 and Rr2 SD7 Paper feed assist fans Rr12 FM4 and Rr22 FM8 Shutter Paper feed assist fans Fr12 FM3 and Fr
235. ade BNG E reke 8 9 PAPER PATH nE FET 9 COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ixi rh RE er pus ERROR Ex Xe qa 13 AA ci ya seas REN Ra E E EAR ERE p RR AA 13 Ne er 14 423 Enranceconveyance DING nes e ka qg pega dic Ou wawaqa 14 42 2 Hornsontsl ies 14 4 2 3 Gate drive subtray pressure release 15 BG agit picto ido d eon va VEO OUR ohio yee ees 16 431 Conveyance path switching operation 16 43 2 Conveyance line speed switch contro isses suena dae samde RR RR RKO 16 433 Subtoy eut a onde sss RE cae Rad doped ada KR e d 17 434 Subtray paper full detection Convol u u tasa tie e ny saa Pei 17 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION p broke redet ROI kenia p 18 a PSN ee Te se EE SPE Dee 18 Dea Mere 19 521 Right angle conveyance drive alignment drive 19 522 dive cies premere a Maray plan FOI Pda eugiat pi tars 20 5 9 Operation Ewa dead Se aq adus bad suu E d
236. ain tray paper exit roller 2 Coupling 5 Paper exit opening solenoid SD9 8 Paper pressure arm 96 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION 8 2 3 Paper exit opening drive 6 eo 19 N 4 z E 77 fs503to2026c E 1 4 Main tray paper exit roller 2 Paper exit opening motor 8 5 Paper exit opening unit 3 Paper exit opening home sensor PS12 6 Drive bar 37 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 33 Operation 8 3 1 Paper exit opening control When paper is too long and protruding the paper exit opening is opened and closed for alignment There are 3 opening positions available according to the mode and the paper length For paper shorter than the following length the paper exit opening is opened neither in the non staple mode nor he staple mode FS 503 Mode Angle of the opening Paper length in the sub scan direction Non staple Approx 27 More than 239 mm Staple Approx 44 More than 400 mm Staple Approx 55 More than 219 mm less than 400 mm For the open close of the paper exit opening the paper exit motor M8 rotates and the deformed cam 1 lifts up he entire paper exit opening unit 2 to open the paper exit opening The open close of the paper exit opening is detected by the paper exit opening home sensor PS12 3
237. al analog corresponding to the amount of light The CCD sensor includes three separate photo receivers corresponding to each color R G and The R and B analog signals are individually converted to a digital signal A D convert in the CCD board CCDB The A D convert is controlled by the image processing board IPB 26 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 E Original reading timing When AE ACS is not set the exposure unit movement is the same in the platen mode and the DF When AE ACS is set the exposure unit movement differs between the platen mode and the DF mode 1 When AE ACS is not set 7 SCANNER SECTION a03ut2c020ca 1 2 SI 4 2 When is set Platen mode Home position Scanner home sensor PS1 Platen APS position White correction First time 5 6 7 White correction Second time Exposure scan 270 mm s Home position search H 2113 Y I I 1 l l l 1 1 1 l l l l l I l l a03ut2c021ca 1 2 3 4 Home position PS1 Platen APS position White correction First time 5 6 7 8 White correction Second time AE ACS scan 409 mm s Exposure scan 270 mm s Home position search 27 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a bizhub PRO C6500 lt z a amp
238. ance High speed conveyance motor 1 Low speed Horizontal conveyance motor M2 BI 4 15ant2c005na 1 Main body start signal 3 M1 switching to a low speed 2 Main body exit sensor ON 4 Main body paper trailing edge signal Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 4 HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION 4 3 8 Subtray exit control When exiting the paper to the subtray the paper is prevented to be misaligned by releasing the nipping of the subtray exit roller by the roller release solenoid 4 SD4 to nip the paper only at the trailing edge and slowing down the paper by the subtray exit roller that is rotating in low speed for every paper The horizontal conveyance sensor 1 PS2 1 and the subtray exit sensor PS11 2 detect the paper exited to the subtray SD 501 4 3 2 be _ I 1 Horizontal conveyance sensor 1 PS2 3 Roller release solenoid 504 2 Subtray exit sensor PS11 4 Subtray exit roller CO a ant2c006na lt 6 z D The roller release solenoid 4 504 turns ON 2 to release the nipping the subtray exit roller 3 after speci ied period of time since the horizontal conveyance sensor 1 PS2 detects the leading edge of paper 1 SD4 turns OFF 5 and the subtray exit roller nips at the trailin
239. and the saddle stitching stopper stops at the folding position When M19 turns ON the olding knife home sensor PS22 the folding transfer motor M20 turns ON 3 and drives the folding roller to perform the 1st folding and the tri folding roller to perform the 2nd folding at the tri folding operation and then i e O LL exits the paper to the booklet tray M20 stops after a specified period of time since the folding paper exit sensor PS25 detects the trailing edge o he paper bundle Folding pass through sensor PS26 ws Saddle stitching UP mmm Sto tor M18 E pper motor M18 DOWN 2 E Folding knife home sensor PS22 i wi Folding knife motor M19 Folding transfer 80 mm s 77 motor 20 ot 400 mm s a GE o Folding paper exit sensor PS25 4 pau 15jmi2c021na 1 Saddle stitching stopper moved 3 Paper fold 2 Paper pressed to the folding roller by the 4 Paper transferred folding knife 5 Standby position of the folding knife B Booklet full detection The folding full sensor PS29 that consists of the LED light emitting section and the light receiving section detects the booklet tray paper full It determines the booklet tray is full if the exited paper shields the folding full sensor for the specified period of time 54 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCH
240. ange for improve ment of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the corresponding page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 2 0 A Revision in relation to launching of C6500 2005 04 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS SD 501 OUTLINE 1 dun iacere detis e obo brut deii ere d oed 1 2 apama puak bu G
241. aper exit sensor PS6 detects the trailing edge of the paper 3 7 stops after a specified period of time since PS6 detects the last paper FNS entrance sensor PS4 Paper exit roller 400 mm s motor M7 258 mm s Main tray paper exit sensor PS6 i 2 3 15jkt2c010na 1 Leading edge of the paper detected 3 Preparing to transfer the subsequent paper 2 Paper exit started B Stapling mode when the paper length is B5S or longer in the sub scan direction Transmitting the FNS signal 1 from the main body the paper exit roller motor M7 rotates to drive the paper exit belt in the stacker section M7 stops and the paper exit arm moves to the home position for the stapling mode when the paper exit belt home sensor PS9 turns ON 3 The paper exit opening is open if the paper length is longer than 5 in the sub scan direction The paper exit motor 8 closes the paper exit opening when the stapling operation is completed M7 rotates to drive the paper exit arm when the paper exit home sensor PS12 detects the opening is closed 6 The paper exit arm ifts up the paper to the paper exit roller and then the paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray 7 stops when 59 turns ON 7 Paper exit roller motor M7 Paper exit belt home sensor PS9 Paper exit motor M8 Paper exit home sensor PS12 3 4 5 6 17 15jkt2c030na 1 F
242. appropriate paper size 2 The saddle stitching alignment motor Rt M9 rotates in the forward direction and the saddle stitching alignment plate Rt conducts the preliminary alignment operation 4 when the folding sensor 2 PS44 at the exit of the folding section detects the trailing edge of the paper 3 Then M9 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment operation 5 when the paper is stacked at the stapler position After a specified period of time M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position and stands by for the subsequent set 6 For the last paper of the set 7 M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position when the saddle stitching press motor M21 8 is completed with holding the paper 0 Folding sensor 2 PS44 Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Rt M9 Reverse Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Lt M16 Reverse mm Saddle stitching press motor M21 9 ui 6 8 15ant20087na 1 Main body start signal 6 Moved to the home position 2 Moved for appropriate paper size Last paper of the set 3 Detected the trailing edge of paper 8 the paper with the saddle stitching hold 4 Preliminary alignment operation 9 Moved to the home position 5 Alignment operation Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Se
243. ar stopper home sensor PS35 2 Stack assist plate 5 Rear stopper motor M26 3 Rear stopper 6 Stack assist motor M24 75 FS 503 lt c LLI a amp S 6 STACKER SECTION 6 2 3 Intermediate roller paper exit arm drive Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 fs503to2010c 1 2 3 4 5 16 Intermediate roller release solenoid SD7 Intermediate roller open close motor M25 Eccentric cam Intermediate roller home sensor PS33 Paper exit arm 6 7 8 9 10 Paper exit arm motor M23 Paper exit arm home sensor PS9 Intermediate roller Lw Coupling Intermediate roller Up Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 62 4 Alignment drive 61 8 2 5 B 129 LL H OD amp 3 4 fs503to2011c E 1 Alignment plate Rr 4 Alignment motor Fr M22 2 Alignment motor Rr M5 5 Alignment home sensor Fr PS31 3 Alignment home sensor Rr PS8 6 Alignment plate Fr 77 FS 503 lt LLI a amp S 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 18 6 33 Operation 6 3 1 Stacker conveyance speed control Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor M1 is sent to the stacker when the stacker entrance motor M13 is
244. ate to convey the paper one at 6 5 7 1 19501102034 1 Paper feed rollers Up and Lw 2 Conveyance direction of a sheet of paper 3 Torque limiter 4 Separation rollers Up and Lw 5 2nd sheet of paper 6 1st sheet of paper Pick up rollers Up and Lw 55 FD 501 lt 5 7 a FD 501 lt LLI z a amp z 9 PI SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 56 9 3 5 Multi feed detection control To detect a multi feed while in the PI paper feed the PI conveyance path is provided with the multi feed sensor The multi feed sensor is a ultrasonic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver This sensor receives ultrasonic waves sent from the multi feed detection board 1 MFDB1 1 by the multi feed detection board 2 MFDB2 2 Based on the difference in the amount of ultrasonic waves received when a single sheet of paper 1 and the plu ral sheets of paper 4 pass through between the sender and the receiver a check is made to see if paper has been multi fed or not The multi feed detection function turns ON operates when the LED on the lower side is turned on by the multi feed detection function selection button on the FD operation board FDOB and when no selection is made And it turns OFF does not operate when the LED on the upper sid
245. ation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH 1 2 Oj 15kjt1c002na 1 Paper path from PI 3 Paper path from the main body 2 Punch unit 4 Punch scraps box Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PUNCH SECTION B COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 PUNCH SECTION 4 4 Composition Punch blade Paper size sensor PS305 Punch unit COMPOSITION OPERATION Punch blade Entrance roller a04et2e001ca 4 PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 42 Drive 4 2 1 Punch shift drive e o io ES N D e z lt amp 15kjt2c002na e 1 Punch unit 5 Punch shift motor M302 7 2 Guide shaft 6 Rack 3 Belt Punch shift home sensor PS303 4 Front Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 2 Punch drive A PK 512 2 to 3 holes 4 PUNCH SECTION 1 1 2 3 15kjt2e007nb N a N Punch motor M301 Eccentric cam Slide li
246. ation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 15 PAPER FEED SECTION 15 3 4 Remaining paper detection control Remaining amount of papers in the tray is detected by the paper near empty sensor 1 PS32 2 PS38 3 PS44 2 papers get lower the actuator 6 on the front side of the tray is gradually rotated 2 The PS32 PS38 and PS44 turn on and off each time the slits 3 4 and 5 of the actuator passes through i The main body control section counts the number of on off s of the PS32 PS38 and PS44 to detect the amount of remaining paper in four levels 5 Slit count Remaining amount of paper Remaining amount Indication on the touch panel 0 100 to 75 4 lit 1 75 to 5096 3 lit 2 50 to 2596 2 lit 3 25 to 096 1 lit o lt e 7 o a03ut2c052ca 1 Rotation direction when lift plate goes up 4 Slit 2 PS32 PS38 PS44 5 Sit 3 6 Actuator 73 16 BYPASS FEED TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 COMPOSITION OPERATION 74 16 BYPASS FEED TRAY SECTION 16 1 Configuration Paper feed roller Pick up roller Lift plate Separation roller Paper size sensor BP1 Paper size sensor 2 549 Paper empty sensor BP PS47 a03ut2c053ca Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 16 BYPASS FEED TRAY SECTION 16 2 Drive bizhub PRO C6500 lt
247. ay 200 sheets Bundle exit tray Center folding sheet set trimming 21010 More than 50 11 to 20 More than 30 21 to 40 More than 20 41 to 50 More than 15 Multi center folding 30 sets Tri folding exit tray Multi letter folding 20 sets 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 C Type of paper 1 Coupling subtray mode 3 Paper size SRAG B4 SRA4 5 45 A4 45 B5 BSS 5 e 55 B6S 65 13 x 19 12x 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 14 x 11 8 2 x 115 51 2 81 21 51 2 x BUS 81 2 x 13 81 4 x 13 8 s x 1314 8 x 13 8K 3 16 3 16 5 3 Tab 4 BA 4 45 B5 55 11 x 17 81 2 x 11 8 x 118 custom size Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140 mm 1050 Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 140 mm C6500 Max 330 x 487 mm Min 100 x 148 Wide 4 45 B5 B5S A5 12x 18 11 x 17 81 2 x 11 8 2 x 115 51 2 x 8 5 size entry Max 324 x 460 mm Bi 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China 4 C6500 only A4 and 81 2 x11 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured Paper weight 50 to 300 g m Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 2 Saddle stitching mode 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS N Papersize SRA3 SRA4S A4S 55 12x18 11
248. b partition Paddler solenoid 509 plate Sub tray full sensor PS9 lt oc a o E 7 o a o Conveyance sor 3 PS17 Paper detection sensor PS19 on Guide plate Hand cart 15502102009 72 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 2 Drive 6 2 1 Stacker tray sub tray conveyance drive 6 LS 501 502 lt Lu z a 5 4 3 15021020108 1 Sub tray paper exit motor M3 4 Paddler 2 Conveyance motor M2 5 Sub tray conveyance roller 3 Decurler roller 6 Sub tray paper exit roller 76 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 2 2 6 CONVEYANCE SECTIO Coupling conveyance grip belt paper press arm drive 8 9 10 11 12 5 4 3 2 Is502to2011c WN Paper press arm 1 Stacker tray paper empty detec Grip belt Grip conveyance motor M4 Coupling conveyance motor M6 Coupling paper exit roller 1 5 5 Coupling conveyance roller 7 Coupling co
249. b power switch SW2 after replacing the materials VO adjustment Purpose To charge the drums appropriately compensating for deterioration of related parts and the effects of ambi ent conditions Operation A voltage applied to the grid is adjusted so that a target electric potential is obtained The target potential is determined according to the developing bias calculated at the maximum density correction control The electric potential on the drums are detected by the drum potential sensors Y DPRS Y M DPRS M C DPRS G and K DPRS K Execution timing When printing has not been performed for 6 hours or longer Every 1 000 prints When a change in humidity exceeds 20 from the last time the adjustment is performed When turning on the sub power switch SW2 after replacing the materials 113 bizhub PRO C6500 lt ec 5 7 a bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI z a amp S 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 G 1 2 114 Vm adjustment Purpose To achieve stabilized intermediate exposure potential regardless of a drop in sensitivity of photosensitive materials or the stain of the writing system Operation While the drums are irradiated with a PWM128 intensity laser beam the electric potential on the drums are detected by the drum potential sensor Y DPRS Y M DPRS
250. barr may occur on the trimmed edge of the paper before the movement cycle of the trimmer board depending on the paper type lt 5 7 a 15ant2c073na 1 Trimmer board solenoid 5011 4 Rack 2 Trimmer board replacement sensor PS59 5 Trimmer board 3 Pinion 6 One way clutch A 117 9 TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Control The trimmer press motor M32 starts the returning operation 2 to the home position when the 700th trimmer operation 1 is completed M32 does not stop by defection of the trimmer press home sensor PS53 3 The opening keeps widening until the overcurrent of M32 is detected 4 When M32 stops the trimmer board sole noid SD11 turns ON and OFF twice 5 to move the trimmer board 1 mm Then M32 starts the returning oper ation to the home position 6 Lo D 4 5 6 Trimmer board solenoid 5011 Trimmer press Forward motor M32 Reverse Trimmer blade Forward motor M31 Reverse rimmer press upper limit sensor PS52 rimmer press home sensor PS53 a 6 z 1 2 3 15ant2c113na 1 700th trimmer operation 4 Overcurrent of M32 detected e 2 Opening operation of the trimmer press 5 Trimmer board moved 1 mm 3 Home position detected 6 Returning operation to the home posi
251. c and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro cedure in safety clothes using only the prescribed tools Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu mentation If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used the prod uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists Before conducting an inspection be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet some amp units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF Arisk of electric shock exists The area around the fixing unit is hot You may get burnt Work Performed with the Product Powered On NWARNING Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached you may touch live or high voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt leading to a risk of injury Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached High voltage exists around the drum unit A risk of elec AN tric shock exists 5 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints NWARNING When taking a report of problems from a user check each part and repair properly A risk of product trouble injury and fire exists Check the exterior and frame for e
252. ce conveyance motor M1 Paper exit motor 5 4 5 a04kt2c005ca E 1 Start printing signal ON 4 Decelerating at middle speed 2 Paper leading edge detection 5 Accelerating at high speed 5 e 3 Paper trailing edge detection E x 71 RU 503 504 z lt 2 a o a o o 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 12 4 3 2 Decurler control The paper exit motor M5 controls the rotation of the decurler rollers 1 15 and 3 14 Conveys paper into between the decurler belt 1 7 2 10 and decurler roller 2 8 4 12 and gives pressure to remove the curl of the paper The decurler Up 9 exerts a pressure on the paper curled upward valley curl 6 while the decurler Lw 11 exert a pressure on the paper curled downward mount curl 16 There are three modes for paper curl straightening Upward paper curl straightening ON Conveys toward the decurler Up 5 Downward paper curl straightening ON Conveys toward the decurler Lw 17 Decureler OFF The paper through the normal path 4 Switching paper curl straightening mode is made in the service mode and Adjustment Menu Finisher Adjustment Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 CONVEYANCE SECTIO D LO gt oc 5 J 10
253. chanism to hold the paper at its fore edge side to prevent the trimming misalign ment There is approximately 5 mm of opening at the home position The press arms 4 press the paper with the trim mer board 2 when the trimmer press motor M32 1 drives and the slide blocks move to the closing direc ion 8 M32 detects the completion of the paper press via overcurrent 32 rotates in the reverse direction to widen the opening to approximately 20 mm before conveying the paper o the trimmer section if the number of the print paper is 16 or more 32 or more for the saddle stitched paper The trimmer press home sensor PS53 6 and the trimmer press home sensor PS52 5 detect the home posi ion and 20 mm of opening respectively SD 501 6 7 8 5 lt LLI z a amp S 1 4 3 2 15ant2c070na 1 Trimmer press motor M32 5 Trimmer press upper limit sensor PS52 2 Trimmer board 6 Trimmer press home sensor PS53 3 Front side direction 7 Slide blocks 4 Press arms 8 Press direction 772 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 TRIMMER SECTION When changing the trimming position of the trimmer board or replacing the trimmer board via the check mode M32 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the press board higher than the position of the trimmer press upper limit sensor PS52 and release the trimmer board 3 by pus
254. corona and developing bias of each color turns on when the corresponding drum Q 4 gt bizhub PRO 6500 motor starts to rotate The developing motor starts to rotate 5 after the specified time passed from the start of the writing opera tion 6 The on 6 and off 8 of writing operation corresponds to the on and off of the developing bias AC and the first transfer The developing motor and the toner supply motor stop and the writing operation is finished 11 The charging corona is deenergized and the first transfer is finished 12 When the turning corona turns off 15 the DC bias supply the erase lamp and the drum motor are stopped This is the end of Y toner image creating process Creating toner images of the other colors is performed subsequently The first transfer pressure release motor 1 19 and the second transfer pressure release motor M34 turn on while creating the toner images on each drum When the transfer belt is moved to the first transfer position by the M19 the V TOP signal which triggers the second transfer is output 7 The toner images on each drum are transferred to the transfer belt one by one first transfer The separation HV 2 turns on 9 after the specified time passed from when the V TOP signal is output After the specified time passed from when the separation HV 2 turns on the second transfer HV 2 turns on 10 to transfer the compl
255. cted lt LLI 2 a amp S G Trimmer scraps tray set detection The scraps box set sensor PS40 detects whether the scraps box is set or not The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the scraps box is not set 106 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 TRIMMER SECTION 9 TRIMMER SECTION 9 1 Composition SD 501 Trimmer press plate Front side direction lt ul pu z 77 a o 5 Trimmer paddle Trimmer blade Trimmer board 15ant2c119na 107 9 TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 2 Drive 9 2 1 Trimmer press drive LO D lt 3 15ant2c067na 1 Trimmer board 5 Press drive screw 8 2 Press arm 6 Trimmer press home sensor PS53 3 Trimmer press motor M32 Trimmer press upper limit sensor PS52 4 Slide block B Trimmer press plate 708 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 2 2 Trimmer blade drive 9
256. d 124 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 E 1 2 1 2 IPB fan 1 M24 2 M25 control Purpose To cool around the image processing board IPB ON timing Rotates at low speed during standby Starts to operate upon starting of printing Starts to operate upon starting of scanning Starts to operate upon starting of HDD operation FF timing arts to operate upon completion of printing arts to operate upon completion of scanning arts to operate upon completion of HDD operation Tucking fan 1 26 2 27 3 28 control Purpose To cool around the reverse paper exit section and the paper ON timing Stops during printing front side of double side print Starts to operate upon starting of printing back side of double print or single print OFF timing Stops when the single print counter reaches a predetermined level Deodorization fan M36 control Purpose To cool around the fusing section Low high speed switching timing Rotates at low speed during standby Switches to high speed upon starting of printing Switches to low speed a predetermine time period after printing is finished Fusing ventilation fan M37 control Purpose To cool around the fusing section Low speed fast switch timing Rotates at low speed during standby Switches to high speed upon starting of printing Switches to low speed a predetermine time period after printing is finished
257. d Fr2 PS49 7 and the home position of the alignment tab Rr is detected by the folding main scan alignment home sensor Rr PS19 4 The alignment claws Fr 2 convey 6 the paper by pushing its trailing edge once the paper passes the folding entrance roller 3 3 and until the leading edge of paper contacts with the alignment stopper Rr 5 because here is no conveyance roller between the folding entrance conveyance roller 3 and the alignment stopper Rr 5 6 7 8 3 15ant2c023na 1 Front side direction 5 Alignment stoppers Rr 2 Alignment claws Fr 6 Paper conveyance 3 Folding entrance roller 3 7 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Fr2 PS49 4 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Rr PS19 8 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Fr1 PS18 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION B Control The folding main scan alignment motor Rr M14 drives the alignment stoppers Rr to the appropriate position in A accordance with the paper size 2 when the main body start signal 1 turns ON The folding main scan alignment motor Fr M7 rotates in the forward direction to let 3 the alignment claws Fr push the trailing edge of paper for conveyance after a specified period of time since the folding entrance sensor PS60 detects the trailing edge of paper and then M7 stops after a specified period of time 4 The alignment stoppers Rr push the leading edge of paper to c
258. d Lt SW2 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION B Control 1 Stapling control The stapler motors Rt M29 and Lt 30 start the stapling operation 2 when the clincher up down home sen sor PS26 detects that the clinchers Rt and Lt are contacted with the stapler unit 1 The clincher solenoids Rt SD9 and Lt SD10 bend the staple and the stapling operation is completed when he clincher start sensors Rt HS1 and Lt HS3 in the stapler unit turn ON 3 M29 and M30 stop and return to he home position 4 when the stapler home sensors Rt HS1 and Lt HS3 detects the home position SD 501 1 Clincher up down home sensor P526 Stapler motors Rt M29 Lt M30 Clincher solenoids Rt 509 Lt 5010 Stapler home sensors HS1 and Lt HS3 Clincher start sensors Rt HS2 and Lt HS4 2 3 4 15ant2c092na 1 Clincher contacted 3 Clinching operation E 2 Stapling operation 4 Returned to the home position Ha 2 Staple and cartridge detection When the remaining amount of the staple becomes 20 or the cartridge is not set the staple empty switches Rt SW1 and Lt SW2 turn ON and the main body displays the message on its operation panel 69 SD 501 lt LLI gt 2 7 a 7 SADDLE STI ITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver
259. d amount When the tray down switch SW100 is pressed while PS100 is off M100 starts to rotate in reverse direction to lower the paper lift plate by 90 mm After SW100 is pressed M100 stops when the lower limit sensor PS101 turns on detects that the paper lift plate reaches the lower limit position The paper lift plate does not go down while PS101 is on even if SW100 is pressed 22 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 OTHERS 6 OTHERS 6 4 Dehumidifier heater control The LU is equipped with the dehumidifier heater HTR1 to reduce the moisture inside the LU HTIR1 is powered with 220 VAC supplied from the main body and activated by turning on the dehumidifier heater switch SW3 on the main body and turning off the sub power switch SW2 1 COMPOSITION OPERATION a03wt2c018ca 1 Dehumidifer heater HTR1 23 LU 202 HT 503 lt LLI a a S 6 OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 24 6 2 Interlock control The interlock switch 1 MS1 and the front door sensor PS115 are mounted on the front door and the interlock switch 2 MS2 and the upper door sensor PS100 are mounted on the upper door The power to drive the paper feed motor M1 is transmitted MS1 and the MS2 If the front door or the upper door is opened MS1 and 52 turn off to cut the power supply to the paper feed motor M1 e When PS115 and PS100
260. d to the paper from he belt d a03ut2c007ca 1 Transfer belt 3 Second transfer roller Lw 2 Paper 4 Second transfer roller Up Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS 6 7 Separation process Step 6 For the second transfer the paper is negatively charged by the second transfer roller Up so that the paper makes intimate contact with the transfer belt Once the toner is transferred to the paper the paper must be sep arated from the belt The separating operation is called as separation n order to achieve the separation a high AC or DC bias is applied to the discharging section to attract the paper bizhub PRO C6500 separating it from the transfer belt 1 QA 1 Transfer belt 3 Second transfer roller Lw a03ut2c008ca lt 5 7 a 2 Paper 4 Discharging section for separation 77 bizhub PRO C6500 lt a amp o 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 18 6 8 Drum cleaning Sub step 1 The toner remains slightly on the drum after the first transfer The process that cleans the remaining toner off is called drum cleaning The cleaning is made by the cleaning blade provided for each drum Its edge made of urethane rubber scrapes he toner off the drum surface 3 a03
261. de 1 Swing back 7 The original is conveyed from the paper feed section 2 2 The original is conveyed 3 to the point that the rear end of the original comes over the positioning plate 1 3 The conveyance motor M302 rotates in reverse at low speed and returns the original 4 and the original is Stuck against the positioning plate 5 4 The original is scanned 9 og lt LLI z a amp S 1 a052t2c008ca 1 Stuck position 4 Swing back 2 Original conveyance 5 Positioning completed 3 Stops after going through the stuck position 76 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION 2 Control 7 2 After the registration roller nips the original 1 the original is conveyed 2 from the paper feed section After the specified time has elapsed from when the timing sensor PS302 has turned off Rear end detec tion M302 is turned off and the original is conveyed to the point that the rear end of the original comes over the positioning plate and then the conveyance stops 3 After the specified time M302 rotates in reverse at low speed and returns the original 4 and the original is stuck against the positioning plate Swing back The scanning is performed in the main body 5 After scanning the second sheet small size paper or the first sheet large size paper the reverse paper exit motor M303 is tu
262. de Ex Letter 2 sheets B 3rd sheet of paper 9 Rear stopper open 10 Rear stopper close 11 4th sheet of paper 12 Rear stopper open 13 Rear stopper close Entrance sensor 54 Rear stopper Latch ON signal solenoid 503 Latch OFF signal 2 4 6 9 11 3 5 7 8 10 15502102024 1 Main body paper exit sensor 53 ON 2 Shift of the 1st sheet of paper 3 Rear stopper open 4 Shift of the 2nd sheet of paper 5 Rear stopper close 6 Non shift of the 1st sheet of paper 28 Rear stopper open B Rear stopper close 9 Non shift of the 2nd sheet of paper 10 Rear stopper open 11 Rear stopper close Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 F Paper press arm 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION The paper that has been released from the grip is pressed one at a time onto the stacker tray by the paper pres sure arms 1 2 and 3 to be loaded on the stacker tray However the operation of the paper pressure arm 2 is imited only to the paper size larger than B4 Entrance sensor PS4 1 Paper press solenoid 1 SD6 Paper press solenoid 2 SD7 Paper press solenoid 3 SD8 LS 501 502 Is502t02025c 1 2 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 ON 1st sheet of paper G Alignment plate control 3 4 2nd sheet of paper Last sheet of paper Paper loaded on the stacker
263. decurler roller 1 that faces to the paper exit roller is pressed by the rotation of the cam 2 The cam is driven by the paper exit motor M54 Forward rotation of the M54 causes paper exit operation and its reverse rotation moves the cam to apply pressure to the paper exit decurler roller o o iD o o DE 3 t N The cam and the encoder 3 are located on the same shaft Paper exit pressure sensor PS10 4 detects the slits on the encoder in order to determine the home position of the decurler roller The pressure applied to the paper exit decurler roller is changed by the cam position in four levels release 8 low pressure 7 middle pressure 6 and high pressure 5 The pressure level is controlled according to the time period of the M54 rotation from when the PS10 turns off 2 3 E a 5 SN 8 7 6 5 a03ut2c076ca 1 Paper exit decurler roller 5 High pressure 2 Cam 6 Middle pressure 3 Encoder Low pressure 4 PS10 B Release B Print mode and paper exit decurler roller pressure level The pressure level applied to the paper exit decurler roller changes according to print mode Print mode Pressure amount Standby jam processing Release Straight paper exit mode Low pressure Double sided mode Middle pressure Reverse paper exit mode High pressure 99 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT
264. dehumidifier heater 2 HTR2 PF only inside the LU option Then if SW is turned ON when SW1 is turned off AC power can be supplied or HTR1 HTR2 When the SW1 and the sub power switch SW2 are turned on 24VDC is supplied to the ACDB and the RY 2 is disconnected Since the AC power line to the HTR and the HTR1 HTR2 is shut off with the RY 2 the power is not supplied to the heaters even when the SW3 is turned on 131 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI z a amp S 25 OTHER CONTROLS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 5 ACS control 25 5 1 Switching from the color mode to the black and white mode A A OUTLINE If more than 5 black and white sheets are fed consecutively from the DF in which both the color sheets and the black and white sheets are stored the pressure on the first transfer rollers Y M C are released and it shifts to the black and white mode At this time the switch is performed during the job so there is a time lag between the color print and the black and white print Switching sequence from the color mode to the black and white mode The second transfer for the previous print sheet color is complete A pressure is applied only to the first transfer roller K the first transfer rollers Y M C are in release state Writing K is started The operation of the drum unit Y M C the developing unit Y M C and the toner
265. dges burrs and other damages The user or CE may be injured Do not allow any metal parts such as clips staples and screws to fall into the product They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit Current can leak leading to a risk of product trouble or fire Check high voltage cables and sheaths for any damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage Current can leak leading to a risk of trouble or fire Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit P H unit incorporating a laser make sure that the power cord has been disconnected The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight 0 Ji 5 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints NWARNING Do not remove the cover of the write unit Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount ing position The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight When replacing a lithium battery replace it with a new lith ium battery specif
266. dity conditions To prevent unevenness in density caused by the difference in sensitivity between the part that the cleaner or the developer is applied to and other parts when leaving them in low normal humidity conditions Operation Rotates the drum for approx 4 min and 30 sec during warm up if the fusing temperature is 50 degrees C or less when the sub power switch SW2 is turned ON Performs the following operations based on the environmental decision if the fusing temperature is more than 50 degrees C when the SW2 is turned ON If the product is not ready to print one minute after turning the SW2 on under high humidity conditions the drum is rotated for 4 min and 30 sec On the other hand if the fusing warm up is completed within one minute after turning the SW2 on the drum is not rotated Under low normal humidity conditions the drum is rotated slightly at constant intervals based on the humidity and the period of time that the product is left to stand Environmental decision control Purpose To achieve high print quality the temperature humidity sensor detects the environmental temperature and humidity and feed back the findings to the various types of controls to maintain the image at a fixed quality Execution timing The ambient status is judged using the measurement result of the sensor under the following conditions More than eight hours have passed since turning the sub power switch SW2 off previous time when turn ing
267. e o o 6 LO n 21 4 15502102014 1 Rear stopper 3 Rear stopper solenoid 503 2 Job partition plate 4 Job partition solenoid SD2 COMPOSITION OPERATION 20 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 CONVEYANCE SECTIO 6 2 6 Front stopper paper press arm drive 2 1 LS 501 502 lt 5 7 a 15502102015 1 Spring 4 Spring 2 Paper press solenoid 3 SD8 5 Front stopper 3 Paper press arm 3 6 Front stopper solenoid SD9 21 LS 501 502 lt LLI gt 2 7 a 6 SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 22 6 3 Operation 6 3 1 Stacker tray conveyance While in the stacker tray non sort mode and the stacker tray sort mode paper is conveyed into the stacker tray A Decurler Paper that has passed through the 1st gate is conveyed to the grip belt by the decurler roller At this time the correction of curled paper is made by the decurler roller B Grip conveyance Paper conveyed by the decurler roller enters and is help by the grip provided on the grip belt The paper held by he grip is conveyed to the section above the stacker tray by the rotation of the grip belt Two grips are provided on the grip belt and each one of them conveys paper one after the other T
268. e 117 2A RM TTC 117 242 Image De NAN inire OC OP eie do sob is u daa a deae e 118 SO OTHE a e 121 29 1 Power TT SY BOS Ra a sas 121 25 1 1 Parts that operate when the main power switch SW1 is turned on 121 25 1 2 Parts that operate when the sub power switch SW2 isturnedon 122 20 2 Control s dae Res asa naga RO RR EE 123 25 2 1 FG o oe l ace Dx tube ve bip aa eu red dong oe bb akhata 123 ua rade mood auct se G oa ped k aq ad 124 PO COUN SOMO d iode e leat ele ba kg ak edd o Leg ape eoi dtd 129 250 1 Se TAPE cis deed cx Euer oo t ese RR A Je d a buc 129 25 9 2 Counter operation sero siss raiat 130 25 4 Dehumidifier heater control i i unas Soh Rer abd Sade 131 255 AUS COMO ys 132 25 5 1 Switching from the color mode to the black and whitemode 132 25 5 9 Count when using ACS KA NG Sasa EP A ERG TN CASE ke eee amada 132 iv Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B OUTLINE 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A System configuration 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 15
269. e ON 4 Paper exit sensor PS306 2 Reverse sensor PS305 5 Original 3 Paper exit conveyance path 24 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 Control 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 7 When the paper exit solenoid SD301 is turned on 2 after the scanning 1 is completed the paper exit gate is set in the straight paper exit path 2 The reverse paper exit motor M303 is turned on at the same time as the conveyance motor M302 and section the original conveyed by the conveyance belt is conveyed to the paper exit roller of the reverse paper exit 3 After the specified time has elapsed from when the reverse sensor PS305 is turned off M303 slows down Speed 4 to make the original aligned when it is ejected and the original is ejected to the paper exit stacker at low 4 After the specified time has elapsed from when the paper exit sensor PS307 is turned off M303 is turned off 5 Conveyance motor M302 Forward 1 3 4 Reve rse Reverse sensor P5305 Reverse paper exit motor M303 For ward Reve rse High Paper exit sensor P5306 Reverse solenoid SD302 Paper exit solenoid SD301 2 5 a052t2c017ca 1 Scanning 4 Switching at low speed M303 2 Sets the paper exit gate in the straight paper 5 Paper exiting completed exit path 3 M802 and starts op
270. e conveyance section and then conveyed to the folding section The overlap mechanism is the mechanism to overlap the paper in adequate paper conveyance order The oper ation is conducted by the right angle conveyance gate 1 driven by the right angle conveyance gate solenoid SD2 7 and the overlap stopper 5 driven the overlap motor M13 3 The overlap home sensor PS17 4 detects the home position of the overlap stopper The overlap stopper 5 is positioned at the position where the trailing edge of paper 2 is positioned 20 mm below from the right angle conveyance gate 1 in accordance with the paper size when it stands by for the paper N When the 02 is turned off the paper from the main body is conveyed into between the right angle conveyance gate 1 and the overlap assist roller B Then the paper is conveyed further by the overlap assist roller 8 driven by the entrance conveyance motor M1 and stopped by the overlap stopper SD 501 z lt ul pu 2 77 a o 5 61 15ant2c011nb 1 Right angle conveyance gate 5 Overlap stopper 2 gt Trailing edge of paper 6 Front side view 3 Overlap motor M13 7 Right angle conveyance gate solenoid 502 4 Overlap home sensor PS17 A 8 Overlap assist roller A 2 SD 501 z lt ui 2
271. e 3rd copy 77 FS 607 lt 5 7 a z 4 IRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 5 Shift control The FNS transfer motor M1 drives the shift roller The shift roller moves itself backward to shift the paper while ransferring the paper to the main tray FS 607 A Shiftoperation During conveying the paper to the main tray 1 the crank mechanism 3 shifts the shift movable section 5 including the shift roller 4 approximately 30 mm backward 6 to shift and exit the paper when shift roller motor M2 2 rotates The shift roller home sensor PS18 7 detects the shift position COMPOSITION OPERATION 15jkt2c008na 1 To the main tray 5 Shift movable section 2 Shift roller motor M2 6 Rear 3 Crank mechanism Shift roller home sensor PS18 4 Shift roller 78 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 IRANSFER SECTION B Shift control In the sort group mode the shift roller motor M2 turns ON 2 and shifts the shift movable section after a spec ified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor 54 detects the trailing edge of the paper 1 The FNS transfer motor M1 drives the shift roller It shifts the paper while transferring it 2 stops when the shift roller completes the shift operation and the shift roller home sensor PS18 turns ON 3 Then M2 turns ON 4 again after a specified period of time s
272. e is turned on 3 4 21 1 5 19501102038 1 Multi feed detection board 1 MFDB1 4 More than one sheet of paper 2 Multi feed detection board 2 MFDB2 5 Layer of air 3 One sheet of paper 9 3 6 Paper empty detection control The detection of the presence of paper in the tray section while in the print stop is made by the empty sen sors Up PS33 and Lw PS39 And also the paper empty detection while in the print is made by the PI set sensors Up PS44 and 545 to stop the paper feed from the trays 1 to 5 when PS44 and PS45 detect the trailing edge of the last paper KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL L5 501 502 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improve ment of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the corresponding page A
273. e paper exit direction when M303 drives both forward o KO uL fe and reverse The paper exit gate and the reverse gate switch the path of the reverse paper exit The paper exit gate 1 is driven by the paper exit solenoid SD301 The path is switched to the reverse path 2 when SD301 is turned off while the path is switched to the straight paper exit path 6 when 50301 S turned on The reverse gate 3 is driven by the reverse solenoid SD302 The path is switched to the reverse stacker path 5 when SD302 is turned off while the path is switched to the back side reverse path 4 when SD302 is turned on z lt ul 77 e a052t2c015ca 1 Paper exit gate 4 Back side reverse path 2 Reverse path 5 Reverse stacker path 3 Reverse gate 6 Straight paper exit path 23 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 3 1 Paper exit control A Straight paper exit 1 Operation When the paper exit solenoid 50301 is turned the paper exit gate 1 is set the straight paper exit path 3 The original 5 is detected by the reverse sensor PS305 2 and the paper exit senor 5306 z 5 05212 016 1 Paper exit gat
274. e paper of 297 mm or more before folding 97 SD 501 lt LLI 2 gt 2 7 a 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 92 8 3 2 Bundle press movement control The bundle press movement is the mechanism to convey the paper to the trimmer section by pressing the paper with the press section to prevent the trimming skew at the trimmer operation after the paper registration operation A Mechanism The bundle press movement motor M17 drives the bundle press section 9 in the main scan direction When receiving the paper with the bundle press stage 2 the bundle press section 9 moves 100 mm back ward from the home position to obtain the paper conveyance path When conducting the bundle registration operation the bundle press section moves to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size The bundle press movement home sensor 536 3 detects the home position of the bundle press section When the bundle press section moves to the home position the metal plate 7 gets down the actuator 6 for he trimmer registration sensor PS55 8 and obtains the paper conveyance path The bundle sensor 4 PS54 10 is for the paper jam detection 9 8 10 1 2 6 4 15ant2c058na 1 Actuator 6 Actuator 2 Bundle press stage Metal plate 3 Bundle press movement home sensor PS36 8 Trimmer registration sen
275. e printing when it reaches the maximum capacity If the exited paper is ejected during the printing operation the tray moves up and the counter reset sensor PS15 8 turns ON and resets the counter It makes possible to exit paper with no limitation The main tray lower limit sensor PS3 4 detects the lower limit of the tray During the intermittent printing oper ation PS3 controls the capacity of the paper exit because the counter does not integrate the total number of exited paper 27 5 607 lt 5 7 a 5 MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Traylift control The main tray lift motor M3 lifts up and down the main tray by rotating in the forward and reverse direction respectively The FNS control board FNSCB controls M3 FS 607 1 Non sort sort group mode Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body the tray lift motor M3 lifts up the tray until the main tray upper limit sensor PS2 turns ON lifts down the tray when the paper passes the main tray paper exit sensor PS6 lifts up the tray again after a specified period of time since the PS2 turns OFF and then stops when PS2 turns ON These operations are repeated for every paper Main tray paper exit sensor PS6 Main tray upper limit sensor PS2 UP Tray lift motor M3 1 15jkt2c017na 1 start signal turned O
276. e punch encoder sensor PS306 2 Then M301 reverses and the punch home sensor PS301 1 returns to ON and the M301 stops finally When a specified time elapsed after M1 stops temporarily M1 resumes rotating and paper is transferred 15kjt2e008na 1 2 SI 4 5 6 Punch home sensor P5301 Punch encoder sensor PS306 Punch motor M301 Actuator Slide link Punch encoder plate 7 Punching blade 8 Operation of 3 hole punching in the 2 to 3 hole mode and 4 hole punching in the 2 to 4 hole mode 9 Operation of 2 hole punching in the 2 to 3 hole mode and 2 hole punching in the 2 to 4 hole mode 73 PK 512 513 COMPOSITION OPERATION PK 512 513 lt LLI a a S 4 PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 74 1 2to 3 holes mode In the 2 to 3 punched hole mode the groove of the switching cam of the 3 hole punching blade is shaped so that the rear side is concentric with the rotating axis and the front side is curved toward the rotating axis For this reason when the switching cam is rotated clockwise the punching blade is driven downward and when the cam is rotated counterclockwise the punching blade is not driven The shape of the groove of the punching blade for
277. e sensors may return to the sensor detection position due to slack in the paper and detected by the sensors again unexpectedly To prevent the mis detection the sensors carry out the detection operation twice every time 3 2 a03xt2c015ca 1 Paper feed motor 1 8 Vertical conveyance clutch 3 MC9 2 Vertical conveyance sensor 3 PS26 9 Vertical conveyance roller 3 3 Vertical conveyance sensor 2 PS27 10 Horizontal conveyance clutch 1 MC10 4 Vertical conveyance clutch 1 MC7 11 Horizontal conveyance roller 1 5 Vertical conveyance roller 1 12 Pre registration clutch MC12 6 Vertical conveyance roller 2 13 Pre registration roller 7 Vertical conveyance clutch 2 MC8 14 Horizontal conveyance clutch 2 MC1 1 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION 533 Multi feed detection control The multi feed sensor is provided in the horizontal conveyance section to detect multi feed The multi feed sensor is a ultrasonic sensor consisted of a sending and receiving section The ultrasonic waves sent from the multi feed detection board S MFDTB S are received at the multi feed detection board R MFDTB R The intensity of the ultrasonic waves received by the receiving section differs according to the number of sheets passed between the MFDTB S and MFDTB R Therefore the sensor can detect multi feed by the intensity When multi feed is detected the paper feeding operation wil
278. e shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 2 0 A Revision in relation to launching of C6500 2004 10 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS co FS 503 E N L OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS em ee e rr nnns 1 2 VONT COMPOS MON EM rn 5 Si PAPER PATH vss Baba ba ad ulaqa eaten 6 COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION 4 asia ys UE rd tee EL BYE P AKI PR ae decre 7 7 EERO RG RARE 8 43 Operation a REA SEHR LOWES PE 9 494 Conveyance pat SWIEGRIPIQ mee re OR ka OR edo 9 Se SUB TRAY SECTION dee iei dace ex s icis es leno E oae tex 11 Bal Composition Ae eee 11 Be RETE 11 5 5 3 due Ree DR RR dodo tC P NG 12 6 STAOKER SECTION a papa na ua tun bett e ERU LE eie edt s ke BAA den 13 EE EEE EE EE 13 6 2 DNG rr 14 6 2 1 Stacker entrance roller paddle ve a usss cu ee rhe ee 14 8 6 2 2 Stack assist plate rear stopper drive
279. e specified time passed form when the paper feed sensors 1 PS29 2 PS35 3 PS41 turn on The paper feed clutches 1 MC7 2 and 3 MC1 1 continue to transmit the drive force to the paper eed roller to assist the paper feed until the pre registration roller grips the paper The pre registration operation for the second and subsequent papers 5 is performed turning off 6 the MC10 and MC12 after the specified time passed from when the PS29 PS35 and PS41 turn on so hat the operation does not interrupt feeding of the previous paper When the intermediate sensor 1 PS27 turns on upon detection of the front edge of the previous paper he MC8 MC10 and MC12 turns on again 7 and restart the pre registration bizhub PRO C6500 2 4116 7 Paper feed motor M41 Pick up solenoid 1 5077 2 508 3 509 Paper feed clutch 1 2 MC9 3 MC11 Pre registration clutch 1 MC8 2 MC10 3 MC12 Paper feed sensor 1 PS29 2 PS35 3 P841 lt LLI z a amp z ntermediate conveyance sensor 1 PS27 3 5 a03ut2c051ca 1 Print start signal 5 Second sheet pre registration 2 First sheet loop formation 6 A pause of second sheet pre registration 3 First sheet pre registration Restart of second sheet pre registration 4 Second sheet loop formation 72 Theory of Oper
280. e winding shaft 4 winds the release wires Rt 3 and Lt 6 to move up the bundle press plate Up 1 for releasing the press on the paper 16 when M23 rotates in reverse The bundle press home sensor PS37 11 detects the home position of the bundle press plate Up 1 12 lt z a 15ant2c059nb 1 Bundle press plate Up 9 Actuator 2 Press wire Rt 10 Spring 3 Release wire 11 Bundle press home sensor PS37 4 Wire winding shaft 12 Press wire Lt 5 Bundle press motor M23 131 Spring 6 Release wire Lt 14 Bundle press plate Up down 7 Front side direction 15 Bundle press plate Lw 8 Bundle press lower limit sensor PS47 16 Bundle press plate Up up A 95 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Control The bundle press motor M23 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the paper press operation 2 to press the paper properly when the bundle press movement motor M17 completes the press position search 1 M28 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the bundle press plate Up slightly to prevent the paper from becom ing loose 4 when the bundle press lower limit sensor PS47 detects the lower limit 3 and turns OFF M23 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper 5 after a specified period of time since the trimmer reg istration sensor PS55 detects
281. eccentric cam rotates from 90 to 180 the cam groove 1 on the outside drives the pin 3 provided on the stapling arm 2 in the arrow marked direction The pin at the tip 4 of the stapling arm pushes up the sta pling blade 5 to push out the staple 6 punch out the paper and staple it At the same time to make preparation for the next stapling the staple is bent at 90 by the staple bending blade 8 FS 503 fs503to2021c lt Q z D 1 2 SI 4 Cam groove Stapling arm Pin Pin at the tip 5 6 7 8 Stapling blade Staple Paper Staple bending blade 37 FS 503 COMPOSITION OPERATION 7 STAPLE 32 R SECTION C Staple cut clinch control When arm 2 in the arrow marked direction Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 he eccentric cam rotates from 180 to 270 the pin 1 provided on the inside drives the staple cut clinch At the start of rotation the lever operation of the staple cut clinch arm 2 rotates the coupling metal fitting 3 to pull the pin 4 in the arrow marked direction and the staple 7 inserted into the round hole 6 of the staple cut blade 5 is cut Staple scraps that have been cut drop into the duct to be collected in the staple scraps box With the further rotation of the eccentric cam the tip of the presser metal fitting B that is interlocked with the staple cut
282. ed 3 e In black and white mode only the first transfer roller K is pressed The rotating position of the cam is detected by the first transfer HP sensor PS15 The rotation amount of the cam is controlled by the drive force of the M19 that starts to rotate when the 515 turns off HTG lt 5 7 a a03ut2c035ca 1 n standby mode 10 Drum M 2 n black and white mode 11 Drum C 3 n full color mode 12 Drum K 4 First transfer roller K pressure release arm 13 First transfer roller K 5 Drive coupling 14 First transfer roller C 6 First transfer roller K pressure release arm 15 First transfer pressure release motor M19 ri First transfer roller C pressure release cam 16 Color First transfer roller assy 8 Drum Y 17 Firsttransfer roller M 9 Transfer belt 18 First transfer roller Y 57 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 11 3 2 First transfer control A First transfer operation Toner on the drum is transferred onto the transfer belt by a DC bias applied to the first transfer roller that presses the transfer belt from its inside B First transfer roller DC bias The DC bias for the first transfer roller changes depending on the following conditions Process speed Black and white mode or color mode e Humidity Count of uses of the first
283. eed motor M1 is transmitted to the pre registration roller to feed paper inside the main body PF 601 HT 504 lt 5 7 a 21 PF 601 HT 504 lt LLI a amp x 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION 22 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 3 2 Conveyance control For the vertical conveyance the driving force of the paper feed motor M1 1 is transmitted by turning on and off the vertical conveyance clutches 1 MC7 4 2 MC8 7 and 3 8 For the horizontal conveyance the driving force of paper feed motor M1 is transmitted by turning on and off the horizontal conveyance clutches 1 MC10 10 2 MC11 14 and the pre registration clutch MC12 12 Paper fed from tray 4 is conveyed to the vertical conveyance rollers 1 5 2 6 and 3 9 driven through MC8 and then conveyed to the horizontal conveyance section Paper fed from tray 4 vertically or fed from tray 5 is conveyed to the pre registration roller 13 by the hori zontal conveyance roller 1 11 driven via the MC10 Then the pre registration control described above is performed and the paper is fed inside the main body When the vertical conveyance sensors 2 PS27 3 and 3 PS26 2 detect the paper trailing edge the sensors read it twice within the specified time The paper trailing edge once passed through th
284. ensor PS27 8 detects the home position of the eccentric cam Lo a o lt a 7 a 15ant2c040na o 1 Gear 5 Saddle stitching hold Lw 2 Eccentric cam 6 Saddle stitching hold Up 3 Spring Front side direction 4 Am B Saddle stitching press home sensor PS27 63 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Control 1 Saddle stitching mode At the end of the paper alignment operation 1 the saddle stitching press motor M21 rotates to move the sad dle stitching hold Up downward 2 and hold the paper between the saddle stitching holds Up and Lw Then the clincher up down motor M20 starts rotating and the saddle stitching hold Up is pushed up by the saddle stitching hold Lw while holding the paper 3 M20 rotates in the reverse direction and lowers the saddle stitch ing hold Lw 5 when the clinching operation 4 is started The saddle stitching hold Up is also lowered by the Spring M21 turns ON and go back the saddle stitching hold Up to its standby position 6 after a specified period of time since the clinching operation is started Lo D 5 Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Rt M9 Reverse Clincher up down Forward motor M20 R Clinchers Rt 09 Lt 010 Saddle stitching press motor M21
285. eory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 PF 601 Front loading type two tray paper feeder B Functions Number of trays Two trays All trays universal Tray capacity 6 000 sheets 80 g m standard paper 3 000 sheets x 2 trays C Paper type Paper size SRA3 B4 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 BSS A5 BOS A6S 3x19 12x18 11 x 17 8 2 x 14 8 x 11 81 x 115 81 x 13 81 4 x 13 81 x 1814 8x 13 8K 16K 16KS Tab paper A4 8 x 11 Custom paper Max 330 x 487mm Min 100 x 148 mm Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper coated paper Paper weight Tray 4 64 to 256g m Tray 5 64 to 300g m 1 AS and A68 are fed only from the tray 5 D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main bogy E Machine data Power source 24 12 5VDC 200 to 240VAC supplied both from the main body Maximum power consump DC 90W or less AC 100W or less tion Dimensions 947 W x 750 D x 1045 H mm Weight Approx 170kg F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096RH with no condensation PF 601 HT 504 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1 2 HT 504 A Type Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Type Fan heater type dehumidifier heater B Maintenance
286. er Conveyance method Entrance convey ance Roller conveyance method Stacker tray con veyance Grip conveyance method Sub tray convey ance Roller conveyance method Coupling convey ance Roller conveyance LS 501 only Alignment method Movable alignment lever stacker tray only A Method of stacking Horizontal stack ing Mixing of original sizes not allowed stacker tray only Shifting method Conveyance direction shift Shift amount 20 mm stacker tray only B Functions Mode Stacker tray non sort mode Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made Sub tray mode Exited into the sub tray with no processing made Stacker tray sort mode Exited into the stacker tray after being shifted 20mm Coupling mode Exited into the post processing unit with no processing Maximum number of sheets loadable made Stacker tray 5 000 sheets 80 g m Sub tray 200 sheets 80 g m N o D Lo LO N i LS 501 502 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 C Type of paper A Paper size Stacker tray When 5 000 sheets loaded SRAG B4 SRA4 5 45 A4 45 13 19 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 14 8 2 x 11 8 115 8 x 13 81 4 x 13 8 s x 13 4 8 x 18 8K 8 16K Wide paper A4 45 B5 55 A5 12 x 18 11x17 8 2
287. er on the transfer belt the roller is contaminated with the toner To clean the roller a negative and positive high DC bias is applied to the second transfer roller Up alternately so hat the toner on the second transfer roller Lw is attracted to the transfer belt The toner transferred to the belt surface is removed by the transfer belt cleaning described in the previous section 21 4 5 4 a03ut2c012ca 1 Transfer belt 4 When a positive DC bias is applied 2 Second transfer roller Lw 5 When a negative DC bias is applied 3 Second transfer roller Up Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS 6 12 Toner collection Sub step 5 o 8 The toner removed from the drums the transfer belt is collected to the toner collection box through the toner collection screw 9 DE o 3 T N a remo 13 2 a I p gt 4 5 xe 6 v h E 77 e a 1 a03ut2c013ca 1 Toner collection box 4 Toner collecting port Drum M 2 Toner collecting port Transfer belt 5 Toner collecting port Drum C 3 Toner collecting port Drum Y 6 Toner collecting port Drum K 21 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006
288. er to the small size roller by the normal rotation of the decurler motor M55 The small size roller and the reverse roller Lw convey the paper to the ADU reverse section by the reverse paper exit motor M33 When the decurler sensor PS62 detects the rear end of paper and turns off 2 the M55 and M33 switch to reverse rotation The rollers rotate in reverse and convey the paper in reverse direction but due to the guide on the convey ance path the paper is conveyed to the paper exit roller not to the reverse gate side By means of the above operations paper is exited with its upside down When the paper exit sensor PS13 detects the rear end of the paper and turns off 3 the M55 and M33 starts the normal rotation again and the next paper is reversed exited Registration motor M30 Paper exit solenoid SD4 Decurler motor Forward M55 Reverse Forward Reverse paper exit motor M33 Reverse Paper exit motor M54 Decurler sensor PS62 Reverse paper exit sensor PS19 Paper exit sensor PS13 2 3 4 5 a03ut2c075ca 1 Print start signal is received 4 Second sheet reverse conveyance 2 First sheet reverse conveyance 5 Second sheet exit 3 First sheet exit Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION 20 3 3 Paper exit decurler roller pressure control A Paper exit decurler roller pressure mechanism The paper exit
289. erating for paper exit 25 DF 609 lt s 5 7 a 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Reverse paper exit 1 Operation The paper exit solenoid 0301 and the reverse solenoid 0302 are off in this mode o 7 The original 4 from the section is fed around the reverse roller 3 through the paper exit 1 and conveyed to the reverse stacker 5 by the reverse gate 7 2 The original stops proceeding with its rear end nipped by the reverse roller 8 5 6 lt LLI e z 7 05212 018 a 1 Paper exit gate OFF 5 Reverse stacker 2 Reverse sensor P5305 6 gt Conveyance direction 3 Reverse roller Reverse gate OFF 4 Original B Nipping rear end of the original 3 The reverse roller stops rotating once then starts reverse rotating and feed the original to the reverse paper exit conveyance path 4 The paper exit roller slows down when feeding the rear end of the original and ejects the original with no Skew 26 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 REVERSE PAPER EXIT SECTION DF 609 a052t2c019ca 1 Original 8 Paper exit roller 2 gt Reverse paper exit lt
290. ervice manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark e To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show 4h in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS PF 601 HT 504 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPEGIFICATIONS patct tese Ent qd ptor ded dibus rdi 1 EU PEDI nuls anu aioe nga ped IM EN 1 Da MUST 2 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGR
291. ess speed correction control This control is carried out to avoid improper slack in paper when the paper comes to the fusing section from the second transfer section If the fusing process speed differs from the process speed of the second transfer section difference in speed between the fusing roller Lw 8 and the second transfer roller Lw 4 when the leading edge of the paper is nipped 1 by the fusing roller Lw the paper loop amount becomes increase The fusing loop sensor PS64 5 located between the second transfer roller Lw and the fusing roller Lw detects the paper loop When the paper loop is detected by the PS64 the fusing process speed is corrected so that it becomes faster than the preset speed The fusing process speed correction control is applied to all the 1 1 speed 2 3 speed and 1 2 speed a03ut2c079ca 704 1 2 3 4 5 Proper paper loop 6 Actuator Transfer belt 7 Improper paper loop Second transfer roller Up B Fusing roller Lw Second transfer roller Lw 9 Fusing roller 2 PS64 10 Fusing belt Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 21 FUSING SECTION 21 3 2 Pressure release control The fusing roller Lw is pressed against the fusing belt during performing a print job e When the fusing paper exit sensor PS17 detects paper the last page of the job after completion of fusing the fusing roller Lw moves to stop pressing the fusing belt
292. ete toner image on the belt to paper second transfer The bias supply is stopped 10 and second transfer cleaning is canceled The second transfer operation is terminated after the specified time passed from when supplying the devel oping AC bias for black is stopped 13 After the specified time passed from when M19 stops applying pressure 14 against the transfer belt the bias is applied 16 and second transfer cleaning is performed lt 5 N a 43 9 PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 M21131 141 5116 I8 111112 15 Drum motor Y M14 mo BEN T Developing motor Y M20 Toner supply motor Y M49 Erase lamp Y EL Y bizhub PRO C6500 Charging corona Y HV 1 Laser drive board Y LASDB Y Developing bias Y DC HV 1 Developing bias Y AC HV 1 1st transfer Y HV 2 Drum motor M M15 Developing motor M M21 Toner supply motor M M50 Erase lamp M EL M Charging corona M HV 1 Laser drive board M LASDB M Developing bias M DC HV 1 Developing bias M AC HV 1 1st transfer M HV 2 Drum motor C M16 Developing motor C M22 Toner supply motor C M51 Erase lamp C EL C Charging corona C HV 1 Laser drive board C LASDB C Developing bias C DC HV 1 Developing bias C AC
293. exit belt 1 and stops it 2 after a specified period of time when the tri folding exit sensor PS9 detects the leading edge of paper The folding conveyance motor M4 stops 3 after a specified period of time since PS9 detects the trailing edge of paper Folding conveyance motor M4 Tri folding exit clutch CL1 Tri folding exit sensor PS9 1 2 3 15ant2c082na 1 Exit belt driven 8 Folding conveyance motor M4 stopped 2 Exit belt stopped 43 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 D Center folding control When the folding main scan alignment motor Fr M7 stops at the completion of the paper alignment operation he 1st folding blade motor M18 turns ON and rotates in the reverse direction 2 to let the 1st folding blade insert the paper between the folding rollers 1 and 2 When the 1st folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 turns ON the folding conveyance motor M4 rotates in the reverse direction to rotate the folding rollers 1 and 2 in he reverse direction to release the paper When PS20 turns OFF M18 and 4 stop rotating 3 In the folding operation for the subsequent set M18 rotates in the forward direction 4 and it stops when the 1st olding blade home sensor 2 PS21 turns ON 5 LO D R 4 Folding Forward H conveyance motor 4 Reverse Folding main Forward j scan align
294. f time the punch motor M10 drives for punching After completion of punching M13 returns the punch rear claw to the home position The position of the home position is detected by the punch registration home sensor PS1 1 B Punch hole switching control The punch hole is switched according to the rotational direction of the punch motor M10 In the case of 2 holes M10 rotates counterclockwise to drive the 2 hole punch edge And in the case of 3 holes M10 rotates clockwise to drive the 3 hole punch edge The position of the 2 hole punch edge is detected by the 2 hole punch home sensor PS8 and the position of the 3 hole punch edge is detected by the 3 hole 4 hole punch home sensor PS9 27 5 PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 C Punch scraps box control The setting of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps box set sensor PS12 and the full condi tion of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps full sensor PS26 FD 501 lt LLI a a S 28 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION A 64 Composition eed 3rd folding mechanism FD 501 2nd folding mechanism Folding gate 1st folding mechanism Registration roller F4 E lt ul z 77 6
295. factured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emit ted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation S 13 SAFETY INFORMATION INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on in the machine When accessing these areas for maintenance repair or adjustment special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock NVORSICHT Z PRECAUCI N A ATTENZIONE CAUTION sj m DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit otherwise you may be injured A CAUTION N CAUTION 9 nen mm The Mang unit is A CAUTION To avoid getting VA VORSICHT burned DO NOT DO NOT INSERT your IHE ME TOUCH finger into the two RADF PRECAUCION hinge portions otherwise ini ATTENZIONE you may be injured A CUIDADO Temperatura alta lox V imm IBE A ATTENZIONE i N CAUTION DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit otherwise you may be injured a
296. follows 1 IC board Standard printer 2 bizhub PRO 920 Main body 3 PS 502 PostScript3 Option PS3 Option 4 Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 98 Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Windows NT 4 0 or Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP When the description is made in combination of the OS s mentioned above B Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 2000 Windows NT 2000 XP Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP C Electrical parts and signals Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive but only some instances among many Classification Load symbol Ex of signal name Description IN PS Sensor PS Door PS1 Sensor detection signal SIG 102 PS 24V Power to drive the solenoid Solenoid SD DRV Drive signal SOL 24V Power to drive the clutch Clutch CL DRV Drive signal SOL C 3 Classification Load symbol Ex of signal name Description 24V Power to drive the motor CONT Drive signal Motor M sid DRV2 D Drive signals of two kinds D2 U M _W Drive signals control signals of three kinds DRV1 DRV2
297. g edge of paper 6 after a specified period of time since PS2 detects the trailing edge of paper 4 This control is conducted for every paper exited to the subtray 4 Horizontal conveyance sensor 1 PS2 Subtray exit sensor PS11 Roller release solenoid 4 504 p m 15 l6 15ant2c007na 1 Detection of the leading edge of paper 4 Detection of the trailing edge of paper 2 804 ON 5 804 OFF 3 Release of nip 6 Nipping at the trailing edge of paper 4 3 4 Subtray paper full detection control The subtray paper full detection is conducted by the subtray paper full sensor PS12 via the actuator P812 turns ON under normal circumstances The subtray paper full condition is detected and the subtray paper full signal is transmitted to the main body when the actuator is pressed by stacked paper and PS12 turns OFF Then the main body displays the message on its operation panel 77 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION A 5 1 Composition SD 501 Right angle conveyance gate Alignment claws Alignment Right angle convey M section ance roller 1 Right angle convey ance roller 2 Overlap section Overlap stopper lt e LLI 2 a amp x Right angle conveyance Right angle conveyance roller 1 Driven roller 3 Driven 15ant2c008nb 8
298. ged to On compulsory D Temperature limiting dehumidification control e After the pre drying is finished the is turned on or off to keep the target temperature Ambient humidity Target temperature rise in the tray Lower than 55 Not controlled 56 to 60 6 C 61 to 65 7 C 66 to 70 8 C 71 to 75 9 C Higher than 76 10 Conditions stop the dehumidification control When other than coated paper is selected as the paper type while the control is in progress e When the dehumidifier fan heater setting is changed to Off compulsory while the control is in progress 26 M R KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL RU 503 504 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark e To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show 4h in the lower outside section of the cor
299. gnal turned ON 1st to 9th paper Paper transferred to the stacker in low speed Paper assist roller in operation 5 6 7 Stapling operation Closing the paper exit opening Standing by for the paper of the subsequent copy Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 2 Stapling mode the paper size is A4 B5 or 8 7 x 11 with the bypassing operation The 1st copy is transferred by the same operation for the paper whose size is other than A4 B5 or 812 x 11 When transferring the 1st and 2nd paper of the 2nd and following copies the stacker entrance motor M13 stops after a specified period of time since the stacker entrance sensor PS5 detects the trailing edge of the last paper of the 1st copy 3 To prevent the paper of the 2nd copy is transferred to the stacker before the stapling operation for the 1st copy is completed the 1st paper for the 2nd copy stands by in the bypass path The stacker entrance motor M13 turns ON and rotates in high speed after a specified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the trailing edge of the 2nd paper 5 Then the 1st and 2nd paper are over apped and transferred to the stacker 6 e e BIG 5 FNS entrance sensor PS4 Stacker entrance sensor PS5 Stacker entrance High speed motor M19 Low I z Stapler motor Fr M14 I m i S 1 2 6 15jmt
300. gnment home sensor Fri P518 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Fr2 P549 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Rr P519 tst folding blade home sensor 1 P520 1st folding blade home sensor 2 PS21 1 15ant2c079na 1 Main body start signal 5 Alignment claws Fr shelter operation 2 Alignment stopper Rr moved for appropriate paper size 6 Alignment operation 3 Paper conveyed by the alignment claws Fr Alignment claws Fr moved to the home position 4 Alignment operation B Alignment stoppers Rr moved to the home position A 39 SD 501 lt LLI S z a amp S 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 40 6 3 3 Folding control A Mechanism Folding consists of the 1st folding and 2nd folding The 1st folding is conducted in the multi letter folding mode the multi center folding mode and the saddle stitching mode The 2nd folding is conducted only in the multi letter folding mode In the 1st folding operation the 1st folding blade 7 pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers 1 8 and 2 3 The folding rollers 1 and 2 are pressured each other by the spring 2 The 1st folding blade is driven by the 1st blade motor M18 4 via the crank mechanism 5 In the 2nd folding operation the 2nd folding blade 13 pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers 2
301. grounding and may result in fire or electric shock If proper wall outlet is not available advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result f two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely NN Contact problems may lead to increased resistance Q overheating and the risk of fire 5 4 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Connection to Power Supply NWARNING Check whether the product is grounded properly If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product you may suffer electric shock while operating the product Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet Power Plug and Cord NWARNING When using the power cord set inlet type that came with this product make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product When securing measure is provided secure the cord with the fixture properly If the power cord inlet type is not connected to the prod uct securely a contact problem may lead to increased resistance overheating and risk of fire
302. h through the L size gate Inner path Punch registration sensor PS6 19501102039 4 3 2 Conveyance line speed control The conveyance line speed of each conveyance section varies according to the type of paper and paper weight A Line speed switching The following list shows each of conveyance sections and the range of the conveyance line speed Conveyance section Conveyance line speed Entrance conveyance section 290 to 1000 mm s Intermediate conveyance section 800 to 1000 mm s Punch conveyance section 490 to 1000 mm s Main tray paper exit section 205 to 1000 mm s Sub tray paper exit section 500 mm s 23 FD 501 lt 5 7 a FD 501 lt Lu z a 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 24 433 Alignment control On paper conveyed to the punching position an alignment operation is made by the 2 alignment plates to improve the accuracy of the punch hole positioning and the folding And its home position is detected by the alignment plate home sensor PS10 When the start button is turned ON M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the alignment plates Fr and Rr to the standby position of the paper size When the paper is conveyed to the punch position in a specified number of steps after it passe
303. h switching The conveyance path of the paper that has been conveyed to the entrance guide plate varies according to the presence of a punch or folding the tray into which paper is exited and the paper size The switching of the con veyance path is made by the entrance gate the sub tray gate the S size gate the L size gate and the folding gate For the folding gate see 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION FD 501 A Entrance gate Switching is made between the straight conveyance and the punch folding conveyance by the entrance gate solenoid SD1 In the case of the straight conveyance the SD1 remains OFF When conveying the 1st sheet of paper for punching folding operation SD1 is energized a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper SD1 is energized in accord with the conveyance direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the FD entrance sensor PS1 COMPOSITION OPERATION fd501to2005c 1 Entrance gate 3 Straight mode 2 Punch mode or folding mode 79 FD 501 lt LLI S z a amp S 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 20 B Sub tray gate Switching is made between the main tray paper exit and the sub tray paper exit by the sub tray gate solenoid SD9 In the case of the main tray paper exit
304. he stacker section The paper exit arm lifts up the paper to the paper exit roller and then the paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray 7 stops when the paper exit belt home sensor PS9 turns ON FS 607 2 Stapling mode when the paper length is B5S or longer in the paper feed direction Completing the stapling operation the paper exit motor M8 rotates When the paper exit home sensor PS12 detects the paper exit opening is closed the paper exit roller motor M7 rotates to drive the paper exit arm in the stacker section The paper exit arm lifts up the paper to the paper exit roller and then the paper exit roller exits the paper to the main tray M7 stops when the paper exit belt home sensor PS9 turns ON 3 Folding saddle stitching mode After completing the stapling operation the saddle stitching stopper motor M18 drives the saddle stitching stopper to move the paper to the folding position To prevent the paper exit arm to contact with the paper standing by at the folding position the paper exit arm does not rotate 4 Tri folding mode The paper exit roller motor M7 rotates in the reverse direction to assist in transferring the paper to the tri folding position after completing the paper alignment operation M7 stops when the paper exit belt home sensor PS9 turns ON lt 5 7 a 43 FS 607 lt c LLI a
305. he 2nd copy into the bypass route A Specified period of time after the PS4 detected the trailing edge of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy the bypass solenoid turns OFF SD5 does not turn on when the 3rd and subsequent pages are being conveyed 1 2 3 A A FNS entrance sensor PS4 Conveyance motor M1 Bypass solenoid SD5 4 fs503t02030c 1 1st copy B 3rd copy 2 2nd copy 4 Drawing of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 SUB TRAY SECTION 5 SUB TRAY SECTION A 5 4 Composition FS 503 Sub tray Sub tray paper full sensor PS30 Sub tray paper exit roller fs503to2004c 5 2 Drive 1 2 lt ul 6 z 6 fs503to2005c 1 Sub tray paper exit motor M6 2 Sub tray paper exit roller 71 FS 503 lt LLI z a amp 5 SUB SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 72 5 3 Operation A Sub tray paper full detection control When paper that has been exited into the sub tray gets to the specified thickness the sub tray paper full sensor PS30 turns ON to send the sub tray paper full information to the main body Then the main body displays the massage on the operation panel 1 2 fs503to2006c 1 Pape
306. he PI lift plate until PS84 and PS40 turn ON FD 501 z lt ul a amp o 5 7 fd501to2032c 1 Paper lift motor Up M8 7 Paper lift motor Lw M9 2 Pl lift plate home sensor Up PS34 B PIlift plate home sensor Lw PS40 3 Actuator Up 9 Lift arm Lw 4 Pl upper limit sensor Up PS32 10 plate Lw 5 Actuator Lw 11 Lift arm Up 6 Pl upper limit sensor Lw PS38 12 plate Up 53 FD 501 lt LLI 2 a amp 9 PI SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 A 54 9 3 3 Pick up mechanism The picking up of the paper 6 is made when the PI pick up solenoids Up SD13 and Lw SD14 5 turn ON The release arm that is pressed down by the spring 1 in the direction of 2 presses down the paper feed arm 4 to place the pick up rollers Up and Lw 7 in the release condition When SD13 and SD14 5 turn ON the release arm is released upward and the pick up rollers Up and Lw 7 go down by their own weight The pick up roller that is rotated by the PI conveyance motor M7 presses down the paper to pick it up 6 fd501t02033c 1 Spring 5 PI pick up solenoids Up SD 13 and Lw 2 Direction of the spring force SD14 3 Release arm 6 Paper 4 Paper feed arm 7 Pick up rollers Up and Lw Paper feed arm retaining lever 1 is provided in
307. he PS20 turns off 3 the ADU gate solenoid SD10 turns on 5 and closes the ADU gate At the same time the M57 and M32 start to rotate in reverse direction to convey bizhub PRO C6500 he paper reversely When the ADU conveyance sensor PS61 provided on the ADU conveyance section detects the rear end of the paper 6 the rotation direction of the M57 and M32 is switched to normal The SD10 turns off and opens the ADU gate again for the next paper 2 31 6 9 Paper feed motor M41 SIT U stop sensor PS20 U reverse sensor PS2 U conveyance sensor PS61 oa Ureverse motor Foward 32 Reverse gate solenoid 5010 i conveyance clutch conveyance clutch 2 2 U loop motor M57 lt 5 7 a 4115 718 m 1 Print start signal is received 6 Second sheet paper rear end detection 2 First sheet front side fusing complete Second sheet loop formation 3 First sheet paper back end detection B ADU gate close 4 First sheet loop formation 9 First sheet back side fusing complete 5 ADU gate close 19 3 3 Back side centering correction control The ADU centering sensor PS65 detects the paper edges of the paper that has been reverse conveyed from the ADU reverse roller for back side printing Depending on the detected value the distance from the center to the
308. he heat around the developing unit The developing fans 1 M45 1 and 2 M46 2 are provided to cool down the rear of the developing unit The fresh air brought by the M45 and 46 is sent to the rear of the developing unit via the duct 4 The developing fan 3 M64 3 is provided to cool down the heat around the front side of the developing unit The fresh air brought by the M64 is sent to the front of the developing unit via the duct 5 5 1 4 3 a03ut2c040ca M45 4 Duct 2 M46 5 Duct 3 M64 12 3 4 Image stabilization control To achieve stable image quality the following controls are provided Refer to 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL for details See P 110 Toner density control 58 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 13 TONER SUPPLY SECTION 13 TONER SUPPLY SECTION 13 1 Configuration bizhub PRO C6500 Toner supply door open close sensor PS54 Interlock switch 2 MS2 Piezoelectric sensor Y PZS Y Piezoelectric sensor M PZS M Toner bottle clutch Y MC14 Toner supply motor Y M49 Toner bottle clutch M MC15 Toner supply motor M M50 lt oc 5 wn a Toner bottle motor 53 Toner bottle clutch C MC16 Toner supply motor C M51 Toner bottle clutch K MC17 Piezoelectric sensor PZS C Piezoelectric sensor K Toner supply motor K M52 P
309. he position where the grip is waiting for paper from the decurler roller is controlled by the grip conveyance home sensor PS5 US nen Pre 4 3 2 is502102016c 1 Paper 5 Grip 2 Decurler roller 6 Grip belt 3 7 Grip conveyance home sensor PS5 4 Stacker tray Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION C Front stopper control Paper conveyed by the grip strikes against the front stopper equipped to the shift unit and is released from the grip At this time the shift unit has been moved to the position specified in advance for each paper size Two types of the front stoppers more specifically a movable type and a stationary type are employed In stacker tray non sort mode only the movable type front stopper is employed A distance of 20 mm is kept between the position where the movable type front stopper stops and the position in which the stationary type front stopper is which is the shift distance For the front stopper solenoid SD9 that drives the movable type front stopper a latch type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state However a latch type solenoid requires N o D ko LO N l a different control signal for each ON and OFF action
310. he same operating method as in the single sided mode 2 The original is conveyed to the reverse paper exit section 5 to perform back side scan by driving the reverse paper exit motor M303 and the conveyance motor M302 At this time the leading edge of the original Back side that is conveyed in reverse 7 overlaps with the rear end of the original Front side 4 on the right side of the conveyance belt 6 near the reverse paper exit section 7 0 AN 6 5 4 3 a052t20010ca 1 Paper exit gate 6 Conveyance belt 2 Reverse sensor PS305 7 Pushing direction of the scanning section 3 Reverse roller Back side 4 Rear end of the original Front side B Reverse gate 5 gt direction to the reverse paper exit section Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONVEYANCE SECTIO 3 While operating the reverse conveyance 2 the original is conveyed at low speed 4 after a short pause 3 and the original is stuck 5 against the positioning plate 1 4 The back side scan is performed DF 609 6 1 a052t2c011ca 1 Stuck position 4 Pushing at low speed Reverse conveyance 2 Reverse paper exit from the reverse section 5 Positioning completed 3 A pause before being stuck against the positioning plate lt 5 7 a 79
311. heory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 18 REGISTRATION SECTIO 18 2 Drive bizhub PRO C6500 3 2 a03ut2c059ca 1 Loop motor M31 3 Registration roller 2 Loop roller 4 Registration motor M30 lt 5 7 a 83 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI a amp o 18 REGI 18 18 3 STRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 Operation 1 Loop control All papers are passed through the loop roller and conveyed to the registration roller Loop motor M31 that drives the loop roller stops after specified time passed from when the registration sensor PS22 turns ON upon detecting the leading edge of paper Because the registration motor M30 is stopping the leading edge of paper is pressed against the registra tion roller that is not moving The paper forms a small loop before the M31 stops Making paper form a loop enables to correct skew of the paper a03ut2c060ca 1 2 3 4 5 84 Intermediate conveyance roller 2 6 Transfer belt unit Loop roller Leading edge sensor PS63 Registration loop B Registration sensor PS22 Registration roller 9 Intermediate conveyance sensor 2 PS28 Second transfer roller Lw Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 18 REGISTRATION SECTION
312. her 5 Cam mechanism 3 6 Staplers Rr and 49 FS 607 z lt ui 2 a o a o 7 STAPLER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 50 B Staple control 1 Stapling After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate the stapler motors Rr M9 and Fr M14 per form the stapling operation After a specified period of time the clincher motors Rr M10 and Fr M15 bend the staples The stapling operation is completed when the clincher motor home sensors Rr PS32 and Fr PS33 and the stapler motor home sensors Rr PS30 and Fr PS31 detect the home position and turn ON 2 Clogged staple detection During the stapling operation it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the stapler motors Rr M9 and Fr M14 and the clincher motors Rr M10 and Fr M15 rotate in the reverse direction to replace the sta plers and the clinchers to the home positions if the stapler motor home sensors Rr PS30 and PS31 and the clincher motor home sensors Rr PS32 and Fr PS33 do not turn ON after a specified period of time since they turn OFF 3 Cartridge detection The cartridge set switches Rr SW1 and Fr SW3 detect the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a cartridge When no cartridge is set or it is set incorrectly the main body displays the error message on its display panel 4 Staple detection contro
313. hing the trimmer board retaining spring 2 by the plate 1 At the time the opening is approximately 23 mm The position is detected via overcurrent SD 501 3 21 1 15ant2c071na 1 Plate 3 Trimmer board 2 Trimmer board retaining spring z lt 2 B amp o 113 SD 501 lt Lu z a 9 TRIMMER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Control 1 The number of the print paper is 16 or more 32 or more for the saddle stitched paper The trimmer press motor M32 rotates in the reverse direction 2 when the bundle clip motor starts conveying he paper 1 When the trimmer press upper limit sensor PS52 3 detects upper limit position of the trimmer board M32 is stopped and waits for the paper At this time the opening is approximately 20 mm 32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper when the paper is conveyed to the opening by the bun dle press movement motor M17 4 M32 stops when the overcurrent is detected 5 The returning operation to the home position 7 is conducted when the trimmer blade motor M31 completes he trimming 6 Bundle clip motor M11 Bundle press Forward movement motor M17 Reverse Trimmer press motor M32 Forward Reverse Trimmer blade motor M31 Forward Reverse rimmer press uppe
314. iding under the conveyance belt 3 After the specified time from when the reverse sensor PS305 has turned ON M302 and M303 stop rotating once at the same moment Then M302 switches to rotate in reverse 6 while M303 rotates forward 7 and the original is returned further toward the scanning position 4 After the specified time from PS305 has turned OFF M303 8 turns off However the belt keeps conveying 9 1 2 6 Timing sensor PS302 Fonvard mmm Conveyance ER NM az Hap sa motor M302 LOW 7 1 e mm Reverse sensor PS305 MEE Y For High mi ward m I Reverse paper exit motor M303 Reve 9 gt di Reverse solenoid 0302 TT I 3 41 51 7 8 9 05212 022 1 Front side scanning 6 Reverse conveyance of the belt 2 Conveyance to the reverse paper exit sec 7 Conveyance toward the reverse conveyance tion M302 3 Conveyance to the reverse paper exit sec 8 Conveyance completed M303 tion M308 4 Reverse gate setting 9 Reverse conveyance by the conveyance belt 5 Sliding under the conveyance belt 30 M R KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL PF 601 HT 504 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this s
315. ied in the Parts Guide Manual Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority Improper replacement can cause explosion After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied e g optical lamp and fixing lamp be sure to check the instal lation state A risk of fire exists Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly If the interlock does not function you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product e g for clearing paper jam Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges burrs or other pointed parts Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire Make sure that all screws components wiring connec tors etc that were removed for safety check and mainte nance have been reinstalled in the original location Pay special attention to forgotten connectors pinched cables forgotten screws etc A risk of product trouble electric shock and fire exists 5 10 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Consumables NWARNING Toner and developer are not harmful substances but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes etc It may be stimulative A If the substances get in the eye rinse with plenty of water immediately When symptoms
316. immer scraps removal control The scraps removal fan FM1 3 blows air 4 to make sure to put the trimmer scraps to the scraps box 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION P 2 For wl sg 4 3 SD 501 15ant2c115na 1 Left side view 2 Bundle clip lower limit sensor 530 3 Trimmer scraps removal fan FM1 4 5 6 Air Bundle press Bundle clip The trimmer scraps removal fan FM1 operates only in the trimmer mode When the main body start signal 1 turns ON FM1 is rotated and the bundle clip releases 2 the paper FM1 stops for a time to prevent the paper from having the uneven edge When the bundle press motor M23 com lt 5 7 a pletes the paper press 3 FM1 is rotated again to send air so that sheet trimming scraps get in the scraps box without fail Forward Bundle press motor M23 Reverse Trimmer scraps removal fan FM1 Bundle clip lower limit sensor PS30 15ant2c116na 1 Main body start signal 2 Bundle clip released the paper 3 Paper press operation completed 703 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 C Bundle exit control The bundle exit motor M5 rotates in the forward direction and the bundle exit conveyance belt conveys the exit paper 2 after a specified
317. ince it stops It stops when PS18 turns OFF 5 This operation replaces the shift movable section to its original position and then it stands by for the subsequent FS 607 paper to be shifted These operations are repeated for every paper to offset it 1 FNS entrance sensor PS4 FNS transfer motor omme M1 400 mm s 25 mm Shift roller motor M2 Shift roller home sensor PS18 lt a NE 2 3 4 5 15jkt2c009na 1 Trailing edge of the paper detected 4 Moving to the home position started 77 2 Shift started 5 Moving to the home position completed 3 Shift completed 79 FS 607 lt Lu z a 4 TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 4 3 6 Paper exit roller control The paper exit roller motor M7 controlled by the FNS control board FNSCB drives the main tray paper exit roller and the paper exit belt A Non sort sort group mode The paper exit roller motor M7 rotates in high speed when the FNS entrance sensor PS4 detects the leading edge of the paper 1 M7 rotate in low speed 2 and exits the paper after a specified period of time since PS4 detects the trailing edge of the paper To transfer the subsequent paper M7 rotate in high speed again after a specified period of time since the main ray p
318. ing standby To keep the error to a minimum the small size paper 313 mm or less and the large size paper 314 mm or more are moved to the standby position from the position of 539 and PS38 respectively since the standby position for the paper is positioned by the driving time of M26 DC brush motor In the bundle arm assist operation the fore edge side of the paper is pushed up 35 mm or until PS39 turns ON 3 15ant2c065na 1 Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor PS39 4 Bundle arm assist plate 2 Bundle arm assist motor M26 5 Front side direction 8 Bundle arm assist home sensor PS38 6 Paper Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION B Control 1 Small size paper 313 mm or less For the small size paper the bundle arm assist motor M26 rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal 1 turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate at the home position to the position at the bundle arm assist upper limit sensor PS39 2 After a specified period of time M26 rotates in the reverse direction to drive the bundle arm assist plate from the upper limit position to the standby position in accordance with the paper size 3 and stands by for the paper Then M26 rotates in the forward direction to push up the fore edge side of the paper 6 for assisting the bundle arm to be inserted under the fold line of the paper The operation timing 6 of M26 is different be
319. iod of time after that when the roller release solenoid 2 SD6 turns ON to release the right angle conveyance roller 4 7 and convey the paper to he folding section BI 4 Entrance sensor PS1 Right angle Forward conveyance motor M6 Reverse Roller release solenoid 1 508 Roller release solenoid 2 SD6 Roller release solenoid 3 SD7 Right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 Qj 5 6 Ul 15ant2c076na 1 Trailing edge of the last paper of the set detected 5 Folding entrance roller pressure release 2 Right angle conveyance roller 1 pressure 6 Folding entrance roller pressure 3 Paper alignment 7 Right angle conveyance roller 4 pressure release 4 Paper conveyance Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION 6 FOLDING SECTION A 64 Composition SD 501 Alignment claws Fr Conveyance belt main scan tri folding 2nd folding blade Folding roller 3 Folding roller 2 lt 5 7 a Alignment stop per Rr main scan Folding roller 1 EE Folding exit Folding alignment 1st folding blade Center folding exit ua fear pene gu scan 15ant2c015nb A 29 6 FOLDING
320. ion Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTIO 72 8 Bundle arm assist drive Ep D lt e z E 77 4 15ant2c035na 1 Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor 539 4 Bundle arm assist home sensor PS38 2 Leftside view 51 Bundle arm assist motor M26 3 Bundle arm assist plate 57 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 2 9 Bundle clip drive Lo D 2 lt 5 2 7 Ex 15ant2c036nb 8 1 Bundle clip upper limit sensor PS33 6 Release roller 2 Bundle clip motor M1 1 Wire 3 Left side view B Spring 4 Bundle clip lower limit motor PS30 9 Release plate Up 5 Release plate Lw 10 Clip 5 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 73 Operation 7 3 1 Saddle stitching alignment control A Mechanism In the saddle stitching alignment the saddle stitching alignment plates Lt 2 and Rt 8 align the center folded paper 5 in the sub scan direction The saddle stitching alignment motor Lt M16 3 drives the saddle stitching alignment plate Lt 2 in the sub scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions The saddle stitching alignment plate Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size whe
321. is fed from trays 1 2 and 3 is conveyed to the intermediate conveyance section of ADU Paper that is fed from the tray 1 is conveyed to the intermediate conveyance roller 2 of the intermediate conveyance section ADU by the pre registration roller The intermediate conveyance roller 1 assists to convey the paper that is fed from the trays 2 and 3 bizhub PRO C6500 because the conveyance distance to the intermediate conveyance roller 2 is rather long The paper feed motor M41 drives the intermediate conveyance roller 1 via the intermediate conveyance clutch 1 MC13 The MC13 turns ON at the same time as the paper feed clutches 1 MC7 2 MC9 and 3 MC1 1 turn on The MC13 turns OFF after the specified time passed from when the intermediate conveyance sensor 1 PS27 turns on lt ec 5 7 a 87 bizhub PRO C6500 lt c LLI a amp o 18 REGISTRATION SECTION 18 REGISTRATION SECTION 18 1 Configuration Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Registration driven roller Leading edge P Registration 1 sensor PS22 Registration roller Loop roller Registration temperature sensor TEMS1 Registration driven roller Leading edge sensor PS63 Registration tempera ture sensor TEMS1 Loop roller Registration sensor PS22 a03ut2c058ca 82 T
322. is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copy ing lt Financial Instruments gt Personal checks Traveler s checks Money orders Certificates of deposit Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Stock certificates Legal Originals Food stamps Postage stamps canceled or uncanceled Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled Passports Immigration papers Motor vehicle licenses and titles House and property titles and deeds General Identification cards badges or insignias Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies or works of art without permission of the copyright owner When in doubt about the nature of an original consult with legal counsel Detail In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain originals such as paper currency this machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention feature Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped with images may be distorted C 1 Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters lt Theory of Operation section gt OUTLINE System configuration product specifications unit configuration and paper path COMPOSITION OPERATION Configuration of each unit explanation
323. istration sensor Fr and Rr PS8 2 Binarized digital signals and PS9 3 Detection signal of the color registration 5 Color registration mark Pr sensors Fr and Rr PS8 and PS9 analog signal e 37 8 WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 Calculating and correcting the color drift amount The interval between the detection of one edge of the registration mark and the next edge with the PS8 and PS9 sensors are recorded As shown below each time interval between the edge detections is determined with the counts of clock signal and the counts with the PS8 and those with the PS9 are recorded separately bizhub PRO C6500 5 1123 4567 8 2 Kay III mnn tot v vv 4 150 300 180 330 t tt tt tt ttt 1 Detecting direction transferring direction 4 Clock signal 2 Address number of the detected edge 5 Binarized digital signals 3 Counts of clock signal corresponding to the address for each detected edge lt LLI z a amp The recorded time intervals for cyan magenta yellow colors are compared with those for black color and the differences are determined as color drift amounts In addition to that the difference between the PS8 and PS9 time intervals of black color is compared with those of the other colors in order to determine color drift amounts caused by tilt of write units
324. ition at which paper is stopped by the rear stopper is the home position of the rear stopper and this is detected by the rear stopper home sensor PS35 21 FS 503 lt LLI a a S 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 22 6 3 5 Alignment control A Horizontal alignment The horizontal alignment is made by the 2 alignment plates that is alignment plate Fr and alignment plate Rr These 2 alignment plates are driven independently by each of the alignment motor Fr M22 and the alignment motor Rr M5 The home position of the alignment plate Fr is detected by the alignment home sensor Fr PS31 and that of the alignment plate Rr is detected by the alignment home sensor Rr PS8 1 Straight mode In the straight mode each sheet of paper sent to the stacker is aligned by the alignment plate Fr and the align ment plate Rr before being exited to the straight position Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 2 Shift mode n the shift mode each time a sheet of paper is sent to the stacker the alignment plate Fr 1 and the alignment plate Rr 2 shift to the rear to convey the paper 3 to the shift position before exiting it FS 503 lt 5 7 a fs503to2015c
325. k only when both the folding exit home sensor PS24 and the guide shaft home lt 5 7 a sensor PS46 detect the home position 49 SD 501 lt e LLI a a o 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION A 50 74 Composition Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Bundle arm assist plate Clincher Stapler Saddle stitching Saddle stitching Saddle stitching hold Up hold Lw alignment plate Bundle arm 15ant2c028nb Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 7 2 Drive 7 2 1 Saddle stitching alignment drive V D i ko D t p LI T J B B 7 2 5 5 4 3 15ant2c029na amp 1 Saddle stitching alignment motor Rt M9 5 Saddle stitching alignment home sensor Lt PS29 2 Folding sensor 2 PS44 6 Saddle stitching alignment motor Lt M16 3 Saddle stitching alignment home sensor Rt PS28 7 Saddle stitching alignment plate Lt 4 Front side view
326. ker tray 2 Job partition plate 5 Shift paper 3 Non shift paper 25 LS 501 502 lt Lu z a 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION 26 1 Stacker tray non sort mode Ex Letter 4 sheets Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 Entrance sensor PS4 Job partition Latch ON signal solenoid SD2 Latch OFF signal 2 4 6 8 ve 9 15502102021 3 5 7 1 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 2 1st sheet of paper 3 Job partition plate close 4 2nd sheet of paper 5 Job partition plate close 2 Stacker tray sort mode Ex Letter 2 sheets 6 3rd sheet of paper Job partition plate close B Last sheet of paper 9 Job partition plate close 1 Entrance sensor PS4 Job partition Latch ON signal solenoid 502 Latch OFF signal 2 4 5 7 3 6 8 Is502to2022c 1 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 ON 2 1st sheet of shift paper 3 Job partition plate open shift amount 20 mm 4 2nd sheet of shift paper 5 1st sheet of non shift paper 6 Job partition plate close 7 2nd sheet of non shift paper B Job partition plate close Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION E Rear stopper control While in the stacker tray sort mode is in shifting the rear stopper is left open and this plays as
327. l LS 501 SD 501 8 PF 601 RU 503 FD 501 LS 501 External FD 501 LS 501 9 PF 601 RU 503 FD 501 SD 501 External FD 501 SD 501 10 LU 202 2 FS 607 3 11 PF 601 OT 502 _ 12 LU 202 2 OT 502 _ 504 can be connected to PF 601 arbitrarily 2 HT 508 can be connected to LU 202 arbitrarily 3 PK 512 518 or PI 502 can be connected to FS 607 arbitrarily 4 Use RU 508 or RU 504 as described below When connecting to FS 503 RU 504 When not connecting to FS 503 RU 503 RU 504 can be substituted for RU 503 but RU 503 cannot be used when connecting to FS 503 35 etric destination External RU 504 FD 501 nch destination External RU 504 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS e 8 Console type floor mounted o Copying method Four drum tandem laser electrostatic method N Original stand Fixed 5 Original alignment Left rear standard Photo conductor OPC Writing method Two beam laser scanning method Paper capacity Three trays 500 sheets x 3 80g m Multi bypass 250 sheets 80g m3 601 3000 sheets x 2 80g m2 LU 202 2500 sheets 80g m PF 601 and LU 202 are optional B Functions Original Sheet book solid object Max original size or 11 x 17 Custom paper is Max 303 x 438mm Copy size Tray1 2 3 SRAS SRA4 A4 SRA4S A4 45 B5
328. l When the staples run out the staple empty switches Rr SW2 and Fr SW4 turn ON and the main body dis plays the error message on its display panel Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCHING TRI FOLDING SECTION 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCHING TRI FOLDING SECTION 8 4 Composition FS 607 Tri folding gate solenoid SD6 Folding paper exit sensor PS25 Folding knife home sensor 522 Tri folding gate Folding transfer motor Folding full sensor M20 PS29 Tri folding stopper lt ul 2 a e a Folding knife motor Folding full LED M19 Tri folding roller PS29 Folding pass through PS26 sensor Saddle stitching stopper a04dt2c008ca 57 FS 607 lt Lu z a 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCHING TRI FOLDING SECTION 52 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 2 Drive 5 15jmt2c019na 1 Folding knife 5 Tri folding gate solenoid 506 2 Folding knife motor M19 6 Tri folding gate 3 Folding transfer motor M20 Folding roller 4 Tri folding roller Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCHING TRI FOLDING SECTION 8 33 Operation 8 3 1 Folding knife control The folding knife motor drives the folding knife The folding knife is used in the folding saddle stitching tri folding mode In
329. l stop however the next sheet of paper is fed as usual The multi feed detection function can be enabled disabled using DipSW19 4 5 3 4 Centering detection control While paper being fed centering sensor PS25 detects the paper edges in the main scan direction The detected information is written in the image processing section so that a scanned image is precisely located and printed on the paper as intended In order to increase the life of the PS25 the sensor is not always On it turns off after sending the detected information to the main body and turns on when it detects the paper reached to the pre registration sensor 23 PF 601 HT 504 lt 5 7 a 6 OTHERS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 OTHERS 6 1 Dehumidifier heater control e Dehumidifier heaters 1 HTR1 and 2 HTR2 are provided under the trays 4 and 5 one for each tray to prevent paper from damping When the sub power switch SW2 is turned off the HTR1 and HTR2 are turned on a03xt2c016ca COMPOSITION OPERATION Dehumidifier heater 1 2 Dehumidifier heater 2 HTR2 24 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 OTHERS 6 2 Tray damper mechanism The damper 1 is provided in the tray to prevent the pile of paper from becoming misaligned due to the vibration caused when inserting the tray a03xt2c017ca 1 Damper COMPOSI
330. lift plate goes down The 5 stops reverse rotation after the specified time passed to stop lowering the lift plate 16 3 2 Paper size detection control A Detection in main scanning direction Paper size in main scanning direction is detected by the resistance value of the paper size VR BP VR4 The resistance value of the VR4 varies depending on the position of the guide plate Detection in sub scanning direction Paper size in sub scanning direction is detected by ON OFF statuses of the paper size sensors BP1 PS48 and BP2 PS49 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 16 BYPASS FEED TRAY SECTION 16 3 3 Paper feed control A Pick up control The paper feed motor M41 starts to rotate upon receiving a print start signal 1 After the specified time passed from when the start signal is received 1 the pick up solenoid BP SD5 and the paper feed clutch BP MC6 are turned on 2 When the 505 turns on the pick up roller descends and presses the paper by its own weight The pick up roller rotates to feed the top sheet to the paper feed roller by means of the M41 drive force transmitted via the MC6 The subsequent feeding by the pick up roller is made when the paper feed sensor BP 526 detects the bizhub PRO C6500 rear end of the previous paper 3 1 2 3 Y H H Paper feed motor M41 Pick up solenoid BP SD5 Paper feed clutch BP MC6 Paper feed sensor BP PS26 a03ut
331. lip catches releases and conveys the paper It catches the paper at the upper limit position 1 conveys it 2 and then release it at the lower limit position 3 COMPOSITION OPERATION 15ant2c047na 1 Catching 3 Releasing 2 Conveying 79 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 The bundle clip motor M1 1 5 drives the bundle clip 1 up 8 and down 7 via the gear and belt The spring 9 provides the bundle clip the force to catch the paper and the wire 2 and the winding shaft 3 open the bundle clip to release the paper The upper limit of the bundle clip is detected by the bundle clip upper limit sensor PS33 4 and the lower limit is detected by the bundle clip lower limit sensor PS30 6 SD 501 lt LLI z a amp S 15ant2c048na 1 Bundle clip 6 Bundle clip lower limit sensor PS30 2 Wire 7 Down 3 Winding shaft Up 4 Bundle clip upper limit sensor 533 9 Spring Bundle clip motor M1 1 80 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION The bundle clip is closed all the time except when it is located at the upper and lower limit position When the bundle clip moves up 1 the release roller Up 6 gets onto 7 the release plate Up 8 Then the wire winding shaft 4 rotates 3 and takes up the wire 5 to open the bundle clip n the same
332. llows Precaution when using the A AN AN A copier General Electric hazard High precaution temperature Prohibition when using the Q Q copier General Do not touch Do not prohibition with wet hand disassemble Direction when using the e copier General Unplug Ground Earth instruction 5 7 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY WARNINGS 1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability This reliability is achieved through high quality design and a solid service network Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical physical and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors For this reason unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited The points listed below are not exhaustive but they illustrate the reason ing behind this policy Prohibited Actions NDANGER Using any cables or power cord not specified by Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire metal clips solder or similar object Disabling relay functio
333. lose the alignment plate Up to perform the alignment of the paper transferred to the stacker in the main scan direction 1 FRONT 15jmt2c023na 1 Alignment motor M5 3 Alignment plate Up 2 Alignment home sensor PS8 A Alignment Up operation The alignment motor Up 5 rotates to open close the alignment plate via the alignment belt The alignment home sensor Up 58 detects the home position of the alignment plate B Alignment Up control Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body the alignment motor Up M5 rotates to close the alignment ate Up 1 and then it stops the alignment plate at the standby position that is a little wider than the paper width 2 5 performs the alignment operation by rotating in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment ate Up back and forth after a specified period of time since the stacker entrance sensor PS5 detects the trailing edge of the paper The alignment operation is performed for every paper 3 Stacker entrance sensor PS5 Alignment home sensor Up PS8 Up M5 Alignment motor CLOSE 1 3 15 2 002 1 Closing the alignment plate Up FNS signal 3 Alignment operation for every paper 2 Standby position of the alignment plate Up 37 FS 607 lt 5 7 a
334. ltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and meets regulatory requirements for the area Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect ing to inadequate power supply voltage current capac ity grounding and may result in fire or electric shock Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter minals of the plug according to the following order Black or Brown L line White or Light Blue neutral aD Green Yellow PE earth Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product and results in fire or electric shock S 3 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON SITE SERVICE Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of injury However in daily use any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure In order to maintain safety and reliability the CE must perform regular safety checks 1 Power Supply Connection to Power Supply NWARNING Check that mains voltage is as specified Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply voltage current capacity
335. m fan 1 M12 12 Tucking fan 2 M27 25 Drum fan 2 M13 13 Tucking fan 3 M28 26 Scanner fan M2 123 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a 25 OTHER CONTROLS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 2 2 Operation A Scanner fan M2 control 1 Purpose To cool the scanner section 2 ON timing e Starts to operate upon starting of scanning bizhub PRO C6500 During DF scan however the fan keeps operating 3 OFF timing e Stops to operate upon completion of scanning B Fusing belt ventilation fan M10 control 1 Purpose To cool around the fusing section near the paper exit 2 Low high speed switch timing Rotates at low speed during standby e Switches to high speed upon starting of printing e Switches to low speed for a predetermine time period after printing is finished C Transfer belt fan M11 control 1 Purpose e To cool around the transfer belt lt e LLI a amp S 2 ON timing e Starts to operate upon starting of printing 3 OFF timing e Stops a predetermined time period after printing is finished D Drum fan 1 M12 2 M13 control 1 Purpose e Exhaust the heat around the drum motor developing motor 2 ON timing e Starts to operate upon starting of printing 3 OFF timing e Stops a predetermined time period after printing is finishe
336. mediate conveyance ADU centering sensor ADU reverse roller roller 2 PS65 a03ut2c061ca lt LLI 5 z a amp S 86 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 19 ADU SECTION 19 2 Drive 3 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 tc a N a 13 12 11 10 9 8 7116 514 lt Lu a03ut5c062ca 1 Intermediate conveyance roller 2 12 ADU loop motor M57 Z 2 Intermediate conveyance clutch 2 MC4 13 ADU reverse motor M32 3 Paper feed motor M41 14 ADU conveyance roller 1 i 4 ADU pre registration roller 15 ADU conveyance clutch 1 MC 1 5 ADU pre registration clutch MC18 16 ADU conveyance roller 2 6 ADU conveyance roller 3 17 ADU conveyance clutch 2 MC2 7 ADU conveyance clutch 3 MC3 18 Belt 8 ADU loop roller 19 Intermediate conveyance roller 3 9 Bel 20 Intermediate conveyance clutch 3 MC5 10 ADU reverse roller 21 Drive coupling 11 Belt 87 19 ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 19 3 Operation 19 3 4 Paper reverse control A Paper conveyance e During paper conveyance the ADU gate 1 is open Paper conveyed from the reverse roller Lw 2 is conveyed to the ACU reverse roller 8 through the ADU gate Paper conveyed to the ADU reverse roller is then conveyed to the ADU loop roller 4 o o 1D
337. ment motor Fr M7 Reverse E 5 tst folding blade Forward motor 18 E Reverse tst folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 z st folding blade home sensor 2 PS21 Z a i 3 5 15ant2c083na 1 1st folding blade is projected with the paper 4 M18 rotating the forward direction 2 Folding conveyance motor M18 rotating the 5 M18 rotating the reverse direction reverse direction 3 M18 and M4 stopped 44 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION 6 3 4 Folding sub scan alignment control A Mechanism The folding sub scan alignment operation is conducted in the multi letter folding mode and is conducted with the folding exit claws 13 and the folding alignment stoppers Rt 3 driven by the folding sub scan alignment exit motor M8 8 The folding exit claws move to the right 14 and the folding alignment stoppers Rt move to the left 2 when M8 rotates in the reverse direction 9 The folding alignment stoppers Rt are contacted with the alignment stopper 1 and stopped by the torque limiter 7 The folding exit claws move to the positions for the paper width of A4R or 8 5 x 11R and conduct the folding sub scan alignment operation and then the folding is conducted n the multi center folding mode and the saddle stitching mode M8 rotates in the forward direction to move the folding exit claws to the left 11 after the folding operation Once the folding exit claws make a round they con
338. mit sensor PS2 Tray up down motor M3 1 1503102037 1 Start signal 2 Paper exited B Staple control When the stacker empty sensor PS20 detects the trailing edge of paper the main tray is brought down by the ray up down motor And reverses the rotation after a specified period of time to bright up the tray It stops when the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS7 turns ON Stacker empty sensor PS20 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS7 Tray up down motor M3 1 fs503to2038c 1 Start signal ON 2 Paper bundle exited Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 C Main tray paper detection The tray upper limit sensor PS2 and the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS7 maintain the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray or the main tray upper surface when no paper is exited and the paper exit opening at a specified distance to prevent any uneven paper exit from occurring While in the continuous print mode the FS uses a software to count the number of sheets of paper exited and stops printing when the count reaches the maximum number of sheets loadable for each paper size However when paper has been exited is removed while in printing the tray goes up to turn ON the counter reset sensor PS15 This resets the software counter thus allowing paper to be exited without limit 8 MAIN
339. more OFF OFF OFF ON 7 lines ligh Note The number of sheets shown on the table is approximate values when the paper weight thick ness is 80g m It varies depending on the thickness of paper lt Lu z a 16 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 4 A Outline The detection method differs between main scan direction and sub scan direction Paper size in main scan direction is detected by the position of the gear of the paper size VR VR1 1 which is rotated by the detection guide plate Rr 2 mounted on the side guide Fr 6 Paper size in sub scan direction is detected by the paper size sensors Rr PS110 7 and Fr PS111 8 When the paper rear guide 4 moves the detection guide plates 1 5 and 2 6 are moved upward down ward according to their shape and the actuators turn PS110 and PS111 on or off Paper size detection control 4 PAPER FEED SECTION COMPOSITION OPERATION a03wt2c012ca 1 2 SI 4 5 Paper size VR VR1 Detection guide plate Rr Side guide Rr Paper rear guide Detection guide plate 1 6 7 8 9 10 Detection guide plate 2 Paper size sensor Rr PS110 Paper size sensor Fr PS111 Side guide Fr Detection guide plate Fr 77 4 PAPER FEED SECTION COMPOSITION OPERATION 78 B Sensor detection and paper size The tables below lists how paper sizes are detected b
340. motor Fr M7 completes the realignment opera ion in the main scan direction 1 after the center folding operation After a specified period of time since the olding sensor 2 PS44 detects the trailing edge of paper M8 rotates in low speed 3 and conduct the home position search operation and then it stops 4 when the folding exit home sensor PS24 turns ON SD 501 Folding main Forward scan alignment motor Fr M7 Reverse High speed Folding sub scan alignment Low speed motor 8 Reverse Folding exit home sensor PS24 Folding sensor 2 PS44 15ant2c085na lt 5 7 a z 1 Realignment operation in the main scan direction 3 M8 switched to the low speed 2 Paper exit operation started 4 Stopped at home position 47 SD 501 lt e LLI 2 a amp S 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 48 6 3 5 Guide shaft control A Mechanism The guide shaft 2 holds the fold line 4 from the bottom and makes certain of the stack 3 in the saddle stitch ing section when the folding exit claws 7 exit the folded paper 1 to the saddle stitching section The guide shaft is projected 5 in sync with the paper exit only when the first folded paper for each set is exited and put away immediately to the folding section 6 In the subsequent paper
341. motor M3 Deceleration 1 fd501t02042c 1 Deceleration of the intermediate conveyance 2 High speed rotation motor M3 The time period up to the deceleration can be changed by the system speed on the main body side 47 9 PI SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 PI SECTION A 9 1 Composition FD 501 Paper pick up mechanism Manual operation Paper separation mechanism Multi feed sensor Paper set sensor es main scan direc tion Paper size sensor sub scan direc Lift plate tion lt a o a 19501102027 48 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 PI SECTION 9 2 Drive 9 2 1 Tray lift drive FD 501 19501102028 lt 6 z E 1 Paper lift motor Up 8 3 plate Lw 2 Paper lift motor Lw M9 4 plate Up 49 9 PI SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 2 2 Paper feed drive 10 11 FD 501 COMPOSITION OPERATION 14501102029 1 Separation roller Up 7 Pick up roller Lw 2 Pl registration clutch Up CL1 8 Pl conveyance motor M7 3 registration clutch Lw CL2 9 Rotational direction of separation roller Up 4 Separation roller Lw 10
342. motor M301 PK 512 513 lt z a 4 SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 2006 70 4 3 Operation 4 3 1 Punch standby position movement control Turning ON the device the punch shift motor M302 rotates to move the punch unit 6 to the home position until the punch shift home sensor PS303 turns ON Selecting the punch mode M302 rotates to move the punch unit 6 so that the paper size sensor PS305 1 of he punch unit 6 is positioned 5 mm inward 2 from the side edge of the paper PS305 consists of 5 sensors Each sensor detects the following paper Sensor Paper size 1 ASS 5 x 815 2 B5S 16KS 3 AAS A5 81 118 81 x 145 b x 81 85 x 13 81 x 13 x 13 8 x 18 4 B4 B5 8K 16K 5 A3 A4 11x17 81 x 11 The sensors are numbered 1 to 5 from the front side And when the stand by position is 5 mm for B5 and B4 paper sizes the corner of the paper passes through below the punch hole and the stand by position is changed to 1 5 mm to prevent the hitching of the paper The punch unit returns to the home position at the end of the job 5 6 1 4 15kjt2c004na 1 Paper size sensor PS305 4 Paper 2 Moving distance from the paper edge 5 Punch blade 3 Paper transfer direction 6 Punch unit Note In the model PK 512 the paper size sensor PS305 is positioned on the
343. motors Up M201 2 and Lw M202 7 move up and down the trays Up and Lw by rotating in the forward and reverse direction to drive the lift arms Up 10 and Lw 4 and move up and down the lift plates Up 8 and Lw 6 respectively At the upper limit positions the tray upper limit sensors Up PS205 1 and Lw PS209 3 detect the actuators lifted up by the lift plates At the lower position of the tray the tray lower limit sensors Up PS204 9 and Lw PS210 5 detect the actu ators coupled with the lift arms Up and Lw PI 502 9 10 8 9 10 2 lt e LLI a amp o 15jft2c004na 1 Tray upper limit sensor Up PS205 6 Tray lift plate Lw 2 Tray lift motor Up M201 7 lift motor Lw M202 3 Tray upper limit sensor Lw PS209 B lift plate Up 4 Lift arm Lw 9 lower limit sensor Up PS204 5 Tray lower limit sensor Lw PS210 10 Lift arm Up Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 3 2 Pick up mechanism The pick up solenoids Up SD201 2 and Lw SD202 turn ON to pick up the paper The release arm 5 held upward by the spring 1 lifts up the pick up roller mounting plate 4 to release the pick up roller 3 When SD201 and SD202 turn ON the release arm moves backward and then the pick up roller mounting plate and the pick up roller fall down by their own weight The pick
344. n sor PS61 Shutter Registration claws Trimmer scraps press plate Trimmer scraps full sensor PS41 Scraps box Bundle exit con veyance belt Bundle exit tray 15ant2c050nb A 83 SD 501 COMPOSITION OPERATION SD 501 lt Lu z a 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 8 22 Drive 8 2 1 Bundle press stage lift drive Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 10 12 13 1 4 15ant2c051na Bundle registration plate Bundle registration plate wire Lift wire Bundle press stage Front side direction Bundle exit auxiliary roller Knob QO I 84 8 9 10 11 12 13 Bundle press stage up down home sensor PS35 Bundle press stage up down limit sensor PS45 Bundle press stage up down motor M24 Over winding prevention stopper Wire winding shaft Bundle registration plate home sensor PS16 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 8 2 2 Bundle press movement drive SD 501 LJ e NIC 3 51 4 3 2 15 2 052 1 Bundle press 4 Left side view 2 Bundle press movement home sensor PS36 5 Bundle press movement motor M1
345. n control Transmitting the FS start signal 1 the transfer motor M203 rotates in low speed and the pick up solenoids UP SD201 and Lw 50202 turn ON At the time the tray lift motors Up M201 and Lw M202 rotate in the forward direction to lift up the trays Up and Lw 201 and M202 stop when the tray upper limit sensors Up PS205 and Lw PS209 turn ON 2 and after a specified period of time the transfer clutch Up MC201 and Lw MC202 turn ON and the paper is picked up from the tray Only 1 sheet of paper is transferred by the transfer roller because of the separation roller 208 rotates in high speed when the paper reaches the paper passage sensors Up PS201 and Lw PS206 3 At the time the paper is pressed against the transfer roller and forms a loop because the registration clutch MC208 is OFF After a specified period of time MC203 turns ON 4 and M203 drives the paper to FS 208 switches to rotate in low speed to feed the subsequent paper since the paper passed PS201 PS206 5 and then MC203 turns OFF after a specified period of time PI 502 Transfer motor Low speed 203 High speed Transfer clutch Lw MC202 Tray lift motor Lw M202 ray upper limit sensor Lw PS209 Pick up solenoid Lw SD202 Paper passage sensor Lw PS206 F4 lt 6 z E Registration clutch 203 Ql
346. n in accordance with the paper size 2 The bundle registration motor M12 rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the paper conveyance assisting operation 4 and the preregistration operation 5 after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor 11 starts conveying the paper 3 Then M12 stops when the registration claws reach at the specified posi ion M12 rotates in the reverse direction and conducts the registration operation 7 with the registration claws when he bundle press motor M23 completes the press releasing operation 6 The registration claws stop when the rimmer registration sensor PS55 turns ON 8 12 rotates in the forward direction to move the registration claws to the specified shelter position 10 when 23 completes the press operation 9 12 rotates in the forward direction to let the bundle exit claws push the paper to conduct the paper exit oper ation 12 after a specified period of time since the trimmer blade motor M31 completes the trimming operation 11 M12 stops when the bundle registration home sensor 534 turns ON 13 M12 rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle exit claws to the standby position 14 after a specified period of time Then it stands by for the subsequent set 2 3 4 5 6 9110 12 14 Bundle clip Forward motor M11 Reverse Bundle press Forward motor M23 Reverse Bundle registra Forward tion motor M12
347. n the main body start signal turns ON and it does not move during the print operation It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor Lt PS29 4 after the print operation The saddle stitching alignment motor Rt M9 drives the saddle stitching alignment plate Rt 8 in the sub scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions The alignment operation is con ducted by M9 by rotating in the forward and reverse directions every time the center folded paper is conveyed t return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor Rt PS28 6 after the print operation SD 501 7 8 lt ul 2 77 a o 4 15ant20037na 1 Front side direction 5 Paper 2 Saddle stitching alignment plate Lt 6 Saddle stitching alignment home sensor Rt PS28 3 Saddle stitching alignment motor Lt M16 7 Saddle stitching alignment motor Rt M9 4 Saddle stitching alignment home sensor Lt B Saddle stitching alignment plate Rt PS29 59 SD 501 lt LLI e gt 2 7 a 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 60 B Control The saddle stitching alignment motor Lt M16 rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal 1 turns ON and the saddle stitching alignment plate Lt moves to the position for the
348. n the start button is turned on After finishing the movement for the shading correction the exposure unit shifts to scanning operation auto matically The other movements of the exposure unit are the same as when the SW2 is turned on C Original reading mode There are two original reading modes platen mode and DF mode Whether the density setting is set to manual or AE the two modes differ in movement of the exposure unit o o iD o o DE 2 3 t N 1 When selecting the manual density setting lt 6 1 l l i pod a03ut2c018ca 5 o 1 Home position 5 Write correction Second time 2 Scanner home sensor PS1 6 Exposure scan 3 Platen APS position Home position search 4 White correction First time 25 7 SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 When selecting the AE density setting o D O tc D d N a 6 l 1 l ii l l l l I l I l l Pr S kg a03ut2c019ca 1 Home position 5 White correction Second time 2 PS1 6 scan 5 3 Platen APS position 7 Exposure scan 4 White correction First time B Home position search 5 gt D Original reading control e The light reflected off the original goes to the CCD sensor through the lens The CCD sensor outputs an electric sign
349. n ue d HEAD Eur i did ddp g doli dor ep Rr 22 SCANNER SEGCTION terne E ERR ERE RR AR DEE ERR Gam rq s 23 T cues l Ewa DE en KR vesten UEM qd PNE EROR E rre qi daa s e RM EE 23 At pnm 23 CORSON PP PEE 24 781 Sosnnenbxposure amp Control s o ere heh hm rh RR e ua 24 132 Original Size detection Control uec Rye Mand ea Beaton 29 FRIES 5 0 TDI 30 TA BEACS vb Ad ke s ab doe 30 PICENO 0005 00 PTT rekna kn berede dd baken 30 WRITE SECTION 2 E Exe tors dedere euer p adhd sa PIRE PIRER HE RAE fib 31 MP 31 5 2 Operation enda OS G RE A KR dk 32 8 2 1 Laser beam cess ee Re Ok RR e Ra ARRA ees eee ae eiua 32 S22 GUN S yuy ass Reda ouod d E a od s MIA A pe be heme Ones eae aa 33 8 2 3 Ootor EE irai apos 34 8 2 4 Front back sides skew correction in main scan direction 39 8 2 5 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction 39 BLE Image stabilization control ca aaa ana chews gees ER RA as aee E RE Ra RE RA 40 BET mage processes RR dad REX ee 40 PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION o paa 3 23 HSE gaged REA NE Wd mE qiiid ad NANG 41 g1 FE PPP 41 Bea ber ed bites see vwd du stede 42 bizhub PRO C6500
350. nd the intermediate conveyance sensor 2 a03wt2c006ca 1 LU exit sensor PS107 2 Centering sensor PS1 3 Pre registration roller 4 Pre registrations sensor PS106 5 Paper feed roller Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 2 Control for small sized paper 7 Paper fed by the paper feed roller hits against the pre registration roller that is stopping due to the off status 1 of MC102 and the skew of paper is corrected 2 Then after a predetermined time period has elapsed MC102 turns on 2 to rotate the pre registration roller to convey the paper 3 When a predetermined time period has elapsed after PS106 detects the rear end of the paper MC102 turns off to stop the pre registration roller 3 4 The same operation is carried out for the second and subsequent papers HO an ES o 90 ES Paper feed motor M1 Paper feed clutch MC101 Pick up solenoid SD100 Pre registration clutch MC102 Pre registrations sensor PS106 LU exit sensor PS107 E z 1 a03wt2c007ca amp e a 1 Paper skew correction 3 MC102 turns off upon completion of 1st 8 2 Paper conveyance into the main body Paper conveyance 77 LU 202 HT 503 e lt a amp z 4 PAPER FEE
351. ndle exit conveyance belt folded 700 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION A 0 Trimmer scraps press mechanism Trimmer scraps press is executed by driving the bundle exit motor M5 The M5 motor drives the pins 10 via the scraps press craws 4 on the belt 5 to move the scraps press plate 2 forward then the trimmer scraps are pressed by the plate The spring 11 pushes the scraps press plate to put it back The trimmer scraps press is carried out when the actuator 8 turns on the scraps press home sensor PS48 9 with the press position of the scraps press plate is at the home position The maximum travel distance of the scraps press plate is 200 mm The trimmer scraps press is carried out when the trim is performed five times or when the total trimmed number of sheets becomes 60 sheets 30 sheets before folding or more 11 AAA 9 8 1 7 6 5 4 15ant2c064nb 1 Front side direction 6 Trimming position 2 Scraps press plate maximum movement Backmost position position 8 Actuator B Home position 9 Scraps press home sensor PS48 4 Scrap press claws 10 Pin 5 Belt 11 Spring A 101 SD 501 lt z a e a 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTIO
352. ner refresh mode e Checks the average of print coverage for each color with each specific drive distance of the developing roller K and consumes a certain amount of toner for the color that the density is lower than 5 converted in A4 size after completion of printing Execution frequency Refresh quantity Small Continuously printing approx Approx three solid 1 000 sheets in A4 size sheets in A4 size Medium Continuously printing approx 500 Approx five solid sheets sheets in A4 size in A4 size Large Continuously printing approx 330 Approx eight solid sheets in A4 size sheets in A3 size 3 716 The execution frequency varies depending on the environmental temperature and print mode Execution timing Manual toner refresh mode When selecting the execution of toner refresh mode on the operation panel and returning to the normal screen or when turning on off the sub power switch SW2 Automatic toner refresh mode There are two types of automatic toner refresh mode at job end and periodical at job end Executed when the job is completed periodical Executed when turning on the power after more than six hours have passed since the power is turned off previous time Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 24 IMAGE PROCESSING 24 IMAGE PROCESSING 24 1 Operation flow 3 line CCD sensor A D convert bizhub PRO C6500 Brightness Density conversion Scanner gamma correction distinc
353. nerates voltages of 3 3VDC 5VDC 12VDC 24VDC and distributes them to the printer control board PRCB and other control boards Then the PRCB sends a control signal to the DC power unit 2 DCPS 2 in order to make the unit generate 24 VDC is supplied to the all driver boards and option units Main relay RY 1 turns ON to supply AC power to the fusing heater lamp 1 L2 2 L3 8 L4 and 4 L5 and the initial operation is performed The sub relay RY 2 turns OFF to shut off the AC power to the dehumidifier heater the dehumidifier heater 1 inside the PF LU HTR1 and the dehumidifier heater 2 HTR2 PF only Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 2 Fan control 25 2 4 Configuration 25 OTHER CONTROLS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 N gt 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 a03ut2c095ca 1 ain unit fan M47 14 ADU fan 2 M67 2 Developing fan 1 M45 15 ADU fan 1 M66 3 Developing fan 2 M46 16 Fusing fan Lw M65 4 Writing suction fan 1 M43 17 Paper exit fan 1 M61 5 PB fan 2 M25 18 Transfer belt fan M11 6 PB fan 1 M24 19 Paper exit fan 2 M62 T Developing fan 3 M64 20 Paper exit fan 3 M63 8 Writing suction fan 2 M44 21 Fusing belt ventilation fan M10 9 Power supply fan M42 22 Deodorization fan M36 10 Charging air suction fan M48 23 Fusing ventilation fan M37 11 Tucking fan 1 M26 24 Dru
354. ng blade home sensor 2 P521 2nd folding blade Forward motor M19 Reverse 2nd folding blade home sensor PS22 2nd folding blade home sensor 2 PS23 Folding passage sensor PS8 10 3 6 8 15ant2c080na 1 Paper alignment operation completed 6 2nd folding blade motor M19 stopped 2 1st folding 7 1st folding by M18 rotating the forward direction 3 1st folding blade motor M18 stopped 8 M18 stopped 4 1st folding completed 9 2ndfolding by M19 rotating the forward direction 5 2nd folding M19 stopped Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION C Tri folding exit control 1 Operation In the multi letter folding exit the driving force of the folding conveyance motor M4 is transmitted via the tri fold ing exit clutch CL1 turns ON and the exit belt 4 is driven approximately 7 mm to convey the paper to the front side for every Lo o paper exit The tri folding paper full sensor PS10 3 detects the paper when it is reached at the front and then the main body displays the message on its operation panel lt e z BEN E 77 o a 2 EN 15ant2c081na 5 1 Tri folding exit sensor PS9 3 Tri folding paper full sensor PS10 2 Right side view 4 Exit belt 2 Control The tri folding exit clutch CL1 turns ON and drives the
355. ng mode The paper exit opening solenoid SD4 turns ON to nip the paper after a specified period of time since the sta pling operation is completed C Timing to turn OFF the paper exit opening solenoid In all modes the paper exit opening solenoid SD4 turns OFF after a specified period of time since the main tray paper exit sensor PS6 detects the paper 21 FS 607 lt LLI z a amp o 4 TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 22 4 3 8 Paper exit opening control In the stapling mode when the paper length is B5S or longer in the sub scan direction and the folding saddle stitching tri folding mode the paper exit opening is opened from the beginning of the printing operation to the end of the stapling operation because the paper protrudes A Paper exit opening closing operation The paper exit opening unit 3 opens closes by the crank mechanism 2 when the paper exit motor M8 1 rotates The paper exit home sensor PS12 4 detects the opening closing of the paper exit opening 2 a04dt2c003ca 1 Paper exit motor M8 3 Paper exit unit 2 Crank mechanism 4 Paper exit home sensor PS12 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Paper exit opening closing control 4 IRANSFER SECTION 1 Stapling mode when the paper length is B5S or longer in the sub scan direction Transmitting the FNS signal 1 from the main body the pa
356. ng toner on the second transfer roller Lw sur cleaning ace after the second transfer Sub step 5 Toner collection Collects the toner removed at sub step 1 and 3 This step is not illustrated in the figure below 2 S Sub step pa 88 bx VAST 12 Sieni Th Step 2 Step 1 Sub step 1 10 Sub step 2 9 8 Step NE 5 6 n a03ut2c002ca 1 Developing unit 2 Write unit 3 Charging corona 4 Erase lamp EL 5 Paper 6 Second transfer roller Lw 72 Discharging section for separation B Second transfer roller Up 9 Transfer belt 10 Blade for drum cleaning 11 Blade for transfer belt cleaning 12 Drum Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS 6 2 Charging process Step 1 A negative high DC voltage is applied to the gold plate tungsten wire of the charging corona which is provided for each Y M C and K photoconductor drums Then the wire discharges toward the drum in order to charge the entire drum surface with the negative electrostatic charge The charge on the drum is uniformly distributed on the drum surface with the charging control plate bizhub PRO C6500 lt 3 a03ut2c003ca 1 Drum 8 Charging corona 2 Negative electrostatic charge Charging control plate lt 5 7 a z 6 3 Laser exposure process
357. nged in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 2 0 A Revision in relation to launching of C6500 2004 10 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS FD 501 OUTLINE 1 x toca 23 pre dirette dur iacet db dedii ere eie qaq 1 2 d na y eo ctu Rebates cite ene he eene oen Petar b DA aie 5 9 PAPER PATH an qayakusaq ETE P RADO ee aqhana S SS aus t n qud 6 COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION erae produ Teke aea tO OTI od eir xa Ue ora 15 AA E PEEL 15 BG vev E o WEE 16 421 Conveyance DING ose Ky EX GR GGG Y EE REE aqa 16 D Pr CD 17 423 JAIGNMENKAINE edo v bio ie ei e bara hhaha 18 AG DN CETT 19 43 1 Conveyance path switching EH X Ro RE RE RR 19 432 Conveyance line speed conto 0a a anna KA EGG ARA Ee 23 EE control u u Re FR RERO ER EAR 24 55 PUNCHSECTION Rare aote x du eR RR COL dekkene
358. ni its aad xe EXC ERG E 6 AO eir PEE EET T AO EO oo mcr 10 43 1 Punch standby position movement control 10 4 3 2 Punch position correction Control nnn 11 5 489 eese et ehe een deba RO RR Ro d EE 12 5 PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION RETT uu a t ER RI wed Varese 16 5 AA 16 Pr NG ch decease NA DANGAN ER ae 16 WS 16 8 5 31 ME se EEE 16 CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 PK 512 513 OUTLINE lt Lu z a Blank page i Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS s A Type Type FS integrated type punching operation device B Functions Punching method Stops and punches every paper o of holes PK 512 2 holes 3 holes inch or 2 holes 4 holes metric PK 513 4 holes ole diameter 6 5 mm 2 holes 4 holes 8 0 mm 3 holes ole pitch PK 512 80 mm 2 holes 4 holes 108 mm 8 holes PK 513 21 70 21 mm Supported mode Punch mode straight mode Applicable post processing Sort group staple mode C Type of paper Paper size PK 512 2 holes B4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 B
359. nk Switching cam When the punch blade is driven When the punch blade is not driven Switching cam shaft 8 9 10 11 12 13 Groove of the switching cam Projection of the punch blade Projection of the switching cam Punch blade Punch blade of the 3 hole punch Punch blade of the 2 hole punch PK 512 513 lt a e amp PK 512 513 lt c LLI a amp S 4 PUNCH SECTION B PK 512 2 to 4 holes Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 a04et2f002ca N Punch motor M301 Eccentric cam Slide link Switching cam When the punch blade is driven When the punch blade is not driven Switching cam shaft 8 9 10 11 12 13 Groove of the switching cam Projection of the punch blade Projection of the switching cam Punch blade Punch blade of the 4 hole punch Punch blade of the 2 hole and 4 hole punch Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PUNCH SECTION C PK 513 PK 512 513 lt 5 7 a 15kjt2c003nb 1 Eccentric cam 3 Punch blade 2 Drive arm 4 Punch
360. ns such as wedging paper between relay contacts Q 9 Disabling safety functions interlocks safety circuits etc Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and Q injury Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT Using parts not specified by KMBT KON ce SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 2 POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area In that case it is obligation of customer engineer hereafter called the CE to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply Power Cord Set or Power Plug NWARNING Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria pe provided with a plug having configuration intended for Chez the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod VE uct s rated voltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and aD provided with three conductor cable having enough cur rent capacity and xe AC208V 240V the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area NL Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock Attach power plug which meets the following criteria having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product s rated vo
361. ntrol The paper feed motor M41 starts to rotate upon receiving a print start signal 1 After the specified time passed from when the start signal is received 1 the pick up solenoids 1 07 2 508 and 3 509 and the paper feed clutches 1 MC7 2 MC9 and 3 MC1 1 are turned on When the 507 508 and 09 turn on the pick up roller descends and presses the paper its own weight The pick up roller rotates to feed the top sheet to the paper feed roller by means of the M41 drive force transmitted via the MC7 MC9 and MC11 The subsequent feeding by the pick up roller is made when the paper feed sensors 1 PS29 2 PS35 and 3 PS41 detect the rear end of the previous paper 3 bizhub PRO C6500 11 2 3 Paper feed motor M41 Pick up solenoid 1 SD7 2 SD8 3 SD9 Paper feed clutch 1 MC7 2 9 3 MC11 Paper feed sensor 1 P529 2 P535 3 P841 a03ut2c048ca 1 Print start signal 3 Second pick up 2 First pick up lt 5 7 a 69 bizhub PRO C6500 lt ui a a o 15 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Separation mechanism The separation roller 4 is driven in the opposite direction 2 to the paper feed direction 10 via the torq
362. nts DV610 Toner collection box Assy 50 000 prints 3 A03UA365 1 A4 original at 5 coverage for each color 2 The end of actual usefu tance reaches a certain 3 The end of actual useful life is detected by the was E Maintenance life is reached when the number of sheets is printed or when the total drive dis evel whichever comes first toner full sensor provided in the toner collection box Maintenance cycle Every 200 000 prints Machine service life 5 000 000 prints or 5 years whichever earlier Ave number of prints 35 000 to 75 000 per month Max number of prints Q zone 300 000 per month 10 000 per day B C zone 150 000 per month 8 500 per day zone 2 100 000 per month 5 000 per day 1 The number of prints include all monochrome solid color and full color printings 2 zone mean a temp amp humidity range indicated in the graph below Humidity RH 10 18 20 23 Temperature C a03ut1c004ca Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS F Machine data Power source Inch AC208 to 240V 16A 60Hz Metric AC230V 15A 50Hz Maximum power consump tion Inch 4 550W or less B When the type of the optional unit connection con figuration P2 is No 9 3 950W or less B When the type of the optional unit connection con figuration P2 is No 10 Metric 4 060W o
363. nveyance roller 6 ion actuator LS 501 only 01 only LS 501 only LS 501 only 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Coupling conveyance rol er 5 LS 501 only Paper press solenoid 2 807 Coupling conveyance rol Paper press arm 2 Coupling conveyance rol Coupling conveyance Paper press solenoid 1 er 4 LS 501 only er 3 M6 LS 502 only SD6 77 LS 501 502 lt ul 2 a e a 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 A 6 2 3 Stacker tray up down drive LS 501 502 lt LLI a amp S 2 Is501t2c001a Wire 4 Stacker tray 2 Belt 5 Stacker tray up down arm 8 Stacker tray up down motor M1 8 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION 6 24 Shift unit alignment plate drive LS drawing as seen from above On the right side is the main body 5 6 LS 501 502 lt a e z E e a 4 3 2 502102013 1 Guide rail 4 Shift unit 2 Alignment plate 5 Shift unit motor M5 3 Alignment motor M7 6 Guide rail 79 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 2 5 Rear stopper job partition plate driv
364. o the left side is loosened to allow the folding guide 2 to push out the paper in the clear ance between the folding rollers 1 1 and 2 8 As a result the paper gets caught in the rollers to be LA olded fe lt e z 77 o 4 19501102023 1 3rd folding roller 1 3 3rd folding roller 2 2 Folding guide 4 Direction of paper exit 41 7 MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 MAIN TRAY SECTION A 74 Composition FD 501 FT DE Main tray 0 o 0 9 AQ e OT ENS Al Main tray paper exit Pa sensor PS18 Main tray upper limit sensor PS20 lt LLI z a amp S Main tray paper full sensor PS7 Main tray lower limit sensor PS22 19501102035 42 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 MAIN TRAY SECTION 7 2 Drive LO f 0 1 0 lt oc 2 P OG 8 o X o o 19501102036 1 Main tray B Tray up down motor M1 1 2 Up down wire 43 FD 501
365. od has elapsed after PS107 detects the first paper and turns off SD100 turns off to bring the pick up roller into contact with the loaded paper and at the same time MC101 becomes on to make the pick up roller rotate and pick up the second sheet of paper 5 2 4 5 IJ D px Paper feed motor M1 Paper feed clutch MC101 Pick up solenoid SD100 Pre registrations sensor PS106 LU exit sensor PS107 a03wt2c004ca 1 START button ON 2 Pick up roller presses paper with its own weight 4 Pick up roller separates from loaded paper 5 Pick up roller goes down 3 Drive force transmission to the pick up roller and paper feed roller Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION B Separation mechanism The separation roller 5 rotates in the direction 10 opposite to the paper conveyance direction 9 by means of the torque limiter 8 The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller 1 by the force 6 exerted by the spring 7 and the torque generated by the torque limiter The friction force between the separation roller and the paper LU 202 HT 503 feed roller is limited by the torque limiter in order to prevent multi feed e When no paper exist between the separation roller and the paper feed roller and when the only one sheet of paper is present the separation roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of the arr
366. of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 OTHER CONTROLS 25 OTHER CONTROLS 25 4 Power On control 25 1 1 Parts that operate when the main power switch SW1 is turned on A Configuration SW1 CBR 1 e 0 NF 5VDC IFB CBR 2 e DCPS 1 DCPS 2 TR o o iD o o E5 DE o 3 N SW2 IMCB OACB RY 2 SW3 z ul oort 5 LU PF OPTION I 1 1 HTR2 as ade DUE n a03ut2c091ca B Operation When the main power switch SW1 turns ON AC power is supplied to the DC power unit 1 DCPS1 2 DCPS 2 Then 5VDC is distributed to the overall control board OACB through the board and the image memory control board IMCB 721 bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI z a amp z 25 OTHER CONTROLS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 1 2 Parts that operate when the sub power switch SW2 is turned on A Configuration SW2 N IMCB DCPS 1 DCPS 2 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 12131415 SW3 0 0 a03ut2c094ca 722 Operation When the sub power switch SW2 turns ON the overall control board OACB sends a control signal to the DC power unit 1 DCPS 1 via the image memory control board IMCB and the I F board IFB DCPS 1 ge
367. of the operating system and explanation of the control system This section gives as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product a rough outline of the object and role of each function the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system and the timing of operation of each part lt Field service section gt OUTLINE System configuration and product specifications MAINTENANCE Service schedule maintenance steps list of service tools and directions for use firmware version up method and removal reinstallation methods of major parts ADJUSTMENT SETTING Utility mode Tech Rep mode security and mechani cal adjustment TROUBLESHOOTING List of jam codes their causes operation when a jam occurs and its release method and list of error codes their causes operation when a warning is issued and esti mated abnormal parts APPENDIX Parts layout drawings connector layout drawings timing chart overall layout drawing This section gives as information required by the CE at the site or at the customer s premise a rough outline of the service schedule and its details maintenance steps the object and role of each adjustment error codes and supplementary information The details of items with an asterisk are described only in the service manual of the main body C 2 Notation of the service manual A Product name In this manual each of the products is described as
368. of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show N to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show 4h in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS bizhub PRO C6500 OUTLINE 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 rmt acte hers ir sb rent bier innen 1 2 PROD GT SPECIFICATIONS 2 aman ee dene peces qt race Rob op baee di ew Rp eb 3 3 UNIT CONFIGURATION ics sues et KG PRIN etica ae S
369. olds and inserts the paper between the folding rollers 1 and 2 When the 1st folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 turns ON the folding conveyance motor M4 turns ON to conduct the 1st folding 2 M18 stops when PS20 turns OFF Then M4 turns OFF and the 1st folding operation is completed 4 after a specified period of ime since the folding passage sensor PS8 detects the leading edge of paper After a specified period of time since PS8 turns ON the 2nd folding blade motor M19 turns ON and rotates in he reverse direction to start the 2nd folding operation When the 2nd folding blade home sensor 1 PS22 turns ON M4 rotates in high speed to perform the 2nd folding and then the tri folded paper is conveyed to the tri olding exit M19 stops when PS22 turns OFF n the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set M18 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 1st fold ing 7 and stops rotating when the 1st folding blade home sensor 2 PS21 turns ON 8 In the 2nd folding operation M19 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 2nd folding 9 and stops rotating when the 2nd olding blade home sensor 2 PS23 turns ON 10 2 4 5 7 9 Folding High speed motor 4 Low speed Reverse Folding main Forward scan alignment motor Fr M7 Reverse 1stfolding blade Forward motor M18 Reverse folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 foldi
370. ome position 1 stacker 2 or main tray 3 It does not move when exiting to the sub tray because t he sub tray is the home position When completing the printing the gate home sensor PS16 detects the home position and stops the gate 3 15jkt2c005na 1 Sub tray home position 3 Main tray 2 Stacker 15 FS 607 lt LLI S z a amp S 4 TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 16 4 3 4 Bypass gate control The bypass gate is located in the paper path to the stacker section The bypass gate is the gate to transfer the subsequent paper during the stapling operation for eliminating the time loss and increasing the productivity A Bypass gate operation The bypass gate solenoid 505 2 drives the bypass gate 1 For the small size paper A4 B5 and 8 x 11 it operates only for the 1st page of the 2nd and following copies o transfer the paper to the bypass route 3 The 2nd page of the 2nd and following copies is transferred to the regular route 4 and overlapped under the 1st page and then the transferred to the stacker section 15jkt2c006na 1 Bypass gate 3 Bypass route 2 Bypass gate solenoid 505 4 Regular route Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Bypass gate control 4 IRANSFER SECTION The bypass gate only operates for the small size paper A4 B5 and 85 x 11 in the stapling mode The
371. ompleted SD7 5 urns ON to pressure the nipping of the folding entrance roller 1 and the roller release solenoid 2 SD6 3 turns ON to release the right angle conveyance roller 4 M3 convey the paper to the folding section The folding entrance sensor PS60 6 detects the paper at the folding entrance 5 6 7 3 2 1 15ant2c022na 1 Paper 5 Roller release solenoid 3 SD7 2 Right angle conveyance roller 4 6 Folding entrance sensor PS60 3 Roller release solenoid 2 506 7 Folding entrance roller 1 4 Right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION B Control The roller release solenoid 3 SD7 turns ON to nip the paper with the folding entrance roller 2 after a specified period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 detects the leading edge of paper 1 and then the roller release solenoid 2 SD6 turns ON to release the nip of the right angle conveyance roller 4 3 after a specified period of time Then the folding entrance motor M3 turns ON and conveys the paper to the folding section 4 At the time the folding conveyance motor M4 rotates in the reverse direction 5 to prevent the paper from being caught between the folding rollers 1 and 2 SD7 turns OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor PS1 detects the trailing edge of last pa
372. on Further upward movement of the plate pushes the actuator 5 up and turns PS109 6 on When no paper exist on the tray the actuator 2 of P8108 1 goes into the hole 3 of the paper lift plate 4 instead of being pushed up and only the actuator 5 is pushed up to turn PS109 6 on The status PS108 is off and PS109 is on is judged as a paper empty status and an arrow mark appears on the tray mark displayed on the touch panel of the main unit When the tray runs out of paper while feeding paper the status is detected when the PS108 becomes off with PS109 kept on LU 202 HT 503 lt LLI z a amp S a03wt2c010ca 1 Paper empty sensor PS108 4 Paper lift plate 2 Actuator of P8108 5 Actuator of PS109 3 Hole 6 Upper limit sensor PS109 74 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 3 8 Remaining paper detection control e The remaining amount of paper is detected by the position of the remaining paper detection gear 6 moved together with the shaft 5 of the paper lift motor M100 which drives the paper lift plate The remaining paper detection gear incorporates the actuator 9 and the actuator position is detected by the four remaining paper sensors 1 PS102 1 2 PS103 2 3 P8104 3 and 4 PS105 4 According to on off statuses of the four sensors the remaining amount of paper can be figured out
373. on the up down path of the stacker tray and dis played on the operation panel 3 000 sheets stacked detection is made by the main unit When the hand cart once pulled out is put back to its original position the stacker tray moves up to return to its home position If the paper detection sensor PS19 detects that papers are loaded on the stacker tray the tray stops moving up in order to prevent the alignment plate from being damaged by the uplifted paper I Hand cart detection mechanism The set condition of the hand cart is detected by the hand cart set switch RS1 And the set condition of the stacker tray is detected by checking to see if the light from the stacker tray set LED LED1 gets to the stacker tray set sensor 51 6 3 2 Coupling conveyance In coupling mode paper is conveyed to the device connected to the subsequent stage of the LS through the coupling conveyance section A Line speed switching When paper is conveyed from the main body the conveyance motor M2 at the entrance conveyance section is rotated at the same speed as the conveyance speed of the main body When paper is conveyed to the LS the speed of rotation of M2 is increased up to 1 000 mm s to convey paper 6 3 3 Sub tray conveyance In sub tray mode paper is exited into the sub tray A Line speed switching Entrance sensor PS4 Sub tray paper exit sensor PS10 1000 mm s Sub tray paper exit motor M3 490 mm s 350
374. onduct the alignment M7 rotates in the reverse direction 5 and after a specified period of time it rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment again 6 SD 501 7 rotates in the reverse direction to replace the alignment claws to the home position 7 when the 1st folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 detects the completion of the folding operation M7 starts rotating to replace the alignment claws to the home position for subsequent set when PS21 detects the completion of the folding oper ation since the 1st folding blade conducts the reciprocal operation in which the 1st folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 and the 1st folding blade home sensor 2 PS21 counter changes their positions at each folding oper ation M7 stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor Fr1 PS18 detects the home posi tion of the alignment claws Transmitting the print termination signal from SD M14 rotates to move the alignment stoppers to the home posi ion 8 It stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor Rr PS19 detects the home posi ion of the alignment stoppers 2 1516 7 Folding main Forward scan alignment motor Fr M7 Reverse F4 E lt z 77 a Folding main Forward scan alignment motor Rr 14 Reverse Folding entrance sensor PS60 Folding main scan ali
375. onducted for the 1st paper M6 rotates in the reverse direction to align paper with the alignment claws 3 after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor PS1 detects the trailing edge of 2nd paper Then M6 rotates in the forward direction to replace the alignment claws to the standby position 4 6 rotates to convey the paper to the folding section 6 and evacuate the alignment claws to the home position after a specified period of time after the alignment operation 5 for the last paper of the set After a specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 detects the leading edge of paper M6 rotates in he reverse direction to move the alignment claws to the standby position 7 for the subsequent copy 7 Entrance sensor PS1 Right angle Forward conveyance motor M6 Reverse Right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 uj 314 51 6 METTE 1 Main body start signal 5 Alignment operation 2 Alignment claws moved to the standby position 6 Paper conveyed to the folding section 3 Alignment operation 7 Alignment claws moved back to the standby position 4 Alignment claws moved back to the standby position Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 3 3 Right angle conveyance control A Right angle conveyance mechanism In the right angle conveyance the right angle conveyance motor M6 and the roller release solenoids
376. ons Normal paper exit function Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray sub tray Punching function Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and exited into the main tray sub tray Folding function Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding either one of the following Z fold Letter fold out Letter fold in Double parallel fold Gate fold and folding for each sheet of paper and exited into the sub tray main tray The Z fold exit to the main tray while in the FS connection is limited only to B4 81 2 x 14 11 x 17 12x 18 and 8K PI insertion function PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body Manual mode PI tray paper is punched folded and stapled and then exited into the sub tray main tray The stapling function is available only when the staple unit is con nected to the downstream of the FD 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A 2 Maximum tray capacity Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Main tray weighing 50 to 244 g m FD 501 OUTLINE 2 500 sheets 4 45 B5 B5S 8 2 x 11 81 2 x 115 16K 16KS3 1 500 sheets SRA3 2 B4 SRA4 2 5 45 2 13x 192 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 5 x 14 81 2 x 13 81 4 x 13 8 s x 131 4 8K3 wide paper A3 B4 A4 A4S B5 55 A5 12x 18 11 x 17 8 5 x 11 8 2 x 115 5
377. op roller 8 and ADU reverse roller rotate reversely at the same time Paper is conveyed in the reverse direction keeping the loop 3 and because the ADU gate is closed it is conveyed to the ADU conveyance roller 1 5 By means of the above operations the paper is turned upside down Then the paper is conveyed to the ADU conveyance roller 2 7 3 3 ADU pre registration roller 1 and loop roller 9 for back side printing o o O tc D a d N a lt a e z 5 4 3 2 1 i a03ut2c065ca a 1 ADU pre registration roller 6 ADU reverse roller 2 ADU conveyance roller 3 ADU conveyance roller 2 3 Loop 8 ADU loop roller 4 ADU gate 9 Loop roller 5 ADU conveyance roller 1 90 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 19 ADU SECTION 19 3 2 ADU conveyance control When the front side of the first sheet is fixed 2 after receiving a print start signal 1 the ADU loop motor M57 and the ADU reverse motor M32 start to rotate in the normal direction When the ADU stop sensor PS20 detects the rear 3 of the first sheet while the paper is conveyed to he reverse paper exit section the M57 stops to stop the ADU loop roller The M32 stops after the M57stops This makes the paper form a loop 4 between the ADU loop roller and he ADU reverse roller After the specified time passed from when t
378. oping roller Feed roller Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 12 DEVELOPING SECTION 12 3 Operation 12 3 1 Developer conveyance The developer in the developing unit is agitated by the agitator screw 1 and conveyed to the conveyance screw 2 The developer around the conveyance screw is conveyed to the developing roller 4 by the feed roller 7 and the developer conveyance guide 6 The developer on the developing roller is spread uniformly by the developing regulation plate 5 After transfering the developer onto the drum 8 the remained developer on the developing roller is sent back to the conveyance screw and the agitator screw 5 6 7 a03ut2c039ca 1 2 3 4 Agitator screw 5 Developing regulation plate Conveyance screw 6 Developer conveyance guide Drum Feed roller Developing roller 12 3 2 Developing bias control A Purpose The developing bias is applied to the developing roller in order to attract toner to the drum surface B Timing Refer to 9 3 1 Image creation control See P 43 57 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI 2 a amp 12 DEVELOPING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 12 3 3 Developing suction control The machine intakes the external air to effectively cool down t
379. or PS5 37 FS 607 lt Lu z a 6 STACKER SECTION 38 B Stacker entrance transfer control Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 Stapling mode the paper size is not A4 B5 81 x 11 without the bypassing operation Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body 1 the stacker entrance motor M13 turns ON and rotates in high speed M13 rotates in low speed 3 when the stacker entrance sensor PS5 detects the trailing edge of the paper and then the paper assist roller starts to rotate to transfer the paper to the stacker in low speed When the paper assist roller is driven the paper assist motor M51 and the paper assist solenoid SD51 operate to assist the stacking operation M13 rotates in high speed and stands by for the subsequent paper after a specified period of time since it rotates in low speed After the last paper of the copy passes M13 stops when the stapling operation is started 5 18 turns ON 6 and rotates in high speed to stand by for the subsequent paper when the paper exit motor M8 completes the closing operation Stacker entrance sensor PS5 4 7 Stacker entrance motor M13 Low speed High speed Paper assist motor M51 Paper assist solenoid SD51 Stapler motors M9 and M14 Paper exit motor M8 5 6 15jmt2c009na 1 2 3 4 FNS start si
380. osely to rotate 1st oller 1 get the gears engaged The phases of the 1st folding roller gears 1 1 and the 1st folding roller gears 2 3 are not aligned in the depth direction Therefore they do not engage with each other after the idle gear 2 has been separated pa fd501t02017c 1 tst folding roller gear 1 4 1st folding roller gear 2 2 Idle gear 5 Eccentric cam 3 dle gear arm 6 Seen from the FD side A 35 FD 501 COMPOSITION OPERATION 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 And in parallel with this when the 1st folding release motor M14 starts up the winding up of the wire that pulls he folding guide 2 to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide 2 to push out the paper in the clear pu ance between the 1st folding rollers 1 1 and 2 S As a result the paper gets caught in the rollers to be 9 olded Q lt LLI z a 5 19501102018 1 1st folding roller 1 3 1st folding roller 2 2 Folding guide 96 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION A 6 3 4 2nd folding control A Conveyance folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 2nd folding roller 1 This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by
381. osition on the paper feed tray e Sub scan direction is detected by the time when the original passes by the timing sensor PS302 Allowed size combinations are as shown in the table below For metric area Other Standard originals max original size detected by guide plate 2 originals 4 B4 B5 45 5 55 A5S B6S a o A4 H 7 4 B4 9 H 5 X Thick X Thick B5 O 45 H x Thick Thick Thick Thick paper paper paper paper A5 o B5S x x o Thick Thick paper paper 55 x x x x x x o B6S 2 x 2 x x x x x 72 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION For inch area Other Standard originals max original size detected by guide plate originals o A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 11 17 m 5 81 11 o 81 x 14 o O O x Thick x Thick paper paper 81 x 115 x Thick x Thick paper paper 8 x bih O o x Thick x Thick paper paper 812 505 X 1 SC o O same size same series different series different series out of guaranteed paper through performance x mixed loading not supported 4 Detects not as an error but as A4 2 De
382. ow 4 since the torque is over the limit e When multiple sheets of paper are fed the friction force between the two rollers drops causing counterro tating 10 of the separation roller and the lower paper 2 that contacts with the separation roller is fed back to the tray 3 z lt ul 2 a e a 7 2 3 I 8 J 7 6 5 a03wt2c005ca 1 Paper feed roller 6 Spring force 2 2nd sheet of paper 1 Spring 3 To the tray 8 Torque limiter 4 Driven rotation 9 Conveyance direction 5 Separation roller 10 Rotation of separation direction LU 202 HT 503 lt e LLI z a amp x 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 70 C 1 Pre registration control Outline Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 The pre registration roller 3 is driven by the paper feed motor M1 via the pre registration clutch MC102 M1 drive force is transmitted shut o by MC102 to rotate stop the roller The pre registration control for the second and subsequent papers differs depending on the paper size whether the paper is small sized or This control is carried out mainly by intermediate conveyance sensor 1 PS28 in the mainbody arge sized because of the difference in interval between papers he pre registration sensor PS106 4 LU exit sensor PS107 1 the PS27 in the mainbody a
383. p Fire may result S 6 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 2 Installation Requirements Prohibited Installation Places NWARNING Do not place the product near flammable materials or vol atile materials that may catch fire A risk of fire exists ERR Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain Q A risk of fire and electric shock exists When not Using the Product for a long time NWARNING When the product is not used over an extended period of time holidays etc switch it off and unplug the power cord lt Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire Ventilation N CAUTION The product generates ozone gas during operation but it will not be harmful to the human body If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases gt 2 ventilate the room eu a When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b When taking a lot of copies c When using multiple products at the same time Fixing N CAUTION Be sure to lock the caster stoppers In the case of an earthquake and so on the product may slide leading to a injury SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 3 Servicing Inspection before Servicing N CAUTION Before conducting an inspection read all relevant docu mentation service manual technical notices et
384. p 2006 7 3 2 Stapler clincher movement control A Mechanism The staplers clinchers move to the stapling position in accordance with the paper size The stapling position is different for every paper size to make the stapling distance half of the paper size The staplers Rt 10 and Lt 8 are fixed to the belt Up 9 and the clinchers Rt 2 and Lt 4 to the belt Lw 1 They are moved in the sub scan direction by the stapler movement motor M15 5 via the connecting shaft 6 To prevent the tooth skipping of the belts Up and Lw at the maintenance the gear shaped rotating knob is 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION SD 501 provided on the connecting shaft 6 Rotating the knob you can manually move the staplers Rt and Lt and the clinchers Rt and Lt simultaneously 7 8 10 lt oc 5 wn a 5 4 3 2 1 15ant2c038na 1 Belt Lw 6 Connecting shaft 2 Clincher Rt Rotating knob 3 Stapler movement home sensor PS25 B Stapler Lt 4 Clincher Lt 9 Belt Up 5 Stapler movement motor M15 10 Stapler Rt B Control The stapler movement motor M15 rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal turns ON and moves the staplers and the clinchers to the position for the appropriate paper size They go back to their home position at the end of the printing operation 61 7 SADDLE STITCHING SEC
385. paper feed roller Es 3 5 Paper feed sensor 1 PS2 and 2 PS10 Paper feed motor M1 Paper feed clutch 1 MC1 and 2 MC4 i Pick up solenoid 1 SD1 and 2 805 D l 2 4 a03xt2c008ca 1 START button ON 4 Pick up of the 2nd sheet of paper 2 Pick up of the 1st sheet of paper 5 gt Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper 8 Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper lt 5 7 a 73 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 4 Separation mechanism Papers are separated by the separation roller 5 The separation roller 5 rotates in the direction 10 opposite to the paper conveyance direction 9 by means of the torque limiter B The roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by force exerted by the spring 7 and the torque limiter The friction force between the separation roller and the paper feed roller is limited by the torque limiter in order to prevent multi feed When no paper exists between the separation roller and the paper feed roller or when the only one sheet of paper is present the separation roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of arrow 4 since the torque is over the limit e When multiple sheets of paper are fed the separation roller reverses the direction of rotation 10 opposite to the paper feed roller and feeds the lower paper 2 that contacts with the separation roller b
386. path from the main body 5 Paper exit unit 3 Gate 6 Shiftunit sort group mode only Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH 3 2 Sub tray mode N o 4 a04dt1c003ca 1 Paper path from PI PI 502 installed 3 Gate 2 Paper path from the main body 4 Sub tray FS 607 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 3 Stapling mode HA a04dt1c004ca 1 Paper path from PI PI 502 installed 5 Flat stapling stopper 2 Paper path from the main body 6 3 7 Main tray 4 Clincher 8 Paper exit unit Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 3 PAPER PATH 3 4 Folding saddle stitching mode e e m 15jmtic001na 1 Paper path from PI PI 502 installed 5 Folding knife 2 Paper path from the main body 6 Saddle stitching stopper 3 Gate 7 Booklet tray 4 gt Clincher B FS 607 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 70 3 5 Tri folding mode Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 NY 7 1 15jmt1c002na 1 Paper path from PI PI 502 installed 5 Saddle stitching stopper 2 Paper path from the main body 6 Booklet tray 3 Gate 7 Tri folding stopper 4 Folding knife Theor
387. per exit motor M8 rotates 2 to open the paper exit opening When the stapling operation completes M8 turns ON 3 again to close the paper exit opening It stops when These operations are repeated for every stapled bundle FS 607 he paper exit home sensor PS12 detects the paper exit opening is closed Stapler motor Fr M14 Clincher motor Fr M15 Stapler motor Rr M9 Clincher motor Rr M10 Paper exit home sensor PS12 Paper exit opening solenoid SD4 Paper exit motor 8 3 15jkt2c013na 1 FNS start signal turned ON 2 Opening the paper exit opening 3 Closing the paper exit opening 2 Folding saddle stitching tri folding mode 4 Paper exit opening closed 5 Paper nipped by the paper exit opening solenoid SD4 lt 5 7 a z Transmitting the start signal 1 from the main body the paper exit motor 8 rotates 2 to open the paper exit opening MB turns ON 3 again to close the paper exit opening after a specified period of time since the folding paper exit sensor PS25 or the folding full sensor PS29 detects the trailing edge of the last page It stops when the paper exit home sensor PS12 detects the paper exit opening is closed 4 Folding paper exit sensor PS25 Paper exit home sensor PS12 Paper exit motor M8 n m 3 4 t
388. per of the subsequent set 6 and it stands by for the paper of the subsequent set being conveyed to the front side of the right angle conveyance section SD 501 Entrance sensor PS1 Right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 Folding entrance motor M3 Roller release solenoid 2 SD6 Roller release solenoid 8 SD7 Folding Forward conveyance motor M4 Reverse lt 5 7 a S 2 3 5 15ant2c078na 1 Last paper of the 1st set 5 Caught protection to the folding section 2 Folding entrance roller nipped 6 Last paper of the subsequent set 3 Nip of the right angle conveyance roller 4 released 7 Nip of the folding entrance roller released 4 Folding entrance conveyance 37 SD 501 lt LLI z a amp S 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 38 6 3 2 Folding main scan alignment control A Mechanism In the folding main scan alignment the alignment stoppers Rr 5 driven by the folding main scan alignment motor Rr M14 stop at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size and then the alignment claws Fr 2 driven by the folding main scan alignment motor Fr M7 conduct the alignment operation The home position of the alignment claws Fr is detected by the folding main scan alignment home sensors Fr1 PS18 8 an
389. perature sensor monitors the surface temperature of the fusing belt and fusing roller Lw at speci fied time intervals and the AC drive board ACDB turns the lamps L2 L3 L4 L5 ON OFF according to the detected temperatures bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI 2 a amp S a03ut2c081ca 1 Temperature sensor 4 TEMS 4 3 Temperature sensor 3 TEMS 3 2 Temperature sensor 2 TEMS 2 4 Temperature sensor 1 TEMS 1 B Fusing heater control e The ON OFF statuses of the four fusing heater lamps 1 L2 2 L3 3 14 4 L5 are predetermined for each mode as shown below Mode L2 L3 L4 15 Warm up ON ON OFF ON standby OFF OFF ON ON Charging mode ON ON OFF ON Printing ON OFF ON Low power mode OFF OFF ON ON Returned from low power mode ON ON OFF ON Shut off mode OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 During printing the L3 is turned on off according to the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3 TEMS 3 and the paper size in the main scan direction 706 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 21 FUSING SECTION 21 3 4 Protection against abnormality When the temperature sensor 1 TEMS 1 2 TEMS 2 3 5 3 4 TEMS 4 is over the prescribed temperature for a specified time period it is judged as a high temperature error and the main relay RY1 is turned off then the product is stopped after the fir
390. ping motor M M15 developing motor C M16 and developing motor K M17 OFF timing Stops a predetermined time period after printing is finished The predetermined time period differs depending on the ambient humidity 5 minutes 30 seconds at max Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 25 OTHER CONTROLS M Charging air suction fan M48 control 1 Purpose cool around the charging coronas 2 ON timing Starts to operate upon starting of charging Starts to operate upon starting of image stabilization control bizhub PRO C6500 3 OFF timing Stops a predetermined time period after printing is finished Stops a predetermined time period after finishing the image stabilization control N Paper exit fan 1 M61 2 M62 3 M63 control 1 Purpose To cool the exited paper to prevent unevenness of wax on the paper surface 2 ON timing e Starts to operate upon starting of printing 3 OFF timing FS connected Stops a predetermined time period after the FS paper exit sensor turns off FS disconnected Stops a predetermined time period after the main unit paper exit sensor PS13 turns off O Fusing fan Lw M65 control 1 Purpose To cool the fusing roller Lw lt 5 7 a 2 ON timing Starts to operate when the temperature of the fusing roller Lw rises higher than a prescribed level exceed ing the allowable range
391. r 1 sheet of 81 to 105 g m paper e FS 607 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 4 Max paper capacity Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Main tray Weighing 80g m Non sort mode sort group mode 2500 sheets A4 45 B5 B5S 81 x 11 8 x 115 16 16KS 1500 sheets A3 B4 SRA4S 12x18 11x 17 8 x 14 815 x 13 x 13 81 x 1314 8 x 18 8K A5 55 1 B6S 5 x 8108 A4 8 2 x 11 Max 314 458mm Min 182 x 148 mm 500 sheets Tab paper Custom paper Stapling mode Max 1000 sheets Booklet tray Weighing 80g m No of sheets per stapling Size in the sub The others scan direction is 418mm or longer 2to 9 50 copies 100 copies 10 to 20 50 copies 50 copies 21 to 30 30 copies 30 copies 31 to 40 25 copies 25 copies 41 to 50 20 copies 20 copies Saddle stitching Size in the sub scan direction is 299 mm or longer 15 mode copies in 5 sheets of saddle stitching other than the above 20 copies in 5 sheets of saddle stitching Folding mode Size in the sub scan direction is 299 mm or longer 25 copies in 3 sheets of folding other than the above 33 copies in 3 sheets of folding Tri folding mode 50 copies in 1 sheet of folding Sub tray Weighing 80g m 100 sheets SRA3 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 55 5 55 B6S A6S 13x 19 12x18 11 x 17 82x 14 812 x 11 8 2 x 115 51 x 8
392. r 64 to 256 g m 64 to 300g m A4 8 x 11 or smaller 64 to 209 g m High Quality paper O O A4 8 2 x 11 or larger 64 to 256 g m 64 to 300g m A4 8 x 11 or smaller 64 to 209 g m Color Specific paper O A4 812 x 11 or larger 64 to 256 g m 64 to 300g m 812 x 11 or smaller 64 to 209 g m Coated_GL ML GO MO A A paper 8 2 x 11 or larger 81 to 256 g m 64 to 300g m A4 8 x 11 or smaller 81 to 209 g m Label paper film 2 Index paper 1 O Available A Available only one sheet at a time Not available 1 Paper type of the label paper can be Plain High Quality Color Specific or Coated GL ML GO MO paper Available ranges of paper weight thickness of the label paper are the same with those of the corre sponding paper type 2 Print quality not guaranteed 8 Paper loading direction predetermined single sided printing only bizhub PRO C6500 OUTLINE 2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 D Materials Parts name Useful life Type name Toner bottle Y 24 000 prints 1 TN610Y Toner bottle M 24 000 prints 1 TN610M Toner bottle C 24 000 prints 1 TN610C Toner bottle 35 000 prints 1 TN610K Drum cartridge 200 000 prints 2 DU 102 Developer Y 200 000 prints 2 DV610 Y Developer M 200 000 prints DV610 M Developer C 200 000 prints DV610 C Developer K 200 000 pri
393. r 2 PS21 1st folding blade home sensor 1 PS20 1st folding blade Folding roller 1 QO Oo Right side view 32 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2nd folding blade motor M19 2nd folding blade home sensor 2 P523 2nd folding blade home sensor 1 PS22 2nd folding blade Folding roller 3 Spring pressing the folding rollers 2 and 3 Spring pressing the folding rollers 1 and 2 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION 6 2 4 Folding main scan alignment drive Ep D 2 lt e z 77 o 5 4 31 15ant2c019na 1 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Rr PS19 5 Folding main scan alignment motor Fr M7 2 Alignment stoppers Rr 6 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Fr1 PS18 3 Right side view 7 Folding main scan alignment home sensor Fr2 PS49 4 Alignment claws Fr 8 Folding main scan alignment motor Rr M14 33 SD 501 lt LLI S z a a S 6 FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 34 6 2 5 Folding sub scan alignment center folding exit drive U 8 9 1 EK RYERSS PA 5 OY 5 4 3 15ant2c020na 1 Folding alignment stoppers Rt 6 Front side direction 2
394. r 2 PS28 V TOP signal of the main body 72 a03wt2c008ca 1 Paper skew correction 5 Starts conveyance of the 2nd paper to PS28 2 Waits until PS27 detects the 1st paper 6 Turns off when the 2nd paper reaches PS28 3 Starts conveyance of the 2nd paper to Restarts conveyance PS27 4 Turns off when the 2nd paper reaches PS27 8 MC102 turns off upon completion of 2nd paper conveyance Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION D Airassist control The paper feed assist fan Fr FM1 and Rr FM2 are mounted to the side guide Fr and Rr respectively in order to assist the separation of paper When coated paper has been selected at the paper setting FM1 and FM2 turns on upon receiving a print start signal e The air blowing level of the FM1 and FM2 can be selected from Auto ON strong ON weak and OFF at the paper setting LU 202 HT 503 lt oc 5 wn a a03wt2c009ca 1 Side guide Rr 4 2 FM2 5 Side guide Fr 3 Paper 6 Airflow 73 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 2 Paper empty detection control e A paper empty status can be detected by on off statuses of the upper limit sensor PS109 6 and the paper empty sensor 5108 1 e When paper is loaded on the tray the paper pushes the actuator 2 up as the paper lift plate 4 moves upward and PS108 1 turns
395. r exited 2 Sub tray paper full sensor PS30 B Conveyance speed switching control Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor M1 is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub ray thus preventing paper from having an uneven edge Sub tray paper exit sensor PS1 Sub tray paper Hi speed exit motor M6 Deceleration 1 fs503to2031c 1 Deceleration of the sub tray paper exit motor M6 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 6 STACKER SECTION A 6 1 Composition FS 503 Alignment plate Stack assist plate Stacker addig m Swing roller Rear stopper ty Flat stapling Paper exit stopper am lt 5 7 a fs503t02007c 6 STACKER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 2 Drive 6 2 1 Stacker entrance roller paddle drive FS 503 lt e LLI a amp S 4 fs503to2008c 1 Stacker entrance belt 4 Stacker entrance motor M13 2 Swing roller 5 Paddle 3 Stacker entrance roller 6 Paddle motor M2 74 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 STACKER SECTION 6 2 2 Stack assist plate rear stopper drive FS 503 lt 5 7 fs503to2009c 1 Stack assist home sensor PS32 4 Re
396. r fan heater rd de Ed ka q 26 LU 202 HT 503 lt 5 7 a CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 LU 202 HT 503 OUTLINE lt Lu z a Blank page i Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 LU 202 3 A Type Type Side mount type large volume paper feed tray B Functions Max tray capacity 2500 sheets 80 g m 21 Stacked height 275 mm C Papertype Paper size SRA B4 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 13x19 12x18 11x 17 8 2 14 810 x 11 8 2 x 115 8K 16K Tab paper A4 8 x 11 Custom paper Max 330 x 487mm Min 210 x 182 mm Applicable paper Plain paper high quality paper coated paper 64 to 300 g m 1 Available types of paper weighing 300 g m are limited to specific types D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main body E Machine data Power source 24 12 5VDC 200 to 240VAC supplied both from the main body Maximum power consump DC 40W or less AC 50W or less not including HT 503 tion Weight Approx 40kg Dimensions 710 W x 639 D x 477 H mm F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096 RH
397. r less B When the type of the optional unit connection con figuration P2 is No 9 3 550W or less B When the type of the optional unit connection con figuration P2 is No 10 Dimensions Main body OC 786 W x 992 D x 1 056 H mm 506 Main body DF 3 852 W x 992 D x 1 414 H mm 609 RU 503 LS 501 SD 501 Weight Approx 360kg G Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 C Humidity 10 to 8096RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice o o iD o o DE 2 3 d N bizhub PRO C6500 OUTLINE 3 UNIT CONFIGURATION 3 UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 DF 609 option Operation panel Fusing section B Scanner section OT 502 option Reverse exit section Toner supply section Developing section Write section
398. r limit sensor PS52 timmer press home sensor P553 1 2 3 4 17 15 2 110 Conveyance by the bundle clip started 5 Trimmer press completed Opening operation 6 Trimming completed Stopped when the opening is approx 20 mm 7 Returning operation to the home position Conveyance of the trimmed paper completed N 2 The number of the print paper is 15 or less 30 for the saddle stitched paper The trimmer press motor M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper without widening the opening when the paper is conveyed to the opening 14 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 TRIMMER SECTION 9 3 2 Trimmer blade control A Mechanism The trimming is conducted by the trimmer blade driven by the trimmer blade motor M31 while the paper is pressed by the trimmer press The drive shafts 4 moves up in a slanting direction along with the drive guide holes 2 when M31 pulls the trim mer blade retaining plate 5 to the direction 1 It trims the paper with the trimmer blade 6 attached on the trim mer blade retaining plate 5 The completion of the trimming is detected by the overcurrent of M31 caused when the trimmer blade retaining plate 5 is contacted with the trimmer stoppers 7 attached to the trimmer press plate the overcurrent of M31 is not detected even if the trimmer blade keeps moving up the trimmer blade upper limit sensor PS51 detects the upper limit SD 50
399. r up down home sensor PS26 9 Front side direction 5 66 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION B Control The clincher moves up or down only in the saddle stitching mode Once the saddle stitching press motor M21 moves down the saddle stitching hold Up 1 the clincher up down motor M20 rotates in the forward direction to move up the clinchers Rt and Lt and the saddle stitching hold Lw 2 M20 is stopped when the clincher up down home sensor PS26 turns ON 20 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the clinchers Rt and Lt and the saddle stitching hold Lw when the clincher solenoids Rt SD9 and Lt SD10 starts the clinching operation 4 They are stopped at the ower position 5 when PS26 turns OFF SD 501 2 3 5 Clincher up Forward down motor M20 Reverse Clincher up down home sensor P526 Clincher solenoids Rt 509 Lt 5010 Saddle stitching press motor M21 3 Clinchers Rt and Lt stopped at the upper position 4 15ant2c090na lt 6 1 Saddle stitching hold Up stopped lower position 4 Clinching operation 2 Clinchers Rt and Lt moved up 5 Clinchers Rt and Lt stopped at lower position Ha 67 SD 501 lt LLI S z a amp S 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006
400. ration is stopped by the set tings of DIPSW1 2 and 1 3 When toner density in the developing unit becomes below the reference value while in the printing stop operation described above print operation is immediately stopped after exiting the paper in progress 67 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a 14 TONER COLLECTION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 14 TONER COLLECTION SECTION 14 1 Configuration Belt waste toner socket bizhub PRO C6500 Drum waste toner socket Drum M waste toner socket Drum C waste toner socket pipe Drum K waste toner socket Waste toner door sensor PS60 Horizontal Waste toner outlet veyance pipe lt LLI z a amp S Toner collection box Waste toner full sensor PS52 a03ut2c043ca 62 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 14 2 Drive 14 TONER COLLECTION SECTION a03ut2c044ca 1 2 3 4 Drum waste toner inlet Horizontal conveyance screw Horizontal conveyance pipe Paper feed motor M41 5 6 7 8 Vertical conveyance pipe Belt collection screw Transfer belt motor M18 Belt collection cam 63 bizhub PRO C6500 lt
401. ray capacity 100 sheets 80g m paper 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 Scan speed Single sided mode including thin paper mode 39 sheets min 81 x 11 Double sided mode including thin paper mode 26 sheets min Single sided mode thick paper mode 28 sheets min Double sided mode thick paper mode 14 sheets min Scanning system After the original that is conveyed on the belt stops the scanner moves and scans the original D Machine data Power source 24 5V DC supplied from the main body Power consumption Max 60W or less Weight Approx 14 5kg e Dimensions 588 W x 519 D x 135 H mm Excluding paper feed tray E Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main body F Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 C Humidity 10 to 8096RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM 3 fe a052t1c001ca 1 Reverse paper exit section 8 Paper feed section 2 gt Conveyance section DF 609 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH 3 1 Single sided mode Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006
402. rection and moves up the bundle registration plate 8 to open the paper path to the trimmer section when the bundle press motor M23 completes the paper press operation after the registration operation 24 moves up the bundle press stage 10 for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit 9 91 Bundle press Forward movement motor M17 Reverse Bundle press Forward motor M23 Reverse Bundle registra Forward tion motor M12 Reverse lt Lu z a Bundle press Forward stage up down motor M24 Reverse Bundle press stage up down home sensor P535 Bundle press stage up down limit sensor P545 Bundle registration plate home sensor PS16 10 15ant2c100na 1 Main body start signal Paper press completed 2 Bundle press stage moved up 8 Bundle registration plate moved up B Stopped at the upper limit 9 Paper exit completed 4 Paper conveyance assisting operation completed 10 Bundle press stage moved up 5 Bundle press stage moved down 6 Returning to the home position Only for the paper of 297 mm or more before folding 90 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 2 No trimming mode The bundle press stage up down motor M24 rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage 2 when the main body start signal
403. respectively that switches the rotational direction of M5 Therefore the bundle exit drive and the scraps press plate are not driven simultaneously SD 501 12 2 13 lt rr z D o o 15ant2c062na 1 Bundle exit conveyance belt B Scrap press claws 2 Bundle exit auxiliary roller 9 Bundle tray set sensor PS58 3 Bundle exit belt drive shaft 10 Trimmer scraps full sensor PS41 4 Bundle exit drive belt 11 Scraps press plate 5 Bundle exit motor M5 12 Bundle exit tray 6 Scraps press home sensor PS48 13 Front side direction 7 Scraps box set sensor PS40 99 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 2 Bundle exit tray expanding mechanism The bundle exit tray is expandable The folded bundle exit conveyance belt 6 is also expanded 1 when the bundle exit tray is expanded At the time it also moves the bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft 5 for the bundle exit conveyance belt 1 and 6 SD 501 6 1 lt LLI S z a amp S 15ant2c063na 1 Bundle exit conveyance belt expanded 4 Bundle exit drive belt 2 Folding stand 5 Bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft 3 Drive shaft 6 Bu
404. respond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2006 09 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 CONTENTS CONTENTS Se Eu RU 503 504 E OUTLINE T PRODUCT SPEOCIFIGATIONS u l nte iecur aee ie en A Res Pub Rd d nang 1 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM eme Remb e qr pas paga a e ena rn 3 3 PAPER PATH ss aerae TEGE ve a RR GRE BET PRU Rb ai NG gasas 4 CONFIGURATION OPERATION 4 CONVEYANCE SECTION a echo DBP Ra Gideon a aca a enk edd 7 ol I c cuv MP EMT 7 CAE TIRE d See eee es 8 ABA Conveyance DING acc inde bee kb user ewe Rd au Lede DEEN Dawe RR REV ga RR TER Oe as 8 ON re e hx ko Vete heen a tace bad maka paka ded d 9 Z3 Conveyance CONC bird bees 9 2132 EO Ne ce En freu erp RR e e e pal ka des 12 0 85 FR os isa
405. right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 detects the trailing edge of paper and the alignment operation in the main scan direction is conducted 1 When the folding sub scan alignment home sensor PS56 detects the folding exit claws M8 conducts the alignment by pressing the side of the paper and then it stops 3 The M8 conducts the shelter operation and stops 4 after a specified period of time since PS6 detects the trail Lo D ing edge of paper Right angle conveyance sensor 2 PS6 Folding main Forward scan alignment motor Fr M7 Reverse Folding sub Forward scan alignment motor M8 Reverse Folding sub scan alignment home sensor PS56 amp z 2 3 A 15ant2c084na 5 1 Alignment operation in the main scan direction 3 M8 stopped amp 2 Alignment operation in the sub scan direction 4 Shelter operation S 46 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 FOLDING SECTION C Center folding exit operation The folding sub scan alignment exit motor M8 does not conduct the alignment operation in the sub scan direc ion in the multi center folding saddle stitching mode It conducts the operation only when it exits the paper to he saddle stitching section 8 drives the folding exit claws to conduct the paper exit operation 2 to the saddle stitching section after a specified period of time since the folding main scan alignment
406. rmed this can be allowed by changing DIPSW setting LU 202 HT 503 B Dehumidifier fan heater pre drying control e The user setting menu has an option to activate pre drying with the dehumidifier fan heater before printing every time the upper door is opened closed When the pre drying with the dehumidifier fan heater is set not to be activated in the user setting menu the pre drying before printing is carried out if the upper door is opened closed and a change in remaining amount of paper is detected HTR3 FM3 and turn on when 56 or higher ambient humidity is detected by the temp humidity sen Sor 1 TEM HUMS 1 of the main unit e FM3 and are turned on at regular intervals and kept on for a specified time period lt LLI a amp S C Triggers for dehumidification control e When the sub power switch SW2 is turned on with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to Automatic or On compulsory and with the paper type set to coated paper e After the upper door is opened closed with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to Automatic or On compulsory and with the paper type set to coated paper When the paper type is changed to coated paper from other paper type with the dehumidifier fan heater setting set to Automatic or On compulsory When the dehumidifier fan heater setting is changed to Automatic from Off compulsory or chan
407. rned on at the same time as M302 Then the scanned original is conveyed to the reverse paper exit section 6 while the next original is conveyed to the conveyance section When the scanning of the last page is completed and after the specified time has elapsed from when the reverse sensor PS305 is turned on M302 is turned off 7 High 1 Paper feed motor Low M301 Low erse High Timing sensor PS302 Forward Conveyance L motor M302 Rev OW erse High Reverse sensor PS305 1 2 3104 5 6 05212 009 1 Nipping the original 6 Conveyance from the paper feed section 2 gt Conveyance from the paper feed section and paper exit 3 Pausing for swing back 7 Conveyance to the reverse paper exit sec 4 Swing back tion completed 5 Scanning the original 17 DF 609 lt 5 7 a DF 609 lt e LLI a amp x 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 78 B Double sided mode 1 Operation The paper path of the reverse paper exit section is created by the paper exit gate 1 and the reverse gate 8 Both gates are set by turning off the paper exit solenoid SD301 and turning on the reverse solenoid SD302 7 The front side scan is performed in t
408. rol When AE ACS is selected the density of the original is detected and the print density is automatically adjusted When ACS is selected the color of the original is detected and color or monochrome print is selected automatically lt LLI z a amp S A AE ACS sampling area The original density sampling area for both in platen mode and DF mode is same as the original reading area 7 3 5 Image processing For the image processing the following items are provided Refer to 24 IMAGE PROCESSING for details See P 117 automatic offset control AGC automatic gain control Shading correction processing ACS processing Brightness Density conversion Filter scaling Half tone processing Error diffusion Compression Image data storage Screen processing 90 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 WRITE SECTION 8 WRITE SECTION 8 4 Configuration bizhub PRO C6500 Write uni Write uni Write uni Write uni CY2 lens f0 lens Index mirror Dust proof glass Laser correction hase motor Index board INDEXB 4 Laser drive board LASDB z lt ul 2 a amp o Temperature sensor board TEMSB 1 Laser correction home sensor Polygon mirror a03ut3c025ca 1 Write unit K only 37 bizh
409. s below the reference toner density that is stored in the CPU on the printer con trol board the toner supply motors Y M49 M M50 C M51 and K M52 are turned on to supply toner up to the specified density While in printing While in the print operation each of the TCRS Y M C and K monitors the toner density When output voltage of the TCRS Y M C and K is below the reference value the toner supply motors are turned on to supply toner up to the specified density 13 3 2 Remaining toner detection control A Remaining toner detection control Toner levels in each toner hopper are detected by the piezoelectric sensors Y PZS Y M PZS M C PZS O and K PZS K Detection timing During printing always on No toner display on the operation panel When the value output from the piezoelectric sensor still indicates the no toner status even after the toner is supplied to the toner hopper it is judged that the toner bottle has run out of toner and the message Please replace toner bottle is displayed on the touch panel 13 3 3 Stop control for print operation with no toner After the message Please replace toner bottle is displayed on the touch panel the consumption of the remaining toner about 509 in the toner hopper is detected by the driving time of the toner supply motors Y M49 M M50 C M51 and K M52 When it is detected that the remaining toner has been consumed the print ope
410. s of RU 503 504 FD 501 OUTLINE COMPOSITION OPERAT IQN anna NA AWA BAGAN AR eren eee pee ed 15 For particulars see the contents of FD 501 LS 501 502 OUTLINE aa M IN 1 GOMPOSITION OP ERATION au esee 7 For particulars see the contents of LS 501 502 FS 503 DUTIES oc er capac uU RU UM LA MM M 1 COMPOSITIONOPERATION 7 For particulars see the contents of FS 503 FS 607 vea 1 GOMPOSITION OPERATION ear 11 For particulars see the contents of FS 607 PI 502 OUTLINE 1 COMPOSITION OPERATION satan cts 5 For particulars see the contents of PI 502 PK 512 513 ain kana cen cee ada ds dn 1 EOMPOSITIONOPERATION ie Ure una 5 For particulars see the contents of PK 512 513 SD 501 MEN 1 COMPOSITION OPERATION For particulars see the contents of SD 501 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product Konica Minolta Business Technologies INC hereafter called the KMBT strongly recommends that all servicing be performed
411. s the leading edge of paper is counted Based on the counted time the time when the paper gets to the second transfer section is estimated If the estimated arrival time is earlier later than the proper arrival time the deceleration timing of the registra tion roller and the loop roller line speed is adjusted to meet the arrival timing The timing correction control is carried out for every sheet of paper 18 3 4 Registration speed correction control When restarting registration the registration roller and loop roller conveyance speed are adjusted according to the ambient temperature detected by the registration temperature sensor TEMS1 The TEMS1 measures the temperature at regular intervals The speed of the registration speed correction control is the same as normal line speed when TEMS1 detection temperature is 25 C 85 19 ADU SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 19 ADU SECTION e 8 gt 19 1 Configuration tc 3 ADU conveyance ADU pre registration roller Intermediate conveyance roller 2 N ADU conveyance roller 2 2 roller 1 Intermediate ADU conveyance ADU conveyance roller 3 Intermediate conveyance conveyance sensor 1 sensor PS61 sensor 2 PS28 PS27 AN ADU stop s nsor ADU pre registration sensor PS23 PS20 ADU gate ADU loop roller ADU reverse sengon ES Inter
412. s through the FD entrance sensor PS1 the roller solenoid 1 SD5 the roller solenoid 2 SD6 the roller solenoid 3 SD7 and the roller solenoid 4 SD8 release the pressure of each roller and M12 conducts the alignment operation The roller solenoids that release each of the rollers from pressure are modified according to the size and the direction of paper aligned A specified period of time after completion of punching the last paper M12 rotates in the reverse direction to bring the alignment plate back to the home position FD entrance sensor PS1 Punch conveyance motor M2 Alignment motor M12 R Roller solenoid 505 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 fd501to2040c 1 Start signal 8 Alignment operation 2 Move to the standby position 4 Move to the home position Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 5 PUNCH SECTION 5 PUNCH SECTION A 54 Composition FD 501 Punch rear claw Punch hole switching __ Punch scraps box mechanism lt ul pu z 77 a o 5 fd501to2009c A 25 FD 501 lt Lu z a 5 SECTION 26 5 2 Drive 5 2 1 Rear registration drive Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 3 Q 19501102010
413. sensor PS304 Registration sensor PS301 Registration clutch MC301 High For Paper feed Low motor M301 Low SE High PS302 Forward Low lt 5 7 a motor M302 Reve rse High a052t2c005ca 1 First sheet conveyance 6 Start conveying of the first sheet for paper 2 Front side scanning of first sheet exit 3 Loop formation of the second sheet 7 Conveyance of the second sheet M301 4 Nipping by the registration roller B Conveyance of the second sheet M302 5 Back side scanning of first sheet 71 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 3 2 Original size detection Original size detection signal is detected by scanning in the main direction and sub direction The original size detection method differs between normal copy mode and mixed original copy mode DF 609 A Normal copy mode Main scan direction is detected by the resistance value of the size VR VR301 interlocked with the guide plate position on the paper feed tray e Sub scanning direction is detected by the combination of the size sensor S PS309 and size sensor L PS310 when they are turned on and off B Mixed original copy mode Maximum original size in main scan direction is detected by the resistance value of the size VR VR301 interlocked with the guide plate p
414. set the paper size on the touch panel Make a selection among SRA4 55 8x13 B s x 13144 81 4 x 18 and 81 2 x 13 Make a selection among 5 and 57 x 81 28 Make a selection among B4 55 B5 11 17 81 2 x 11 and 8K 16KS 16K 71 PF 601 HT 504 lt 5 7 a 4 PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 B Assist guide detection control The paper size sensors Fr1 PS7 Fr2 PS15 2 Rr1 PS8 and Rr2 PS16 3 detect opening or clos ing of the auxiliary guide 1 when A6S size paper are set When the auxiliary guide 1 is in use P815 and PS16 are turned off Tray 4 does not support A6S paper PF 601 HT 504 lt LLI gt z a 5 a03xt2c007ca 1 Auxiliary paper guide 3 Paper size sensors Rr1 PS8 and Rr2 2 Paper size sensors Fr1 PS7 and Fr2 PS16 PS15 72 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION 4 3 3 Pick up mechanism Paper is picked up when the pick up solenoids 1 501 and 2 505 are turned off When the solenoids SD1and 05 are turned off the pick up roller goes down to press paper by its own weight When the paper feed clutches 1 MC1 and 2 MC4 turn on the pick up roller starts to rotate and feed paper to the
415. sfer belt e Creating the toner band can be enabled disabled with DipSW20 4 11 3 7 Control against belt filming e Lubricant contained in the toner adheres to the transfer belt and can cause white bands on images Therefore toner is stored between the belt cleaning blade and the toner guide roller to scrape the lubricant off the belt surface with the toner at regular intervals 11 3 8 Image stabilization control To achieve stable image quality the following controls are provided Refer to 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL for details See P 110 Color registration control Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 12 DEVELOPING SECTION 12 DEVELOPING SECTION 12 4 Configuration bizhub PRO C6500 Devel Devel Devel Devel Feed magnet Developing roller Conveyance screw lt oc 7 a sensor Y TCRS Y Agitator screw TRC sensor M TCRS M TRC sensor C TCRS C TRC sensor K TCRS K a03ut2c038ca 55 bizhub PRO C6500 lt Q z a 5 12 DEVELOPING SECTION 12 2 Drive 56 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 IE 2 a03ut2c102ca 1 2 3 Agitator screw Developing coupling 2 Developing motor Y M20 M M21 C M22 K M23 4 5 6 7 Conveyance screw Developing coupling 1 Devel
416. signal is turned ON the stapler movement motor M11 turns ON to move the stapler to the posi tion according to the paper size After a specified period of time the stapler rotation motor M4 also turns ON to rotate the stapler Rr and move it diagonally When a staple empty condition of the stapler Rr is detected at the one corner stapling at rear M4 is driven to replace the cartridge and the stapler is returned to its vertical position B 2staples When the start signal is turned ON the stapler movement motor M11 also turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 7 STAPLER SECTION 7 3 2 Staple control The staple control is made by the stapler motors Rr M30 and Fr M31 to drive the eccentric cam The inside 2 of the eccentric cam 1 is provided with the cam groove 4 of the pressure arm 3 and the pin 6 of the staple cut clinch arm 5 The outside 7 of the eccentric cam is also provided with the cam groove 9 of the stapling arm 8 Each time the eccentric cam makes a 1 4 turn each of the following operations is made 1 paper pressure 2 stapling 3 staple cut clinch and 4 return to the home position A series of the operations complete in a full turn The home position is detected by the stapler home sensors Rr PS40 Fr PS41 FS 503 5 1 lt pu 77 amp o
417. sing rk Ra dr eed ex ed bre Rau naa RE Ra RR 103 21 8 2 Pressure release control a lebe er RR RR RR Rh u qa Pa 105 21 8 8 Fusing temperature uu us uude me sakke Tresker u u sawa WE ce 106 21 3 4 Protection against abnormality os 107 Mit bizhub PRO C6500 lt ec 5 7 a bizhub PRO C6500 OUTLINE z lt 2 a o a o o CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 21 0 5 Fusing roller Lin cooling m ek eh x ona x KANG BG Oe ess 108 22 INTERFACE SECTION uuu nous ANOS ANG LABAG 109 EEG 0 AA 109 22 9 srep Eas hr Rd RR GRE RE Qa qa AG GRE Sad RR da dA RE 109 29 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL rrr RE RR RR EE Re KA ERE eR 110 Pm 110 REG OW MT rr 110 23 2 1 Image stabilizing controls when the sub power switch SW2 is ON during printing andi during icing tmm net m ERR PURA anak awas 110 23 2 2 Image stabilizing controls when selecting the Stability in expert settings 115 29 8 9 Other Image stabilizing aeos paa rre Rer Rm hk RE Rm ao KR CR Roe n 116 24 IMAGE PHOUESSINOL aig boe PDA e cade d carr p EN TR e u
418. sity correction i B Simple Gamma correction bizhub PRO C6500 a03ut2c112ca A Simple maximum density correction 1 Purpose To keep the maximum density constant regardless of the ambient condition and the number of printed sheets 2 Operation Patch images are created on the transfer belt and read by the sensor PS11 The PS11 output level is checked against a predetermined output level with respect to print density The result is reflected to the developing DC bias and the Grid voltage 3 Execution timing The correction setting is enabled in Utility Machine Admin setting System settings Expert adjustment gt Quality adjustment gt Image Quality stability When the print copy job reaches the number of pages that correspond to a level of density selected on the operation panel lt ec 5 7 a Operation panel setting 2 1 normal 1 2 Number of print pages 200 100 50 30 10 B Simple gamma correction 1 Purpose To correct print density according to gamma characteristic of toner images formed on each drum and the transfer belt in relation to the exposure level 2 Operation Patch images are created on the transfer belt with the settings selected in the Menu Qualty adjust ment Screen and read by the PGC sensor PS1 1 3 Execution timing
419. sor PS55 4 Actuator 9 Bundle press section 5 Front side direction 10 Bundle sensor 4 PS54 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION B Control 1 Trimming mode The bundle press movement motor M17 rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to the paper conveyance position 2 after specified period of time since the bundle clip motor M11 starts convey ing the paper 1 Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate SD 501 press standby position in accordance with the paper size 3 M17 rotates in the reverse direction and searches for the press position 6 for the paper when the bundle press stage up down home sensor PS35 detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down 5 M17 stops the bundle press section at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size 7 after a specified period of time since the trimmer registration sensor PS55 turns OFF M17 searches the home position B and then moves the bundle press section to the paper trimming position 9 after a specified period of time since the bundle press motor M23 completes the paper press operation The bundle press section is returned to the home position 10 after a specified period of time since the trimming operation is completed A BAOn 18 Bundle clip Forward motor M11 Reverse Bundle press Forward movement motor M1
420. ssay LAG 108 92 2 Per 80 CVG S an wa d ee m R Ra Or aod 109 9 2 3 r rner board OYO eu a as et eee eee aa eee 110 924 Paddle de recs RR Baas vedde dees BREE DECREE REESE Sed aqa 111 OS WAN PLI 112 TIMME NE OE 112 032 blade CONYO oa awa ma NG GG Y dm CR Ed E od 115 9329 NT COMIC aa AT AG GG KN PP AA oboe 117 934 hao PP PAPA 119 i Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A Type o D Type Saddle stitching unit with fore edge trimming and multi folding function B Functions 1 Functions Subtray exit Exits paper to the subtray without any process Coupling exit Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process Saddle stitching Exits paper to the bundle exit tray after being center folding and saddle stitch ing Saddle stitching with trim ming Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding saddle stitching and trimming processes Multi center folding Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding on one or more sheets of paper Multi letter folding Exits to the tri folding tray after being letter folding process on one or more sheets of paper 2 Maximum tray capacity Subtr
421. st transfer second transfer and fusing pressure are stopped released When the temperature sensor 1 TEMS 1 2 TEMS 2 3 53 4 TEMS 4 detect a temperature of under 50 C continuously for a specified time period it is judged as a low temperature error and the main relay RY1 is turned off then the product is stopped after the first transfer second transfer and fix bizhub PRO C6500 ing pressure are stopped released The thermostat 1 TS1 2 TS2 shut down the power line to the fusing heater lamp 1 L2 2 L3 3 L4 at 190 7 C The thermostat 3 TS3 shuts down the power line to the fusing heater lamp 4 L5 at 160 7 C When the fusing temperature abnormality occurs the relay off status is maintained by latch SC latch and an error message appears on the touch panel After troubleshooting the cause of the error the SC latch must be released by the software DipSW3 1 AC drive RY section drive COMPOSITION OPERATION section a03ut2c082ca 107 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI z a amp 21 FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 21 3 5 Fusing roller Lw cooling control e When the temperature of the fusing roller Lw 2 detected by the temperature sensor 2 5 2 rises higher than a specified temperature and the difference between the detected and the specified
422. supply unit Y M C are canceled Switching sequence from the black and white mode to the color mode A color print job is detected The second transfer for the previous print sheet black and white is complete The operation of the drum unit Y M C the developing unit Y M C and the toner supply unit Y M C are started MPC or APC is executed for the write unit Y M C 5 A pressure is applied to the first transfer roller Y M C K Writing Y is started 25 5 2 Count when using ACS There are two kinds of print count when using ACS A The black and white mode the first transfer roller Y M C is in the release state Black and white original Total count Counts as black and white Developer counter Counts as black and white B The color mode the first transfer roller Y M C K is in the pressure state Color original Black and white original Total count Counts as color Counts as black and white Developer counter Counts as color Color count 1 il When the original is black and white the output will be black and white however the developer counter 732 counts it as color print and the total counter counts it as black and white print SS E oa KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL DF 609 2006 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to
423. t z a amp o 8 WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 34 8 2 3 Color registration control In a black and white copier a toner image formed on its drum can be directly transferred onto paper In a color copier the process is much complicated This machine uses four photoconductor drums correspond to yellow magenta cyan and black colors In order to create a complete toner image the four separated single color toner images formed on the drums must be overlaid on the transfer belt without misalignment The control to prevent the misalignment is referred to as color registration control A Types of the color registration control There are following five color registration controls and the five controls are carried out for each color correcting yellow Y magenta M and cyan C with reference to black K The color registration control in the Partial horizontal magnification is made by adjusting the write units mechanically The other four color registration controls are performed electrically Correction type Correction method Drift in the main scan Adjusts the write start timing in the main ning direction Scan direction Drift in the sub scanning Adjusts the write start timing in the sub scan direction direction Entire horizontal magni Adjusts the clock frequency for the wire fication units Inclination Adjusts the angle of the CY2 lens 2 C
424. t of the 1st sheet of paper Movable type front stopper OFF B Shift of the last sheet of paper 9 gt Movable type front stopper OFF secured 10 Movable type front stopper OFF secured Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION D Job partition plate In stacker tray sort mode the trailing edge of the shift paper is restricted by the job partition plate and the paper is exited onto the stacker tray 20 mm shifted from the non shift paper At this time the upper surface of the non shift paper does not come to the same level as the lower edge of the job partition plate and the 1st sheet of the shift paper is in possibility of getting into the lower side of the job partition plate To prevent this the job partition plate is attached to the upper surface of the non shift paper that has been exited to restrict the entry of the paper For the job partition solenoid SD2 that drives the job partition plate a latch type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state However a latch type solenoid requires a different contro Signal for each ON and OFF action N o D Eo LO N 5 Si PERO 1 EE s ba 8 TI 7T X 4 3 2 1 Is502to2023c 1 Entrance sensor PS4 4 Stac
425. tects not as an error but as B5 F4 lt ul 6 z E 7 4 3 8 No paper detection No paper detection signal is detected by the no paper sensor PS304 73 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION 5 4 Configuration KO a052t2c006ca 1 Conveyance belt 2 gt Conveyance roller 74 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 CONVEYANCE SECTIO 5 2 Drive 3 DF 609 2 1 2 a052t2c007ca 1 Conveyance belt 3 gt Conveyance motor M302 2 Conveyance roller z lt a e amp x 75 5 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 5 3 Operation 5 3 1 Scanning and conveyance control e Theconveyance belt is driven by the conveyance motor M302 e n single sided mode a swing back to position the original for scanning is performed after the original is conveyed from the paper feed section to the conveyance belt n double sided mode the original returned from the reverse paper feed section is conveyed at low speed DF 609 and is positioned for scanning Thin paper mode is provided in the original size setting as the positioning control method differs between thin paper and the other papers plain and thick A Single sided mo
426. ted to the main tray with no processing made Sort group mode Exited to the main tray after being shifted for every copy Sub tray mode Exited to the sub tray with no processing made Stapling mode Exited to the main tray after being stapled Saddle stitching mode Exited to the booklet tray with the paper folded into two after being stitched and folded at the center of the paper Folding mode Exited to the booklet tray with the paper folded into two at its center Tri folding mode Exited to the booklet tray after being overlapped up to 3 sheets and being tri folded 2 Stapling Max flat stapling capacity 50 sheets of 64 to 80 g m plain paper high quality paper 30 sheets color paper coated paper 30 sheets of 81 to 105 g m plain paper high quality paper 16 sheets color paper coated paper Up to 2 sheets of 200g m2 can be added unless the total number of sheets exceeds the above capacity staple position Front parallel back 45 1 position diagonally 2 positions at the center Max saddle stitching 20 sheets of 64 to 80 g m capacity 20 sheets of 81 to 105 g m Plain paper high quality paper 16 sheets color paper coated paper Up to 2 sheets of 200g m2 can be added unless the total number of sheets exceeds the above capacity staple position variable 128 to 168mm 3 Folding Max Folding 3 sheets of 64 to 105 g m paper Max Tri folding 3 sheets of 64 to 80 g m pape
427. teller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers France ATTENTION y a danger d explosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du m me type ou d un type quivalent recom4 mand par le constructeur Mettre au rebut les batteries usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant Denmark ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leveranderen Finland Sweden VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat tillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion Norway ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner 5 12 SAFETY INFORMATION SAFETY INFORMATION IMPORTANT NOTICE The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Admin istration implemented regulations for laser products manu
428. tempera tures exceeds a predetermined level the fusing fan Lw M65 4 turns on and cools down the fusing roller Lw e While the M65 is operating the fusing heater lamp 4 is kept off The fusing fan Lw M65 takes in air from the front side through the duct 3 to cool the fusing roller Lw Air that passed through the fusing roller Lw is exhausted to the rear side through the duct 1 1 4 a03ut2c083ca 1 Duct 3 Duct 2 Fusing roller Lw 4 M65 708 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 22 INTERFACE SECTION 22 INTERFACE SECTION 22 1 Configuration o iD o o o B a USB port USB TypeB Connector for printer controller a 5 wn Serial port S RJ45 Ethernet connector RS 232C m Service port Parallel port 1284 com pliant a03ut2c084ca 22 2 Application Type Application Connector for printer controller For IC 303 IC 408 RJ45 Ethernet connector For network Service port For mouse keyboard for USB memory ISW USB port USB TypeB For ISW of copier printer Serial port RS 232C For CS Remote care Parallel port For ISW of copier printer CN1000 Overall control board OACB For consolidation vendor connection CN493 For key counter KCT connection CN495 For status indicator light 709 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver
429. the PS30 PS36 and PS42 are turned off by paper feeding the M38 M39 and M40 rotate again to lift the lift plate until each upper limit sensor turns on 15 3 2 Paper size detection control A Detection in main scanning direction Paper size in main scanning direction is detected by the resistance value of the paper size VR 1 VR1 2 VR2 and 3 VR3 The resistance value of the VR1 VR2 and VR3 varies depending on the position of the guide plate oc s B Detection in sub scanning direction Paper size in sub scanning direction is detected by on off status of the paper size sensors Fr1 PS33 and Rr PS34 Fr2 PS39 and Rr2 PS40 and Fr3 PS45 and Rr3 PS46 Paper size Paper size sensors Fr1 Paper size sensors Rr1 Paper size VR 1 VR1 2 PS33 Fr2 PS39 Fr3 PS34 Rr2 PS40 Rr3 VR2 3 VR3 1 PS45 PS46 18x19 O ON 333 2 SRA3 O ON 317 0 SRA4 OFF OFF 317 0 12x18 O ON 292 8 280 4 A4 OFF OFF 280 4 11x17 Ol OFF 252 4 8 x 11 OFF OFF 252 4 8K 237 4 16K OFF OFF 237 4 B4 Ol OFF 216 7 B5 OFF OFF 216 7 8 5 x14 ON OFF 151 3 812 115 OFF OFF 151 3 45 OFF OFF 141 9 8 5 x13 ON OFF 151 3 B5S OFF OFF 97 3 A5S OFF OFF 43 2 8 x 55 OFF OFF 30 0 1 VR angles 68 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 15 PAPER FEED SECTION 15 3 8 Paper feed control A Pick up co
430. the clincher Rr 8 are mounted at the top 2 of the timing belt 9 and the stapler Fr 6 and the clincher Fr 4 are mounted at the bottom 5 of the timing belt The stapler movement home sensor PS1 1 7 detects the distance between the stapler and the clincher AN 1 15jmt2c015na 1 Stapler movement motor M11 6 Stapler Fr 2 Upper side of the timing belt Stapler movement home sensor PS1 1 3 Clincher Rr 8 Stapler Rr 4 Clincher Fr 9 Timing belt 5 Lower side of the timing belt Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 STAPLER SECTION B Rotational movement operation The stapler Rr and the clincher Rr rotate 45 for performing 1 staple one corner stapling at rear The stapler rotation motor M6 10 rotates the stapler Rr 9 and the clincher rotation motor M4 5 rotates the clincher Rr 7 The ball rock mechanism that consists of the ball 1 and the spring 2 securely locks the stapler and the clincher at 0 or 45 The illustrations 3 and 4 show the mechanism locked and unlocked respectively e e lt 77 e 15jmt2c016na 1 6 Clincher rotation home sensor PS14 2 Spring 7 Olincher Rr 3 Locked 8 Stapler rotation home sensor PS13 4 Unlocked 9 Stapler Rr 5 Clincher rotation motor M4 10 Stapler rotation motor M6 47 7 STAPLER
431. the folding section Thick paper more than 131 g m2 due to the limit of the folding performance up to 2 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section Normal paper For the 1st set 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first Similarly 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets At the final conveyance 2 sheets are conveyed if the total number of the paper is even or 1 sheet is conveyed if the number is It does not convey 3 sheets at a time for the odd case because the timing to transmit the information such as the page count the paper type and so on is too late when the printing is conducted from a PC For the 2nd and following set 8 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first to take adequate time to conduct the folding operation for the preceding set At the final conveyance 2 sheets are con veyed if the total number of the paper is even 3 sheets are conveyed if the number is Thick paper Up to 2 sheets of paper can be stacked for the thick paper For every set 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first Similarly 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets At the final conveyance 2 sheets are conveyed if the total number of the paper is even 1 sheet is conveyed if the number is Using
432. the home posi tion G Staple scraps box detection The presence of a staple scraps box or the incorrect setting of a box is detected by the stapler scraps box set sensor PS34 When there is no staple scraps box or it is set incorrectly an error message is displayed on the operation section lt 5 7 a 33 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION A 8 1 Composition Paper exit opening unit Main tray paper exit roller I SA Paper pressure arm FS 503 Main tray lt a 6 e z j a Lift wire a 5 fs503to2023c o4 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION 8 2 Drive 8 2 1 Tray up down drive FS 503 6 7 lt 6 z 7 fs503to2024c 1 Counter reset sensor PS15 5 Lift wire 2 lower limit sensor PS3 6 Main tray 3 Tray up down motor M3 7 Lift pulley Up 4 Lift pulley Lw 35 8 MAIN TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 2 2 Main tray paper exit drive eo Lo 0 lt LLI e 6 fs503to2025c pz 1 Main tray paper exit motor M7 4 M
433. the pick up roller section to prevent multi feed By moving the paper feed arm retaining levers 1 on the front and back inward the pick up rollers on the front and back are secured while the roller in the middle presses against paper Multi feed is prevented by reducing the pressure against paper when feeding papers 2 fd501102044c Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 9 3 4 Separation mechanism The separation roller 4 is driven in the direction opposite is conveyed or only one s 1 and the separation ro torque limiter 3 Accordingly the separation roller 4 rota vey paper to the vertical conveyance section When 2 or more sheets o the frictional force of the the lower most paper from being conveyed When the PI registration clutches Up CL1 and Lw CL2 heet of paper is conveyed the fri 9 PI SECTION o the paper conveyance 2 However when no paper ictional force generating between the paper feed roller ler 4 or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the es in the direction of the paper conveyance 2 to con paper are conveyed the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than orque limiter 3 and the separat ion roller 4 rotates in the reverse direction to prevent turn ON according to the PI paper feed demand sig nal the paper feed roller atime 1 the separation roller 4 and he pick up roller 7 rot
434. the position where the stapler 1 is positioned while holding the center folded paper 1 JO ple JOAR 6 E 77 5 15 2 041 1 5 Left side view 2 Saddle stitching hold Lw 6 Center folded paper 3 Clincher 7 Saddle stitching hold Up 4 Eccentric cam 65 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 The clincher moves down to the lower position by its own weight and moves upward by the clincher up down motor M20 The roller 2 attached to the arm 5 is pushed up and the clincher is contacted with the stapler when M20 rotates the eccentric cam 3 The paper between the clincher and the stapler is hold securely by the spring 6 Once the stapling operation is completed M20 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the eccentric cam and then the clincher moves down by its own weight SD 501 1 lt LLI 2 z a amp S 51 21 5 4 3 2 15ant2c042na 1 Left side view 6 Spring 2 Roller Clinchers Rt Lt B Eccentric cam B Saddle stitching hold Lw 4 Clinche
435. the tri folding mode it is used at the 1st folding FS 607 A Folding knife operation The folding knife motor M19 rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the paper 2 to the nip section with the folding knife 5 The folding rollers 4 draw and fold the paper The position of the saddle stitching stopper 6 controls the folding position 4 3 6 lt 5 7 a ee OG 15jmt2c020na 1 Folding knife home sensor PS22 4 Folding roller 2 Paper 5 Folding knife 3 Folding pass through sensor 526 6 Saddle stitching stopper B Folding knife control The folding knife motor M19 turns ON and sticks out the folding knife to the paper after a specified period of time since the folding pass through sensor PS26 3 detects the paper and the saddle stitching stopper stops at the folding position M19 stops when the folding knife reciprocates and the folding knife home sensor PS22 1 turns OFF 53 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCHING TRI FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 83 2 Folding transfer control The folding transfer motor M20 drives the folding roller Then the folding roller drives the tri folding roller A Folding transfer control The folding knife motor M19 turns ON 2 after a specified period of time since the folding pass through sensor PS26 detects the paper
436. tion 10 8bit convert ACS rcr JERN Y Y Y Scaling main scan Spatial filter LI AE Background adjustment Brightness conversion black and white mode lt ul 2 a e a Data compression expansion IM zm 1 Write C Write M Write K a03ut2c086ca 117 24 IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 24 2 Image type classification o OUTLINE 9 e Ascanned image type is classified as text dots solid or chroma After the classification gamma curve used for writing the image is changed to the appropriate one for the image type 2 The image classification function works Text Photo Text or Map is selected in the original setting menu The function does not work when Photo is selected Image data Text Dots Solid Chroma Characters Dot pattern for offset silver halide Chromatic or achromatic printing photo color a03ut2c087ca lt oc Lu a gt 2 7 778 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 24 IMAGE PROCESSING B Writing bit and resolution Relations between number of write bit and the resolution by the combination of the display and the image quality 8 is
437. tion 718 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 A 9 3 4 Trimmer paddle A Mechanism the trimmer paddle motor M33 trimming paddle dropping path 4 9 TRIMMER SECTION The trimmer paddle 2 is provided to prevent the saddle stitched paper from creating trails with scraps by get ting into the paper during the press operation and to drop the scraps forcibly The trimmer paddle is driven by Trimming amount is 15mm or less The M33 motor rotates in reverse 1 to drop 3 the trimming scraps with the Trimming amount is more than 15mm The M33 motor rotates forward to rake and drop the scraps to the wider 5 4 _T_ N lt bt nies MTT 3 15 2 121 1 Trimmer paddle M33 reverse direction 2 Trimmer paddle 3 Dropping path Trimming amount is 15mm or less 4 Dropping path Trimming amount is more than 15mm 5 Trimmer paddle M33 forward direction A 79 SD 501 z lt ul 2 a e
438. to the trimmer blade many times at the same position For this reason the trimmer board is SD 501 Slid 1 mm backward for sheet cutting each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed The trimmer board solenoid SD1 1 1 slides the trimmer board 5 with its fixing released by the trimmer press motor M32 The pinion 8 pushes the rack 4 0 5 mm every time SD11 turns ON The rotation of the pinion is transmitted to the rack by the one way clutch 6 and pushes the trimmer board when SD11 turns ON The pinion does not rotate and push the trimmer board when SD11 turns OFF by the one way clutch Each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed SD11 is turned on twice to move the trimmer board 1 mm The trimmer board can be slid up to approximately 26 mm The main body displays the message on its opera tion panel when the trimmer board replacement sensor PS59 2 turns ON The trimmer operation is prohibited when the trimming is conducted 700 times since PS59 turns ON N Note For C6500 the operation timing of the trimmer board solenoid can be selected among 700 500 300 700 by default and the travel distance can be selected among 1 0 1 5 2 0 mm 1 0 by default from Finisher adjustment in service mode For 1050 if the DIPSW22 5 setting in service mode is changed to 1 the operation timing of the trimmer board solenoid becomes selectable among 700 500 300 700 by default on the adjust ment screen in the user mode The
439. transfer belt one by one in the order of Y M C and K As a result the four toner images are overlaid and a complete toner image is formed on the belt This is called as first transfer In order to carry out the first transfer a positive high DC voltage bias is applied to the first transfer roller provided on the back surface of the transfer belt This makes the transfer belt surface have a positive potential higher than that of the each drum surface so that the toner on the drums are attracted to the transfer belt bizhub PRO C6500 3 lt ul 2 a e a a03ut2c006ca 1 Drum Y 5 Negative electric charges 2 First transfer roller Y 6 Drum M 3 Transfer belt 7 First transfer roller M 4 Toner Y B Toner M 75 bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI z a amp x 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 76 6 6 Second transfer process Step 5 Transferring the complete toner image formed on the transfer belt to paper is called as second transfer For the second transfer the second transfer roller Lw located at the back side of the transfer belt rotates to transport paper applying a pressure on the belt while a high negative DC bias is applied to the second transfer roller Up inside the belt Because of a potential difference between the two rollers the toner image can be transferre
440. transfer motor M1 rotates in high speed when pressing the start button In the mode the paper is exited from the main body in slow speed M1 rotates in slow speed when the main body paper exit sensor PS37 turns ON Then it rotates in high speed after a specified period of time since the FNS entrance sensor PS4 turns ON When exiting to the main tray M1 rotates in middle speed to in sync with the FS paper exit line speed after a Specified period of time since PS4 detects the trailing edge of the paper Then after a specified period of time M1 returns to rotate in high speed and waits for the subsequent paper Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 IRANSFER SECTION 4 3 3 Gate drive control The gate switches among the paper transfer path to the main tray the one to the sub tray and the one to the stacker A Gate operation e The gate motor M12 drives the gate cam 2 and then 2 cams 3 and Lw 4 of the gate cum drive the 2 gates UP 5 and Lw 6 respectively The gate home sensor PS16 detects the home position lt 15jkt2c004na 1 Gate motor M12 5 Gate Up 77 2 Gate cam 6 Gate Lw 3 Cam Up 7 Gate home sensor PS16 8 4 Cam Lw B Gate control he FNS control board FNSCB controls the gate The gate turns ON when transmitting the FS operation signal from the main body and then it stops either at the sub tray h
441. transfer roller Count of uses of the developer bizhub PRO C6500 C Operation timing Refer to 9 3 1 Image creation control See P 43 lt e LLI z a amp S 52 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 11 INTERMIDIATE TRANSFER SECTION 11 3 3 Second transfer mechanism The 5 is rotated by the second transfer pressure release motor M34 When the cam pushes the pressure arm 6 the second transfer roller Lw 7 is pushed up and pressed to the transfer belt unit 4 Pressure can be selected from Normal 2 or Low 3 If the image failure transfer failure occurs when printing onto thick papers select Low Pressure can also be selected from the paper setting in the basic screen by setting 1 for DipSW1 0 When the cam further rotates the pressure to the pressure arm is released and the second transfer roller Lw comes down to be released from the transfer belt unit 1 bizhub PRO C6500 lt 5 7 a a03ut2c036ca 1 Released Cam 2 Pressed Normal 6 Pressure arm 3 Pressed Low Second transfer roller Lw 4 Transfer belt unit 11 3 4 Second transfer control A Second transfer operation The toner on the transfer belt is transferred onto paper when the paper is conveyed in between the transfer belt and the second transfer roller Lw B Second
442. tray is aligned by the alignment plate for each sheet of paper Entrance sensor PS4 1 Alignment motor M7 lignment plate home sensor PS12 m 3 5 7 9 lt oc wi 2 7 o a gt 10 11 8 2 4 6 8 15502102026 1 Main body paper exit sensor PS3 ON 6 Alignment of the 2nd sheet of paper 2 Movement to a position specified for each 7 3rd sheet of paper paper size B Alignment of the 3rd sheet of paper 3 1st sheet of paper 9 Last sheet of paper 4 Alignment of the 1st sheet of paper 10 Alignment of the last sheet of paper 5 2nd sheet of paper 11 Return to the home position LS 501 502 lt LLI a amp S 6 CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 30 H Stacker tray up down control The detection of the upper surface of paper loaded on the stacker tray is made by the paper empty sensor PS6 through the paper press arm 3 When PS6 is turned off by loading paper that has been exited the stacker tray up down motor M1 turns on to lower the stacker tray down to the position at which PS6 turns on The stacker tray is thus held at a fixed height when paper is being exited The number of sheets of paper loaded on the stacker tray is detected by the 2000 sheets stacked sensor PS13 and the 5 000 sheets stacked sensor PS14 provided
443. ttached on the belt Execution timing When printing has not been performed for 6 hours or longer Every 1 000 prints When a change in humidity exceeds 2096 from the last time the control is performed When turning on the sub power switch SW2 after replacing the materials Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 23 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL E 1 2 1 2 Maximum density correction control Purpose To keep the maximum density constant regardless of the ambient condition and the number of printed pages Operation The maximum density correction method differs in each color of Y M C and K The correction of Y M and C The target value of each toner adhesion stored in the NVRAM board is used for the correction A patch image is created on the transfer belt using the maximum exposure level to be read by the PGC sensor PS11 According to the detected density a target range of developing bias is calculated and determined for devel opment The correction of K A gradation patch image is created on the transfer belt using the intermediate exposure level to be read by the PS11 According to the detected density a target range of developing bias is calculated and determined for devel opment Execution timing When printing has not been performed for 6 hours or longer Every 1 000 prints When a change in humidity exceeds 2096 from the last time the control is performed When turning on the su
444. turn off while paper being fed the LU drive board LUDB changes M1 drive signal into off in order to stop the paper feeding Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 HT 503 OPTIONAL 7 HT 503 OPTIONAL 7 1 Configuration Dehumidifier Dehumidifier Dehumidifier Temperature sensor TEMS fan 1 FM3 fan 2 4 heater 3 HTR 2 LU 202 HT 503 drive board a03wt2c019ca lt 5 z D o a o 25 7 HT 503 OPTIONAL Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 7 2 Operation 7 2 1 Dehumidifier fan heater control A Outline The fan heater HTR3 and the dehumidifier fan 1 FM3 and 2 generate hot airflow inside the LU and reduce moisture in order to prevent jam of coated paper due to dampness The dehumidifier control has two processes a dehumidifier fan heater pre drying and the temperature limit ing dehumidification control The first one pre drying is made with HTR3 FM3 and Once the target temperature rise is achieved the pre drying process is finished and further dehumidification control limiting the temperature is carried out only by HTR3 The dehumidification control is carried out according to the temperature inside the tray detected by the temperature sensor TEMS and continued until the target temperature rise is achieved Feeding paper from the LU cannot be made while the dehumidification control being perfo
445. tween in the SD 501 multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode Multi center folding mode When the bundle arm is contacted with the guide plate of the stapler section 4 by the bundle arm rotation motor M22 Saddle stitching mode When the clincher moves downward 5 at the end of the stapling operation M26 rotates in the forward direction to assist the bundle arm to convey the paper 7 after a specified period Then the bundle arm assist plate go back to the standby position and stands by for the subsequent set 8 9 6 7 8 Bundle arm Forward assist motor M26 Reverse mn Bundle arm assist home sensor PS38 Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor P539 lt 5 7 a Clincher up Forward down motor M20 Reverse Bundle arm Forward rotation motor M22 Reverse 4 5 15ant2c095na 1 Main body start signal 6 Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm 2 Movement to the upper limit 7 Assist of the bundle arm conveyance 3 Bundle arm moved in accordance with the B Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size paper size 4 Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate 9 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode 5 Clincher moved down 77 7 SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 2 Large size paper 3
446. ub PRO C6500 lt e LLI a amp S 8 WRITE SECTION 32 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 82 Operation 8 2 1 Laser beam path a03ut2c026ca 1 Laser diode 6 Index lens 2 Collimator lens 7 Index board INDEXB 3 CY1 lens 8 Drum 4 Polygon mirror 9 Dust proof glass 5 fo lens CY2 lens Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 WRITE SECTION 8 2 2 Write unit control The read data converted into digital data in the CCD board is sent to the image process board IPB The RGB signals are converted to the YMCK signals in the IPB The converted YMCK signals are distributed to the corresponding laser drive board Y LASDB Y M LASDB M C LASDB C K LASDB K in the IPB The laser drive boards emit laser beam to create an electrostatic latent image on the corresponding drums Each laser drive board emits two beams per one laser diode and writes two lines per one scanning The write start position is determined according to the INDEX signals detected by the Index boards Y INDEXB Y M INDEXB M C INDEXB O and K INDEXB K to prevent the misalignment of scanned image in main scanning direction bizhub PRO C6500 2 a03ut2c027ca 1 Laser beam 3 Drum 2 Polygon mirror lt 5 7 a 33 bizhub PRO C6500 l
447. ue limiter 1 The separation roller is pressed against the paper feed roller 8 by means of the spring 3 force 9 and the pressure applied from the torque limiter The friction force between the separation roller and the paper feed roller is limited by the torque limiter in order to prevent multi feed When no paper exists between the separation roller and the paper feed roller or when the only one sheet of paper is present the separation roller is driven by the paper feed roller in the direction of arrow 5 since the torque is over the limit When multiple sheets of paper are fed the separation roller reverses the direction of rotation 2 opposite to the paper feed roller the separation roller the direction of rotation 2 opposite to the paper feed roller feeds the lower paper 7 that contacts with the separation roller back to the tray 6 The drop in frictional force between the two roll ers due to the multiple sheets causes the counter rotating of the separation roller 8 9 10 3 2 1 a03ut2c049ca 1 Torque limiter 6 To the tray 2 Rotation toward the separation Second sheet of paper 3 Spring B Paper feed roller 4 Separation roller 9 Pressing force 5 Driven rotation 10 Paper feed direction 70 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 15 PAPER FEED SECTION C Loop formation mechanism The paper passed between the paper feed roller 5 and the separation roller 3 is conveyed to the
448. um C 12 Color registration sensor Rr PS9 6 Write unit C 13 Data processing Drum K 35 8 WRITE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 C Procedure for the color registration control operation 7 Transferring the color registration mark The color registration mark 7 of each black cyan magenta and yellow colors are transferred on the transfer 9 belt in that order forming two marks per line one each on the left and right sides on the belt The left and right positions of the marks on the belt correspond to the positions of the color registration sensors Rr PS9 and Fr 5 PS8 a 1 U 1 2 3 LLI e e z 5 4 a S 6 5 a03ut2c109ca 1 Color registration mark K 5 Color registration sensor Fr PS8 2 Color registration mark C 6 Color registration sensor Rr PS9 3 Color registration mark M Transferring direction 4 Color registration mark Y 96 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 8 WRITE SECTION 2 Detecting the color registration marks The PS8 and PS9 detect the edges of the color registration mark 7 of each color and convert the detected result into digital signals The edge detection is performed at four points edges per mark LO o ae O 4 2 d N 8 a03ut2c110ca lt amp 1 Detecting direction transferring direction 4 Color reg
449. up and down the bun dle press stage manually by rotating the knob 9 12 13 14 15 1 COMPOSITION OPERATION 15ant2c056na 1 Bundle registration plate 9 Knob 2 Bundle registration plate wire 10 Bundle press stage up down home sensor 3 Lift wire 2535 4 Wire arm 11 Bundle press stage up down limit sensor PS45 5 Bundle press stage 12 Bundle press stage up down motor M24 6 Bundle exit auxiliary roller arm 13 Over winding prevention stopper 7 Frontside direction 14 Wire winding shaft 8 Bundle exit auxiliary roller 15 Bundle registration plate home sensor PS16 A 89 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 B Control 1 Trimming mode The bundle press stage up down motor M24 rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage 2 when the main body start signal 1 turns ON M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slant SD 501 ing position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor PS45 turns ON 3 M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage 5 after the bundle clip releases the paper the bundle registration motor M12 assists the paper conveyance operation and the bundle press move ment motor M17 conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position 4 M24 stops when the bundle press stage up down home sensor PS35 turns ON 6 M24 starts to rotate in the forward di
450. us adjustments stores setting data No 71 bizhub PRO C6500 lt LLI a amp o 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS Theory of Op eration Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 1 Flow and functions Steps Processes Functions Step 1 Charging process Distributes electrostatic charges uniformly over the surface of the our photoconductor drums Step 2 Laser exposure process Forms an electrostatic latent image on each photoconductor drum Step 3 Image development process Develops the electrostatic latent image with toner on each photoconductor drum Step 4 First transfer process Transfers the four toner images YMCK created on each photocon ductor drum to the transfer belt one by one to create a complete oner image on the belt Step 5 Second transfer process Transfers the toner image the transfer belt to paper Step 6 Separation process Separates the toner transferred paper from the transfer belt Sub step 1 Drum cleaning Removes the remaining toner on the surface of the photoconductor drums after the first transfer Sub step 2 Exposure before charging Discharges the surface of the photoconductor drums after the drum cleaning Sub step 3 Transfer belt cleaning Removes the remaining toner on the transfer belt surface after the second transfer Sub step 4 Second transfer roller Lw Removes the remaini
451. ut2c009ca 1 Drum 3 Remaining toner 2 Cleaning blade 6 9 Exposure before charging Sub step 2 After the drum cleaning electric potential slightly remains on the drum surface while the toner is completely removed Since charging the drum for the next copying or printing cannot be normally performed with the remaining potential the potential on the drum surface is completely neutralized by means of erase lamp EL This process is called Exposure before charging a03ut2c010ca 1 Drum 3 Remained electric charge 2 Erase lamp EL Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS 6 10 Transfer belt cleaning Sub step 3 The toner remains slightly on the transfer belt after the second transfer The process that cleans the remaining toner off is called Transfer belt cleaning The transfer belt cleaning is made by the cleaning blade Its edge made of urethane rubber scrapes the toner off the belt surface bizhub PRO C6500 3 1 a03ut2c011ca 1 Transfer belt 3 Cleaning blade 2 Remaining toner lt 5 7 a 79 bizhub PRO C6500 lt e LLI a amp S 6 IMAGE CREATING PROCESS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 20 6 11 Second transfer roller Lw cleaning Sub step 4 Since the second transfer roller Lw directly contacts with the ton
452. veyed to the bundle press stage when the bundle press stage 4 receives the paper from the bundle clip 6 5 6 ZZ L in FS e CY 141 3 15ant2c061na 1 Slope 4 Bundle press stage 2 Front side direction 5 Paper conveyance 3 Registration claws 6 Bundle clip Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION A Mechanism N The bundle press stage up down motor M24 12 rotates the wire winding shaft 14 and winds up the lift wire 8 During the initial phase the wire is tightened and the wire arm 4 comes to the horizontal position but the bundle press stage 5 doesn t move up At the time as the wire arm comes horizontal the bundle registration plate wire 2 is loosen and the bundle registration plate 1 moves down and works as the stopper against the registration operation Then the bundle press stage moves up as the wire winding shaft 14 rotates and winds up the up down wire 3 and it stops when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor PS45 11 turns ON SD 501 The home positions shelter position for the bundle registration plate and the bundle press stage are detected by the bundle registration plate home sensor PS16 15 and the bundle press stage up down home sensor PS35 10 respectively The over winding prevention stopper 13 prevents the over winding since you can move
453. wa kc EE aw 32 Do ists Fes Eee d r du LE qute d Behe yA Ge Baspa Sus 33 6 3 4 Stacker entrance transfer Control eigiim re e emen abr ok ER RR ER 37 6 3 5 Slacker paper ext Conve 1466 ERR E kake are 42 fx STAPLER SECTION ppa keel aker dyads ga sawah a qe EDU E dure EN IRR E 44 TA C COMpOSWON E Rud ARE ERA ba qud oe nee 44 T2 DING 008 0 e d uk 45 LEES oom UT 46 TSA Stapler movement uu u L suy cera RE 4 REG SHEA quqa E aaa 46 Cee Ser sss pe ee e Mika Ee be cr bacon Vado ud 49 FS 607 OUTLINE z lt 2 a o a o o CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ve1 0 Sep 2006 8 FOLDING SADDLE STITCHING TRI FOLDING GG KA NA 51 81 3COMPOSILON a cis oie Nh PNG hahaa he ea ford KINANA KNA as 51 Die AA APA AA 52 SE Tr 53 551 Folding mapa za ulus asss sas ERR banged ER ene 53 83 2 Foldhgtransier control eue auo ae Ra 54 8 9 9 gate control pene wu aaa duca madre fe lote 55 i Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A Type Type Multi folding multi stapling device B Functions 1 Functions Non sort mode Exi
454. ward motor M11 Reverse Bundle press Forward movement motor M17 Reverse Bundle press movement home sensor P536 Bundle press stage up down home sensor P535 s 41 15ant2c103na e 1 Conveyed by the bundle clip 4 Bundle press stage up down home position 2 Moved to the shelter position 5 Returning to the home position E B Moved to the press position Only for the paper of 297 mm or more before folding 94 Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 8 3 8 Bundle press control The bundle press is the mechanism to hold the paper during trim operation to prevent the trimming skew after the paper registration operation SD 501 A Mechanism The bundle press plates Up 1 and Lw 15 hold the paper The bundle press plate Up is pulled to the bundle press plate Lw 15 to the direction to hold and press the paper by the spring 13 via the press wires Rt 2 and Lt 12 The bundle press plate UP 1 moves down the spring 13 when the wire winding shaft 4 is rotated by the bundle press motor M23 5 and the release wires Rt 3 and Lt 6 are released The force of the spring presses the paper When M23 keeps rotating the press wire Lt 6 is loosen and the bundle press lower limit sensor PS47 8 turns OFF by the actuator 9 due to the spring 10 and then the paper press position is detected The wir
455. with no condensation LU 202 HT 503 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 1 2 503 A Type Type Fan heater type dehumidifier device B Maintenance Machine service life Same as the main body C Machine data Power source 24 5VDC 200 to 240VAC supplied both from the main body Maximum power consump DC 4 or less AC 290W or less tion Dimensions Dehumidifier fan heater unit 293 W x 82 D x 197 H mm Power unit 121 W x 80 D x 160 H mm Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit Approx 1 5 kg Power supply unit Approx 0 9 kg D Operating environment Temperature 10 to 30 Humidity 10 to 8096RH with no condensation Note The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM 3 1 HO an ES A o ES 2 a03wt1c001ca 1 Up down section 8 Paper feed section 2 HT 503 Optional LU 202 HT 503 OUTLINE 3 PAPER PATH 3 PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006
456. www develop de Service Manual Theory of Operation THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 5 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE 5 2 U tente Aiea metet es S 1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION 5 1 SAFETY WARNINGS SAFETY INFORMATION EG nA pei epe ee yr IMPORTANT NOTIGE eet e Re tete tree end INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT S Legal restrictions on copying U U U U na nini Composition of the service Notation of the service manual n aaa bizhub PRO C6500 ERN 1 aaa rennen nennen aaa nnns 11 For particulars see the contents of the main body DF 609 oj YT 1 CONFIGURATION OPERATION For particulars see the contents of DF 609 PF 601 HT 504 OUTLINE Aes DEP EU EI LAKAN ITA ORTI OG HE ORR RR qot 1 CONFIGURATION OPERATION nennen nennt nente nnns ensi 5 For particulars see the contents of PF 601 HT 504 LU 202 HT 503 MEST 1 5 For particulars see the contents of LU 202 HT 503 RU 503 504 GUTEINE nn CONFIGURATION OPERATION For particulars see the content
457. x 11 8 2 x 115 51 2 x 81 2 Size entry Max 324 x 460 mm When 3 000 sheets loaded Coated paper Sub scan direction is 380 mm or longer Custom paper Max 330 x 488 mm Min 210 x 148mm When 2 000 sheets loaded B5 A5 ni 1050 only 2 C6500 only 8 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China Sub tray 2 B4 SRA4 SRA4S A4 45 B5 BSS 5 55 B6S A6S 13x19 12x18 11x17 8 2x14 8 x11 81 2 x 115 51 2 x 8 71 51 2 x 81 25 2 81 2 x 18 81 4 x 13 8 s x 13 4 8 x 13 8K 3 16 3 16 5 3 Tab paper 4 A3 4 45 5 55 11x17 8 2x 11 8 2x 115 Custom paper Max 330 x 487 mm Min 100 x 148 mm Wide paper A4 A48 B5 55 A5 12x18 11x 17 8 2x 11 8 2 x 115 51 2 x 80 size entry Max 324 x 460 mm i 1050 only 2 C6500 only 8 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China 4 C6500 only A4 and 8 x11 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not assured Paper weight Stacker tray 50 sheets to 244 g m Sub tray 50 sheets to 300 g m Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS D Maintenance Maintenance Same as the main body Machine service life Same as the main body N o D Ko LO N E Machine data Power source LS 501 AC100 to
458. x 17 8 2x 14 8 2 x 115 81 2 x 13 81 4 x 13 8 s x 131 4 8 x 18 8K 16 3 Custom paper Max 324 x 460 mm Min 182 x 257mm Wide paper 45 55 12 18 11 x 17 8 2 x 115 size entry Max 324 x 460 mm x 1050 only 2 C6500 only 3 C6500 supported in all the destinations 1050 only supported in Taiwan and China Paper weight 50 to 244g m N Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain paper and coated paper Paper weight Number of the sheets Plain paper Coated paper Color copy paper 1 50t081g m 50 2 30 2 821091 g m 30 2 15 2 92 to 130 g m 20 2 10 2 181 to 161 g m 15 2 5 2 162 to 209 g m 10 210 to 244 g m 5 4 C6500 only 2 One sheet can be switched to a thick paper 200 g m Staple position Can be automatically changed 90 to 165 mm in accordance with paper size 15ant1c006na 1 Paper size 2 2 mm 2 Paper size 4 x 2 mm 5 ko o SD 501 OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 Folding height 15ant1c011na Folding sheets 1 Folding height A3 12x18 11x17 401 mm or more B4 81 2 x 14 301 mm to 400 mm 45 8 2 x 115 261 mm to 300 2to5 35 mm or less 40 mm or less 45 mm or less 6to 15 45 mm or less 50 mm or less 16 to 30 50 mm or less 55 mm or less
459. xt ER EEG RAT 36 23 Paper exit opening TING ease rece drunk RR E Ea qu 37 po CA deus eee codage iota s iu 38 CONTENTS Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 8 31 Paper exit opening controlli sss exa a RR RUE abad ge a qa Erie e a 38 8 3 2 Main tray up down control cos 40 m m gt 2 lt LLI a gt 2 7 a i Theory of Operation Ver2 0 Sep 2006 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A B OUTLINE 1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A Type eo N Staple cut type multi staple device B Functions 1 Functions Straight mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made Shift mode Exited into the main tray after being shifted Sub tray mode Exited into the sub tray with no processing made Staple mode Exited into the main tray after being flat stapled Subset staple mode Bundles of flat stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being exited at random into the main tray 2 Staple Maximum number of sheets to be flat stapled Plain paper 100 sheets of 50 to 81 g m paper 50 sheets for paper the length of which is 400 mm or longer 60 sheets of 82 to 91 g m paper 50 sheets for paper the length of which is 400
460. y TE NARE 86 erre aa 87 123 HRN NN PA GS Nuda quce ERR d ri 88 1931 Paper reverse TONYO ucc eaa sess er Fade xe KEE EO RR REX KANA 88 19 9 2 ADU conveyance contol uu er ass rovt PRECEDE Py 91 19 3 9 Back side centering correction CONDO uu u ll sss cass usyaq ys rh Rx RR ERR ACER ROT 91 20 REVERSE PAPER SECTION i ood pu E ere Fede a cxx eR riesce d d eee e eO WK 92 OT lo ccu Mr Tc Vr 92 202 DIVE C SAA TT 93 20 2 1 Reverse paper exit drive eee a ee eee ee RA ER 93 2022 Paper ext duve OT S02 DING pama ee her RA sS E E EG ra d 94 200 M GER Doe Gla dd 95 20 9 1 onweyence om oi sae ARA eR FE adress adde Redes 95 20 3 2 Hewerse paper exit timing control isse aka ed bre en ma ERE EE d ud ax 98 20 3 8 Paper exit decurler roller pressure control i s r 99 20 3 4 Reverse decurler roller rotation control aaa a nehmen 100 20 3 5 Paper exit ful detection control ee hh hd rack ea ee RR RR 100 SECTION ERE 101 21A KE KABA KAG udo EE 101 ESTE NET RENE Dd edad WY 102 21 9 Operai s creas eR Cb e e aad aac pa cR CC V acd ae 103 2131 u
461. y of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 IRANSFER SECTION B COMPOSITION OPERATION 4 TRANSFER SECTION 4 4 Composition Sub tray paper full Shift unit sensor P519 Sub tray paper exit sensor PS1 Shift roller Gate Paper exit unit N s L 7 PI transfer roller Main tray exit paper sensor PS6 Entrance roller NG 1 FNS entrance sensor PS4 Transfer roller A op Transfer roller B Main tray exit roller Intermediate transfer roller Bypass gate a04dt2c005ca 71 FS 607 lt 5 7 a 4 TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 2 Drive 5 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 14 lt LLI e z 13 a 5 2 a04dt2c001ca 1 FNS transfer motor M1 12 Shift roller 2 PI transfer roller 13 Main tray exit roller 3 Entrance roller 14 Paper exit opening solenoid SD4 4 Transfer roller A 15 Paper exit roller motor M7 5 Transfer roller B 16 Sub tray paper exit motor M21 6 Bypass gate 17 Sub tray paper exit roller 7 Intermediate transfer roller 18 Paper exit motor M8 8 Bypass gate solenoid 505 19 Shift roller motor M2 9 Paper exit belt 20 Sub tray transfer roller 10 Paper exit arm 21 Gate motor M12 11 Gate 72 Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 IRANSFER SECTION
462. y the paper size VR VR1 the paper size sensor Rr Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 PS110 and Fr PS111 Main scan direction Sub scan direction VR1 5110 ON OFF ON OFF PS111 ON ON OFF OFF 291 1 or lower 13x19 SRA3 SPECIAL SRA4 291 0 to 241 5 12 18 SPECIAL A4 241 4 to 200 5 11x17 16K 8KS 8 x 11 200 4 to 141 1 B5 16K 8KS 45 141 1 to 96 9 SPECIAL SRA4S 81 x 115 8 2 x 145 96 9 or more A4S SPECIAL 81 x 115 8 2 x 145 ON Blocks light of the sensor OFF Transmits light of the sensor 4 3 5 Centering detection control A Outline The position of paper being conveyed is detected by the centering sensor PS1 3 and the LU exit sensor PS107 and the detected result is used in the image processing section to adjust timing to start printing so that the scanned image is properly centered on the paper e PS1 detects the edge of the paper in the main scan direction e PS107 detects the edge of the paper in the sub scan direction 4 5 a a03wt2c013ca 1 Separation roller 2 Pre registration roller driven side 3 Centering sensor PS1 4 Front side Theory of Operation Ver1 0 Sep 2006 4 PAPER FEED SECTION B Detection area The detection range 5 of the centering sensor PS1 6 is 216 mm in the main scan direction The gap between the center 4 of paper 1 in the main scan direction and the origin point 2 of

ineo+ 6500

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents